Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout CONTRACT BETWEEN AUGUSTA GA AND S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION 2012 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT PROGRAMORIGINAL PROJECT MANUAL DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I 902 JAMES BROWN BOULEVARD, AUGUSTA, GA 30901 PROJECT #: CDBG 09030 GRANT RECIPIENT AUGUSTA RECREATION & PARKS DEPARTMENT 2027 LUMPKIN ROAD AUGUSTA, GA 30906 ARCHITECT 2KM ARCHITECTS, INC. 2275 WRIGHTSBORO ROAD AUGUSA, GA 30904 AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT 925 LANEY- WALKER BOULEVARD, 2ND FLOOR AUGUSTA, GA 30901 PHONE (706) 821 -1797 Fax (706) 821 -1784 .I DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I PROJECT DESCRIPTION Renovations at Dyess Park located in downtown Augusta at 902 James Brown Blvd. Phase I improvements include: • Ornamental Fencing, Brick Piers and Automatic Gates. • Renovate Entry Plaza (including walks, plantings, art wall, and electronic sign). • Enhancements to Community Center include: Reroofing, Repainting Exterior, Window Restoration. • Replace damaged Sidewalks along James Brown Blvd, D'Antignac Street, and 8 Street and install Handicap Accessible Curb -cuts. • Replace existing Park Trees. • Extend meandering Walking Track. • Construct a new Picnic Shelter with Public Toilets. • Enhance Handicap Parking Stalls. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTIONS Page SECTION A - PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS SECTION B - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Bid Form & Tabulation B - 1 Representations, Certifications & Other Statements of Bidders B - 5 Bidder's Qualifications B -11 ARC Business License B -14 Georgia General Contractor's License B -15 Bid Bond B -16 Certificate as to Corporate Principal B-17 SECTIONS Page SECTION C - CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Notice of Award C- 1 Contract C - 2 Subcontractor Contract(s) C- 6 Contractor's Certification C- 7 (Labor Standards & Wage Requirements) Subcontractor's Certification C- 9 (Labor Standards & Wage Requirements) Performance Bond Payment Bond Insurance Certificate Notice to Proceed Lobbying Certification C -11 C -12 C -13 C -14 C -15 SECTION D - FEDERAL & GENERAL REQUIREMENTS General Conditions D- 1 Supplemental General Conditions D -36 Federal Labor Standard Provisions D -39 Wage Decision Transcript D -46 Contractor Reporting Requirements D-49 City's Local Small Business Program Statement D -56 Davis Bacon Poster — W -1321 D -57 Certification of Non - Segregated Facilities- Contractor D -58 Certification of Non - Segregated Facilities- Subcontractor D -59 SECTIONS Page SECTION E - PRECONSTRUCTION Preconstruction Agenda E- 1 SECTION F - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . Rear Section of Manual ii BID FORM & TABULATION Project Number CDBG #09030 Bid Issue Date 5/15/2012 Project Title Dyess Park Improvements Phase I Project Description Dyess Park Improvements (detailed description attached) Bidders are encouraged to carefully examine the documents and construction site. Failure to do so shall be at the bidder's risk. Submit bid to: Geri A. Sams Procurement Department 530 Greene Street — Room 605 Augusta, Georgia 30901 706 — 821 -2422 Name of Company: S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. Bidder's Address: 4324 WHEELER ROAD MARTINEZ, GA 30907 Federal Tax ID Number: 58- 1759076 Bidder's Telephone Number: (706) 731 -0978 Bidder's Fax Number: (706) 733 - 4030 Name of Person Submitting the Bid: STEVE CLIFTON Title of Person Submitting the Bid: PRESIDENT This is to acknowledge that an authorized representative(s) of the above named company has familiarized himself /herself /themselves with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work, all instructions, General and Supplemental Conditions, Contractor's compliance and reporting requirements, the specifications, drawings, and addenda. The City requires a minimum acceptance period of 60 calendar days. "Acceptance period," as used In this provision, means the number of calendar days available to AHCDD for awarding a contract from the date specified in this solicitation for receipt of bids. By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that neither it nor any person or firm who has an interest in the bidder's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by either the U.S. Department of Housing & Urban Development, the City or the Augusta Housing & Community Development Department, according to AHCDD policies and procedures. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids. Acknowledgment of Addenda: The bidder acknowledges the following addenda: (Failure to acknowledge may cause bid rejection.) Addenda No. 1 Addenda Date 6 - - Addenda No. 2 Addenda Date 6 -27 -12 Addenda No. N/A Addenda Date N/A Addenda No. N/A Addenda Date N/A BID FORM & TABULATION QUI B Itsse® L To be responsive, the bidder must submit the following documents in a sealed envelope marked on its face with the correct bidding information with his /her bid: 1. Bid Form & Bid tabulation; 2. Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of Bidders; 3. Bidder's Qualifications (including a Financial Statement) 4. ARC Business license or license from your local Governmental entity 5. Georgia General Contractor's License; 6. Certificate as to Corporate Principal 7. Bid Bond and Certificates; 8. Attachment B (Statement of Non - Discrimination, Non - collusion Affidavit or Prime Bidder /Offeror, Conflict of Interest and Contractor Affidavit & Agreement) The Owner shall reject as non - responsive any bid that does not include each of the above documents, fully completed and properly executed. The bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required to complete the construction contract as per the requirements of the construction documents, all in accordance therewith, for the sum of: Si vh I et) -fl 1, 6 ' 9 1'?{ rta. °71" SQ/ d 4f/ e Y i fat � NAG / DOLLARS $ 6,59 , 3'49 - B -2 Item # 1 Item Description The bidder may continue by copying and attaching this section to the Bid Form. Unit Measure Price Cost to Add or Delete sidewalk demolition, disposal and installation of new 4" thick x 5' wide concrete sidewalk (per 100SF) Estimated Quantity In Unit Bid Price Sum of all cost extensions are included in the base bid $ $ $ $ $ 450,e1 1 BID FORM & TABULATION B -3 The Owner © is ❑ is not requesting deductive alternates for this bid. To offer a bid the bidder is requested to breakout the following items from the base bid. Each item shall include all labor, materials, equipment and services required to complete item. Item 1 2 3 Item Donor' • ron Deduct to use ,re—en:ineered metal buildin for •icnic shelter (alternate design) Delete existin: Communit Center Window Sash re•lacement Delete existin: Communit Center exterior re.ai tin: Delete existin: Communit Center Roof re.lacement Item Bid q 9L04'° $ The undersigned agrees to commence actual physical work on the site with an adequate force and equipment within ten (10) days of a date to be specified in a written order of the Owner and to complete fully all work in 180 consecutive calendars days from and including said date. The undersigned further agrees to pay, as liquidated damages, the sum of $100 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter that the work is not complete as provided in the General Conditions. Trading and doing business as: If fictitious trade name is employed in the conduct of business, insert such name and complete, as appropriate. This foregoing fictitious or trade name: ❑ is ❑ is not registered under State Law. Name of person submitting the bid N/A Business address N/A Bidder's Signature Date N/ N/ A Witness Witness Name N/A Witness Signature N/A Date N/A Name of Partnership If fictitious trade name is employed in the conduct of business, insert such name and complete, as appropriate. This foregoing fictitious or trade name: is E is not registered under State Law. I1 N/A Name of person submitting the bid N/A Business address N/A Bidder's Signature Date N/A N/A Witness Witness Name Witness Signature Date N/A N/A N/A S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. Name of person submitting the bid STEVE CLIFTON Business Address 4324 WHEELER ROAD MARTINEZ, GA 30907 BID FORM e TABULATION Title PRESIDEN Date 7 -12 -12 Certificate as to Corporate Principal MOLLY CLIFTON certify that I am the Secretary of the corporation named as Principal in the within bond: That STEVE CLIFTON who signed the bond on behalf of the Principal, was then PRESIDENT of said corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine; and that said bond was duly signed, sealed, and attested to for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body. (Corporate Seal) REPRESE °c!TATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATEMENT OF BIDDERS 1 I I r I I I 1 1 B -5 1. Certificate of Independent Price Determination: a. The bidder certifies that: The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently, without, for the purpose of restricting competition, any consultation, communication, or agreement with any other bidder or competitor relating to: (a) those prices; (b) the intention to submit a bid; or (c) the methods or factors used to calculate the prices offered; (2) The prices in this bid have not been and will not be knowingly disclosed by the bidder, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or competitor before bid opening (in the case of a sealed bid solicitation) or contract award (in the case of a competitive proposal solicitation) unless otherwise required by law; and (3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other concern to submit or not to submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. b. Each signature on the bid is considered to be a certification by the signatory that the signatory: (1) Is the person in the bidder's organization responsible for determining the prices being offered in this bid or proposal, and that the signatory has not participated and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs a.(1) through a.(3) above; or (2) Has been authorized, in writing, to act as agent for the following principals in certifying that those principals have not participated, and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs a. (1) through a. (3) above. (1) [Insert full name of person(s) in the bidder's organization responsible for determining the prices offered in this bid or proposal, and the title of his or her position in the bidder's organization] As an authorized agent, does certify that the principals named in subdivision above have not participated, and will not participate, in any action contrary to subparagraphs a.(1) through a.(3) above; and (4) As an agent, has not personally participated, and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs a. (1) through a. (3) above. c. If the bidder deletes or modifies subparagraph (a) 2 above, the bidder must furnish with its bid a signed statement setting forth in detail the circumstances of the disclosure. (3) LAMAR MCCOY - PROJECT MANAGER EPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATEMENT OF BIDDERS d. Non- collusion affidavit. (Applicable to all contracts for construction and equipment.) Each person, firm, or agency submitting a bid /proposal shall execute an affidavit, in the form provided by the Procurement Department, to the effect that he /she has not colluded with any other person, firm or corporation in regard to any bid /proposal submitted in response to this solicitation. In addition, a non - collusion affidavit for each subcontractor(s) shall be submitted. 2. Contingent Fee Representation and Agreement: a. Definitions. As used in this provision: (1) "Bona fide employee" means a person, employed by a bidder and subject to the bidder's supervision and control as to time, place, and manner of performance, who neither exerts, nor proposes to exert improper influence to solicit or obtain contracts nor holds out as being able to obtain any contract(s) through improper influence. (2) "Improper influence" means any influence that induces or tends to induce the Owner or Augusta, Georgia employee or officer to give consideration or to act regarding an Augusta Housing and Community Development Department (AHCDD) sponsored contract on any basis other than the merits of the matter. b. The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid that, except for full -time bona fide employees working solely for the bidder, the bidder: (1) n has has not employed or retained any person or company to solicit or obtain this contract; and (2) E has I X has not paid or agreed to pay to any person or company employed or retained to solicit or obtain this contract any commission, percentage, brokerage, or other fee contingent upon or resulting from the award of this contract. c. If the answer to either b.(1) or b.(2) above is affirmative, the bidder shall make an immediate and full written disclosure to the Owner and AHCDD. d. Any misrepresentation by the bidder shall give the Owner the right to: (1) (2) (3) terminate the contract; at its discretion, deduct from contract payments the amount of any commission, percentage, brokerage, or other contingent fee; or take other remedy pursuant to the contract. R-^ 1 3. Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions (applicable to contracts exceeding $100,000): a. The definitions and prohibitions contained in Section 1352 of title 31, United States Code, are hereby incorporated by reference in paragraph b of this certification. b. The bidder, by signing its bid, hereby certifies to the best of his or her knowledge and belief as of the date of this bid, that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an E ' 1 EPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATEMENT OF IDDERS officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress on his or her behalf in connection with the awarding of a contract resulting from this solicitation; (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including profit or fee received under a covered Federal transaction) have been paid, or will be paid, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress on his or her behalf in connection with this solicitation, the bidder shall complete and submit, with its bid, OMB standard form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities;" and He or she will include the language of this certification in all subcontracts at any tier and require that all recipients of subcontract awards in excess of $100,000 shall certify and disclose accordingly. c. Submission of this certification and disclosure is a prerequisite for making or entering into this contract imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, United States Code. Any person who makes an expenditure prohibited under this provision or who fails to file or amend the disclosure form to be filed or amended by this provision, shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000, and not more than $100,000, for each such failure. (3) 4. Organizational Conflicts of Interest Certification: The bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief and except as otherwise disclosed, he or she does not have any organizational conflict of interest which is defined as a situation in which the nature of work to be performed under this proposed contract and the bidder's organizational, financial, contractual, or other interests may, without some restriction on future activities: a. Result in an unfair competitive advantage to the bidder; or, b. Impair the bidder's objectivity in performing the contract work. In the absence of any actual or apparent conflict, I hereby certify that to the best my knowledge and belief, no actual or apparent conflict of interest exists with regard to my possible performance of this procurement (Please initial) 5. Bidder's Certification of Eligibility: a. By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief, neither it, nor any person or firm which has an interest in the bidder's firm, nor any of the bidder's subcontractors, is ineligible to: (1) Be awarded contracts by any agency of the United States Government, HUD, the State of Georgia, Augusta, Georgia, or AHCDD; or, (2) Participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. b. The certification above is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when making award. If it is later determined that the bidder knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, the contract may be terminated for default, and the bidder may be debarred or suspended from participation in HUD programs and other Federal contract programs. B -7 REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATEMENT OF BIDDERS B -8 6. Minimum Bid Acceptance Period: a. "Acceptance period," as used in this provision, means the number of calendar days available to the Owner for awarding a contract from the date specified in this solicitation for receipt of bids. b. This provision supersedes any language pertaining to the acceptance period that may appear elsewhere in this solicitation. c. The Owner requires a minimum acceptance period of sixty (60) calendar days. d. A bid allowing less than the Owner's minimum acceptance period will be rejected. e. The bidder agrees to execute all that it has undertaken to do, in compliance with its bid, if that bid is accepted in writing within: (1) The acceptance period stated in paragraph (c) above. 7. Certification of Eligibility Under the Davis -Bacon Act: (applicable to construction contracts exceeding $2,000) a. By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that neither it nor any person or firm who has an interest in the bidder's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). b. No part of the contract resulting from this solicitation shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). c. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 8. Certification of Non - Segregated Facilities (applicable to contracts exceeding $10,000) a. The bidder's attention is called to the clause entitled Equal Employment Opportunity of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. b. "Segregated facilities," as used in this provision, means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees, that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national origin because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. c. By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause in the contract. REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATEMENT OF BIDDERS d. The bidder further agrees that (except where it has obtained identical certifications from proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) prior to entering into subcontracts which exceed $10,000 and are not exempt from the requirements of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause, it will: (1) Obtain identical certifications from the proposed subcontractors; (2) Retain the certifications in its files; and (3) Forward the following notice to the proposed subcontractors (except if the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods): Notice to Prospective Subcontractors of Requirement for Certifications of Non- segregated Facilities A Certification of Non - segregated Facilities must be submitted before the award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause of the prime contract. The certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly, semiannually, or annually). Note: The penalty for making false statements in bids is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001. 9. Clean Air and Water Certification (applicable to contracts exceeding $100,000) The bidder certifies that a. Any facility to be used in the performance of this contract:: ❑ is © is not listed on the Environmental Protection Agency List of Violating Facilities. b. The bidder will immediately notify the Owner and AHCDD, before award, of the receipt of any communication from the Administrator, or a designee, of the Environmental Protection Agency, indicating that any facility that the bidder proposes to use for the performance of the contract is under consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities; and, c. The bidder will include a certification substantially the same as this certification, including this paragraph (c), in every nonexempt subcontract. B -9 REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATEMENT OF BIDDERS 10. Bidder's Signature: This form must be submitted with the bid with all information completed. The bidder hereby certifies that the information contained in these certifications and representations is accurate, complete, and current. Failure to submit this certification properly completed and executed will render the bidder non- responsive. (Signature and Date) STEVE CLIFTON (Typed or Printed Name) PRESIDENT (Title) (Company Name) (Company Address) S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. 4324 WHEELER ROAD MARTINEZ, GA 30907 7 -12 -12 B -10 1. Name of Bidder: S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. 2. Date Company Organized: 2 -13 -1987 3. Permanent main office address 4324 WHEELER ROAD MARTINEZ, GA 30907 4. State incorporated GEORGIA 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm name? 25 10. List the three (3) most important structures recently completed by your company, stating approximate cost of each, month and year, complete name and telephone number of owner's representative. Spinx $1,308,925 Completed 6/12 Tony Peters (864) 230 -0103 Kent's Korner $872,870 Completed 5/12 Chase Ingram (803) 564 -5944 KJ's Market $2,875,424 Completed 12/11 W.Lee Flowers (800) 968 -6016 6. Listing of current contracts: (Schedule these, showing nature of the work, gross amount of each contract, anticipated dates for completion, name and telephone number of owner's representative). C -store Circle K $704,000 8 -12 Approx Complete Scott Beard (704) 302 -5342 C -store Jet Foods $612,000 12 -12 Approx Complete David Usry (478) 552 -2588 Retail Shop Patel Investments $761,076 11 -12 Approx Complete Christopher Booker (706) 798 -6792 7. General character of work usually performed by your company. General Contractor & Design Build Contractor 1 1 1 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary add separate sheets for items requiring additional explanation. This information may be submitted in a separate sealed envelope marked "Bidder's Qualifications and Financial Statement ". In the event your bid is not selected for award, this envelope will be returned to the Contractor unopened. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? NO 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? NO B -11 12. Experience in construction work similar in scope to this project AUGUSTA CHRISTIAN FIELD HOUSE, AUGUSTA PAIN CENTER AUGUSTA CHRISTIAN FOUNDER'S CAMPUS, PONDER PLACE KJ'S MARKET 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your firm, including the officers and proposed construction superintendent. See Exhibit "A" BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 11. List your major equipment available for use on this contract. Unlimited Use of Equipment 14. Credit available for administration of this contract (furnish written evidence.) See Exhibit "B" 15. Financial report not more than three (3) months old and containing a balance sheet providing at least the information on the following page. B -12 1 CURRENT ASSETS: Cash Joint Venture Accounts Accounts Receivable Notes Receivable Accrued Interest on Notes Deposits Material and Prepaid Expense Total Current Assets FIXED ASSETS - NET OTHER ASSETS TOTAL ASSETS: 1,342,809.79 CURRENT LIABILITIES Accounts Payable Notes Payable Accrued Interest on Notes Provision for Income Taxes Advances Received from Owners Accrued Salaries Accrued Payroll Taxes Other Total Current Liabilities OTHER LIABILITIES 248,897.40 0.00 826,202.72 42,406.50 0.00 0.00 175,635.97 1,293,142.59 49,667.20 603,231.47 34,610.48 0.00 — 62,000.00 0.00 3,592.85 — 2,590.12 134,110.66 710,955.34 CAPITAL Capital Stock 54, 692.44 Authorized and Outstanding Shares, Par Value Earned Surplus 577,162.01 TOTAL LIABILITIES AND CAPITAL 1 ,34 2 ,809. 79 BALANCE SHEET ASSETS LIABILITIES AND CAPITAL The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City's Augusta Housing & Community Development Department in veer' -lion of he recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. 1 Signature of Bidder Date 7 -12 -12 State of ���-3,�� 3e� a r9 il,� ) ss. CC) County of LA tnd J Dian' Gnu S h 1 r correct. C n cwt rZ.�` c4 W —� Sworn to before me this 1 2' day of ,.� Lilo BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Name of Bidder STEVE CLIFTON Title of Bidder PRESIDENT ,20 �Z being duly sworn deposes and says that he is *eve C II li-rion of and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and My Conk ,- f i 0 s ••• ••••,;•••• THIS CiiitiOtAttle• BE Po. THE' BUSiNk. CERCERTIFICA TE -- MAILING ADDRESS INFORMATION S D CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION INC. P 0 BOX 944 EVANS, GA 30809 23322 - SI BUSINESS TYPE:NT BUSiNg,.:SS.,„; ISSUE DATE: 01/23/2012 CERTIFICATE THE,NAME OF: $ D CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION INC THE LU: NSEA ND:INSPECTION,:DWARTMENT SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT TO SUSPEND ANY, CERTIHOATg' IF THE BUSINESS VIOLATES 'ANY LAWOR ORDINANCE OF THE UNITED STATES, THE STATE CF GEORGIA, OR:RICHNK COUNTY. 2375414 You may contact the Board at: GEORGIA STATE BOARD FOR RESIDENTIAL & GENERAL CONTRACTORS 237 COLISEUM DRIVE, MACON, GEORGIA 31217 -3858 478 - 207 -2440 (phone) webite: wwwsos.ga.gov /p1b /contractors/ S D Clifton Construction Inc P. 0. Box 949 Evans GA 30809 STATE OF GEORGIA BRIAN P. KEMP, Secretary of State State Licensing Board for Residential/General Contractor General Contractor Company LICENSE NO. GCC0000798 S D Clifton Construction Inc P. O. Box 949 Evans GA 30809 Qualifying Agent: Stephen Dowis Clifton Qualifying Agent License NO: GCQA000346 EXPIRATION DATE - 06/30/2014 Active Above is your license issued by the Georgia State Board of Residential and General Contractors. A pocket -sized license card is below. Please make note of the expiration date on your license. It is your responsibility to renew your license before it expires. License renewals may be completed prior to the expiration date via the Board's website or by obtaining a paper renewal from the Board office. Reminder: It is your responsibility to keep your insurance current. Please provide the Board with a copy of your Certificate of Insurance each time your insurance is renewed. The Board does receive copies of cancellation notices which will affect the status of your license. It is the licensee's responsibility to notify the board office immediately of any change of name or address. You may update your address online at the board's website at www.sos.ga.gov /p1b /.contractors/ . STATE OF GEORGIA BRIANT. KEMP, Secretary of State State Licensing Board for Residential/General Contractor General Contractor Company LICENSE NO. GCC0000798 S D Clifton Construction Inc P. O. Box 949 — Evans GA 30809 Qualifying Agent: Stephen Dowis Clifton Qualifying Agent License NO: GCQA000346 EXPIRATION DATE - 06/30/2014 Active THIS TAX RECEIPT TO BE POSTED IN A CONSPICUOUS PLACE IN THE BUSINESS HEREIN DESCRIBED I This Tax Receipt Expires December 31, 2012 2 0 1 2 I Account No. 00343 Issued On January 24, 2012 Tax Receipt # 6030 AN OCCUPATIONAL TAX WAS PAID BY S D CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC COLUMBIA COUNTY GBOl Gl.�- ON A BUSINESS LOCATION AT 4324 WHEELER ROAD TRACT B TO CONDUCT THE FOLLOWING BUSINESS SUBJECT TO COLUMBIA COUNTY ORDINANCES REGISTRATION FEE .00 New Single - Family Housing Construction (except Ope S D CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC PO BOX 949 EVANS GA 30809 Columbia County Occupational Tax This License is NOT Transferable TOTAL TAX PAID OCCUPATIONAL TAX 393.00 PENALTY AMT .00 INTEREST AMT .00 EXEMPT AMOUNT .00 393.00 1 THE BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT TO SUSPEND ANY OCCUPATION TAX RECEIPT IF THE BUSINESS STATE OF GEORGIA, OR COLUMBIA COUNTY. VIOLATES ANY LAW OR ORDINANCE OF THE UNITED STATES, THE STEVE CLIFTON G rounded in a Bachelor of Science degree in Building Construction from Auburn University and a passion to build, Steve Clifton began his professional career estimating and purchasing for Construction Management Services in Hilton Head, South Carolina. Steve's ability and desire to do more quickly elevated him to the "in field" position of Superintendent, directing and coordinating subcontractors and material suppliers. OWNER Being recognized as a capable and aggressive leader, Steve had the opportunity of joining Austin Construction and Development Company in Hilton Head, South Carolina as a superintendent and within a year and a half became Project manager, and within a short time Vice President of the Commercial Construction Division. He was responsible for estimating and construction , renovation work and new construction for both residential and commercial projects. The company grew in volume to over 16 million per year during his tenure. Steve elected in June of 1986 to move to Augusta, Georgia, which is the home of his wife Molly, and start his own construction business. Steve has established his business on Christian principle, integrity, hard work, and striving to meets his clients' project needs. EXHIBIT "A" PROJECTS EXAMPLES OVER $1,000,000 South Beach Club $5,000,000 Augusta Harley Davidson $2,424,271 Blue Ridge Commons $1,149,000 Pump N Shop Culligan Water Office $1,084,865 Pump N Shop Hwy 56 $1,028,150 PROJECT SUPERVISORS With an average of over 32 years experience per supervisor, S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. fields one of the best teams in the business. BOB WALLACE - 44 years experience A broad range of construction experience over the last 44 years from building high rise concrete structures to the meticulous details of cabinet building and millwork makes Bob an asset to every project. Coining up through the ranks from apprentice carpenter to superintendent gives Bob the understanding of all phases of the work, ability to take charge of the project and press the day to day activities to complete projects on time. Bob has a grown son and daughter and is proud of his four grandchildren. ARTHUR SWIFT- 37 years experience Arty has 36 years experience in construction. He started in Residential Construction and Roofing & Siding. For a while he owned his own company. In 1983 he moved to Augusta and worked as a Foreman building Schools, Stores and Churches. In 1983 he became a Superintendent, managing projects such as: High Schools, Water Treatment Plants, Labs, Office Buildings, Gyms, & Recreational Parks. Arty has 3 sons and 1 granddaughter. DON PRICE - 34 years experience Don is a tireless supervisor in the field, always putting in more time whenever necessary. Don has worked in residential doing house framing. And he has also done quite a lot of industrial construction including the Oxygen Facility at Russell Dam, a Peanut Factory, a Waste Water Treatment Plant to name a few. In Commerical Don has been working on Stores, Schools, Hospitals renovation, Churches, Restaurants as well as many other types of projects. He has been married for 23 years to his wife Denise and they have 3 children and 1 grandson. RICK WEST - 34 years experience The call of construction during his young years through "Lincoln Logs" and Tennessee community `barn raisin' led Rick into a growing love for construction. Construction won out over football coaching and full time youth work. Rick has had construction leadership at Savannah River Site for 9 years, commercial and industrial projects in the Augusta area another 5 years before joining S.D. Clifton Construction Inc. as project superintendent. Rick's understanding of construction and his genuine concern to meet the clients needs has proven to make building a good experience for the owner and the projects to move to completion quickly. Rick is married to Sheri and they have a son, Ryan. 1 PROJECT SUPERVISORS 1 1 DON GOLDEN - 25 years experience ' Don started in the construction business during high school to earn spending money by helping his father survey. After high school he secured a position as a carpenter's helper at Sean in Augusta, GA. In 1984 secured ' a carpenter's position with another company in Atlanta, GA. Approximately 6 months after his move to Atlanta, he was promoted to Superintendent. Don spent another year and a ' half in Atlanta before returning to Augusta. His local construction history has consisted of working on jobs such as, Sitton Motor Lines, Wilkes County Jail, South Carolina State Prison in Columbia, First Baptist Church of Thompson, Thompson High School, Boys and Girls Club Center, Taco Bell, Gracewood Elementary as well as numerous others. ' AL DUSTIN, JR. - 23 years experience Working under a tough taskmaster makes a man I know the discipline of construction. Al's father is a superintendent from the old school and has learned the trade well from the ditch up. He is a capable craftsman with a tireless urgency to complete projects on time with good coordination and communication with the owner. Al Jr. and his wife Tammy are North Augusta Residents. Al has 1 daughter, I grandson and 1 granddaughter. PROJECT SUPERVISORS The success of any project is preparedness, urgent pressing of the construction schedule and communications at the construction site. S.D. Clifton Construction, Inc. has superintendents that are knowledgeable, experienced, and skilled in both the work trades and in people relationship. Knowledge, communication, and urgency to complete the project on time is the driving force behind each of our superintendents. MIKE ERB - 32 years experience Attention to details and urgency to complete his projects has been the trademark of Mike during his 32 years in construction. It takes construction experience and personal construction skills to be able to quickly and precisely take a project from clearing the ground to presenting the key to the owner in the shortest possible time. Quality is in Mike's nature, and he requires quality from all who work for him. The years of crafting fine trim has uniquely qualified him to judge clearly, accurately and quickly the acceptability of finished work. Mike has been a superintendent with S. D. Clifton Construction for over 21 years. Mike and his wife Susan have two daughters, a son and 4 granddaughters and 2 grandson. They are natives to Augusta. DONALD E. "TINY" DUNTON - 29 years experience Tiny has been a dedicated worker in the construction industry since 1980. He brings a wealth of local, national and international experience to any size project including industrial, institutional, governmental, residential and commercial construction. Tiny previously worked for J.A. Jones completing the finishes of 5 Westin Hotels. A "hands -on" superintendent, he monitors job progress, coordinates material delivery and storage, and directs the daily work of subcontractors, craft foreman and engineers. His meticulous attention to detail and ability to communicate well with the customer make him a valuable asset. He expects dependability, quality and timeliness from himself and those who work with him. Tiny and his wife Susanne live in the Sweetwater area of Edgefield County and have one son and one granddaughter. 1 EXHIBIT "B" S T1 I�1 TG�7+ R. Thomas Coghill SunTrust Bank, Augusta vas aatV�7� Market President 801 Broad St ' POBox927 Augusta GA 30903 Tel 706.821.2214 Fax 706.821.3065 tom.coghNl@suntrust.com March 28, 2012 Mr. Stephen Clifton President S D Clifton Construction Co., Inc. ' 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, Ga. 30907 ' Dear Steve, This letter is to confirm that SD Clifton Construction Co., Inc. is in good standing with SunTrust and currently has an $800,000 line of credit with $ -0- in outstandings. All past transactions have been handled in a very satisfactory manner. ' If you need any additional information, please contact me at 706 -821 -2214. Thank you for banking with SunTrust. ' Sincerely, bede,4 Street Address: 4324 WHEELER ROAD City, State, Zip Code: MARTINEZ, GA 30907 Attachment B You Must Complete and Return all 3 pages of Attachment B with Your Submittal. Document Must Be Notarized. Augusta, Georgia Procurement Department ATTN: Procurement Director 530 Greene Street, Suite 605 Augusta, Georgia 30901 Name of Bidder: S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. Phone: 706-731-0978 Fax: 706 - 733 -4030 Email: diane @sdclifton.com Do You Have A Business License? Yes: X No: Business License # for your Company (Must Provide): RICHMOND (LCC19990003810) COLUMBIA (00343) Company must be licensed in the Governmental entity for where they do the majority of their business. If your Governmental entity (State or Local) does not require a business license, your company will be required to obtain a Richmond County business license if awarded a Bid /RFP /RFQ. For further Information contact the License and Inspection Department @ 706 312 -5162. List the State, City & County that issued your license: GEORGIA, AUGUSTA, RICHMOND Acknowledgement of Addenda: ( #1) X : ( #2) X : ( #3) : (#4) : ( #5) : ( #6) : ( #7) : ( #8) NOTE: CHECK APPROPRIATE BOX(ESl ADD ADDITIONAL NUMBERS AS APPLICABLE Statement of Non- Discrimination The undersigned understands that it is the policy of Augusta, Georgia to promote full and equal business opportunity for all persons doing business with Augusta, Georgia. The undersigned covenants that we have not discriminated, on the basis of race, religion, gender, national origin or ethnicity, with regard to prime contracting, subcontracting or partnering opportunities. The undersigned covenants and agrees to make good faith efforts to ensure maximum practicable participation of local small businesses on the bid or contract awarded by Augusta, Georgia. The undersigned further covenants that we have completed truthfully and fully the required forms regarding good faith efforts and local small business subcontractor /supplier utilization. The undersigned further covenants and agrees not to engage in discriminatory conduct of any type against local small businesses, in conformity with Augusta, Georgia's Local Small Business Opportunity Program. Set forth below is the signature of an officer of the bidding /contracting entity with the authority to bind the entity. The undersigned acknowledge and warrant that this Company has been made aware of understands and agrees to take affirmative action to provide such companies with the maximum practicable opportunities to do business with this Company; That this promise of non- discrimination as made and set forth herein shall be continuing in nature and shall remain in full force and effect without interruption; That the promises of non - discrimination as made and set forth herein shall be and are hereby deemed to be made as part of and incorporated by reference into any contract or portion thereof which this Company may hereafter obtain and; That the failure of this Company to satisfactorily discharge any of the promises of nondiscrimination as made and set forth herein shall constitute a material breach of contract entitling Augusta, Georgia to declare the contract in default and to exercise any and all applicable rights remedies including but not limited to cancellation of the contract, termination of the contract, suspension and debarment from future contracting opportunities, and withholding and or forfeiture of compensation due and owing on a contract. Bid 12 -169 Dyess Park Improvements Page 9 of 14 Attachment B - Page 2 of 3 Non- Collusion of Prime Bidder /Offeror By submission of a bid, the vendor certifies, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: (a) The prices in the proposal have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communications, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other vendor or with any competitor. (b) Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in the proposal have not been knowingly disclosed by the vendor prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other vendor or to any competitor. (c) No attempt has been made, or will be made, by the vendor to induce any other person, partnership or corporation to submit or not to submit a proposal for the purpose of restricting competition. Collusions and fraud in bid preparation shall be reported to the State of Georgia Attorney General and the United States Justice Department. Conflict of Interest By submission of a bid, the responding firm certifies, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: 1. No circumstances exist which cause a Conflict of Interest in performing the services required by this ITB, and 2. That no employee of the County, nor any member thereof, not any public agency or official affected by this ITB, has any pecuniary interest in the business of the responding firm or his sub - consultant(s) has any interest that would conflict in any manner or degree with the performance related to this ITB. By submission of a bid, the vendor certifies under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: (a) The prices in the bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communications, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other vendor or with any competitor. (b) Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in the bid have not knowingly been disclosed by the vendor prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other vendor or competitor. c) No attempt has been made, or will be made, by the vendor to induce any other person, partnership or cooperation to submit or not to submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. For any breach or violation of this provision, the County shall have the right to terminate any related contract or agreement without liability and at its discretion to deduct from the price, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such fee, commission, percentage, gift, payment or consideration. You Must Complete and Return all 3 pages of Attachment B with Your Submittal. Document Must Be Notarized. Bid 12 -169 Dyess Park Improvements Page 10 of 14 Attachment B - Page 3 of 3 Contractor Affidavit and Agreement By executing this affidavit, the undersigned contractor verifies its compliance with 0.C.G.A. 13- 10 -91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm, or corporation which is contracting with Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissioners has registered with and is participating in a federal work authorization program* [any of the electronic verification of work authorization programs operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security or any equivalent federal work authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify information of newly hired employees, pursuant to the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA), P.L. 99- 603], in accordance with the applicability provisions and deadlines established in 0.C.G.A 13- 10 -91. The undersigned further agrees that, should it employ or contract with any subcontractor(s) in connection with the physical performance of services pursuant to this contract with Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissioners, contractor will secure from such subcontractor(s) similar verification of compliance with 0.C.G.A 13 -10 -91 on the Subcontractor Affidavit provided in Rule 300- 10- 01 -.08 or a substantially similar form. Contractor further agrees to maintain records of such compliance and provide a copy of each such verification to the Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissioners at the time the subcontractor(s) is retained to perform such service. Georgia Law requires your company to have an E- Verify *User Identification Number (Company I.D.) on or after July 1, 2009. For additional information or to enroll your company, visit the State of Georgia website: https: / /e verifv.uscis.gov /enroll/ and /or http: / /vvww.dol.state.ga.us /pdf /rules /300 10 1 .pdf a "E- Verify * User Identification Number (Company I.D.) 212153 NOTE: E- VERIFY USER IDENDIFICATION NUMBER (COMPANY I.D.) MUST BE PROVIDED: IN ADDITION, THE RECOMMENDED AWARDED VENDOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COPY OF HOMELAND SECURITY'S MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING (MOU) The undersigned further agrees to submit a notarized copy of Attachment B and any required documentation noted as part of the Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissions specifications which govern this process. In addition, the undersigned agrees to submit all required forms for any subcontractor(s) as requested and or required. I further understand that my submittal will be deemed non - compliant if any part of this process is violated. S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION INC. At i %iti BY: Authorize• % icer or Agent (Contra . ' Signature) Company PRESIDENT Title of Authorized Officer or Agent of Contractor STEVE CLIFTON Printed Name of Authorized Officer or Agent tt SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE 12. DAY OF �u 1' 1 Lay Couyt My Commission pHlititu u;'' 2q - [ 4 GOUGH Notary Public tl iU s t C o REV. 7/22/2013; fi owl). , 20 NOTARY SEAL pages of Attachment B with Your Submittal. Document Must Be Notarized. Bid 12 -169 Dyess Park Improvements Page 11 of 14 1 2375414 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Above is your license issued by the Georgia State Board of Residential and General Contractors. A pocket -sized license card is below. Please make note of the expiration date on your license. It is your responsibility to renew your license before it expires. License renewals may be completed prior to the expiration date via the Board's website or by obtaining a paper renewal from the Board office. Reminder: It is your responsibility to keep your insurance current. Please provide the Board with a copy of your Certificate of Insurance each time your insurance is renewed. The Board does receive copies of cancellation notices which will affect the status of your license. It is the licensee's responsibility to notify the board office immediately of any change of name or address. You may update your address online at the board's website at www.sos.ga.gov /p1b /contractors/ . You may contact the Board at: GEORGIA STATE BOARD FOR RESIDENTIAL & GENERAL CONTRACTORS 237 COLISEUM DRIVE, MACON, GEORGIA 31217 -3858 478 - 207 -2440 (phone) website: www.sos.ga.gov /p1b /contractors/ S D Clifton Construction Inc P. O. Box 949 Evans GA 30809 STATE OF GEORGIA BRIAN P. KEMP, Secretary of State State Licensing Board for Residential /General Contractor General Contractor Company LICENSE NO. GCC0000798 S D Clifton Construction Inc P. 0. Box 949 Evans GA 30809 Qualifying Agent: Stephen Dowis Clifton Qualifying Agent License NO: GCQA000346 EXPIRATION DATE - 06/30/2014 Active STATE OF GEORGIA BRIANI`P. KEMP, Secretary of State State Licensing Board for Residential/General Contractor General Contractor Company LICENSE NO. GCC0000798 S D Clifton Construction Inc P. O. Box 949 Evans GA 30809 Qualifying Agent: Stephen Dowis Clifton Qualifying Agent License NO: GCQA000346 EXPIRATION DATE - 06/30/2014. Active 2.) Notary Public REV. 7/22/2011 STEVE CLIFTON Systematic Alien Verification for Entitlements (SAVE) Program Affidavit Verifying Status for City of Augusta Benefit Application By executing this affidavit under oath, as an applicant for a Augusta, Georgia Business License or Occupation Tax Certificate, Alcohol License, Taxi Permit, Contract or other public benefit as reference in O.C.G.A. Section 50 -36 -1, I am stating the following with respect to my bid for a City of Augusta contract for 12 -169 DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 [Print/Type: Name of natural person applying on behalf of individual, business, corporation, partnership, or other private entity] S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Print/Type: Name of business, corporation, partnership, or other private entity] 1.) x I am a citizen of the United States. OR I am a legal permanent resident 18 years of age or older. OR 3.) I am an otherwise qualified alien (8 § USC 1641) or nonimmigrant under the Federal Immigration and Nationality Act (8 USC 1101 et seq.) 18 years of age or older and lawfully present in the United States. In making the above representation under oath, I understand that any person who knowingly and willfully makes a false, fictitious, or fraudulent statement or representation in an affidavit shall be guilty of a violation of Code Section 16 -1 0 th 0 tcial Code of Georgia. Signature of A •fint STEVE ' ITON Printed Name SUBSCRIBED. AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE C-01- hO [Bid /RFP /RFQ Project Number and Project Name] N/A My Commission Expires: 2G- ( * Alien Registration Number for Non - Citizens Z it DAY OF % . ;"4,t ���� oe 4 V • SON Z o ▪ • ▪ O � O ARY �, �•i :> e00' : o - aiOtRYi2 4t o s z °.•'L? iJote: ► he successful vendor will submit the above forms to the Procurement/19'. n 4ter than five (5) days after receiving the "Letter of Recommendation" (VendeV; l� > tiite note the date forms are to be received). 'H, Bid 12 -169 Dyess Park Improvements Page 12 of 14 3AIA O Document A310 TM - 2010 Bid Bond CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) S.D. Clifton Construction, 4324 Wheeler Road Martinez, GA 30907 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Augusta, GA Commission 530 Greene Street Room 605 Augusta, GA 30901 BOND AMOUNT: Ten percent of the total amount of the Bid PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) Bid Item 12 -169 Dyess Park improvements for Housing & Community Development Department The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place Inc .of business) The Hanover Insurance 440 Lincoln St. Worcester, MA 01653 day of July, 2012 Company S.D. Clif • (Contractor --"4 This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. uction Inc. (Title) The Hanov Insurance Company (Seal) (Seal) , ,fit „ `` , (Title) Thomas J. Bole, Attorney-in-Fact CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA Contract Document, on which this text appears in RED. An original assures that changes will not be obscured. Init. AIA Document A310T"' — 2010 (rev. 10 /2010). Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. / Purchasers are permitted to reproduce ten (10) copies of this document when completed. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects' legal counsel, copyright @aia.org. AcD43070810 THE HANOVER INSURANCE COMPANY MASSACHUSETTS BAY INSURANCE COMPANY CITIZENS INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA POWERS OF ATTORNEY CERTIFIED COPY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That THE HANOVER INSURANCE COMPANY and MASSACHUSETTS BAY INSURANCE COMPANY both being corporations organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, and CITIZENS INSURANCE COMPANY O AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Michigan, do hereby constitute and appoint Thomas J. Bole and/or Robert B. Berman of Birmingham, AL and each is a true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact to sign, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver for, and on its behalf, and as Its act and deed any place within the United States, or, if the following fine be filled in, only within the area therein designated any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings; contracts of indemnity or other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, as follows: Any such obligations in the United States, not to exceed Forty Million and No/100 ($40,000,000) in any single instance, "including, but no limited to consents of surety for the release of retained percentages and /or final estimates on construction contracts or similar authors requested by the Department of Transportation, State of Florida. and said companies hereby ratify and confirm all and whatsoever said Attomey(s) -in -fact may lawfully do in the premises by virtue of these presents: These appointments are made under and by authority of the following Resolution passed by the Board of Directors of said Companies which resolutions are still in effect "RESOLVED, That the President or any Vice President, in conjunction with any Assistant Vice President, be and they are hereby authorized and empowered to appoint Attorneys-in-fact of the Company, in its name and as its acts, to execute and acknowledge for and on its behalf as Surety any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, waivers of citation and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, with power to attach thereto the seal of the Company. Any such writings so executed by such Attorneys -in -fad shall be as binding upon the Company as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Company in their own proper persons." (Adopted October 7, 1981 - The Hanover insurance Company; Adopted April 14, 1982 — Massachusetts Bay Insurance Company; Adopted September 7, 2001 - Citizens Insurance Company of America) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, THE HANOVER INSURANCE COMPANY, MASSACHUSETTS BAY INSURANCE COMPANY and CITIZENS INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have caused these presents to be sealed with their respective corporate seals, duly attested by a Vice President and an Assistant Vice President, this 7 day of September 2010. THE HANOVER INSURANCE COMPANY MASSACHUS_'ETS BAY INSURANCE COMPANY C?sZf=iF Of AMERICA Mary .iearine P¢k rdon. V4 Pre itouett tf. Grenrreri, A,s istan, , n Prssicl•wi THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS ) COUNTY OF WORCESTER ) ss. On this 7"' day of September 2010, before me came the above named Vice President and Assistant Vice President of The Hanover Insurance Company, Massachusetts Bay Insurance Company and Citizens Insurance Company of America, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein, and acknowledged that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the corporate seals of The Hanover Insurance Company Massachusetts Bay Insurance Company and Citizens Insurance Company of America, respectively, and that the said corporate seals and their signatures as officers were duly affixed and subscribed to said instrument by the authority and direction of said Corporations. Notary PubnC My commission expires on November 3, 2011 I, the undersigned Assistant Vice President of The Hanover Insurance Company, Massachusetts Bay Insurance Company and Citizens Insurance Company of America, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Original Power of Attorney issued by said Companies, and do hereby further certify that the said Powers of Attorney are still in force and effect. This Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of The Hanover Insurance Company, Massachusetts Bay Insurance Company and Citizens Insurance Company of America. 'RESOLVED, That any and all Powers of Attorney and Certified Copies of such Powers of Attorney and certification in respect thereto, granted and executed by the President or any Vice President in conjunction with any Assistant Vice President of the Company, shaft be binding on the Company to the same extent as if all signatures therein were manually affixed, even though one or more of any such signatures thereon may be facsimile.' (Adopted October 7, 1981 - The Hanover Insurance Company; Adopted April 14, 1982 Massachusetts Bay Insurance Company; Adopted September 7, 2001 - , Citizens Insurance Company of America) GIVEN under my hand and the seals of said Companies, at Worcester, Massachusetts, this 12th day of July , 2012 THE HANOVER INSURANCE COWAN MASSACHUSETTS BAY INSURANCE COMPANY CITl Ss S 1NSUB4NCIt CO 'tl ANY OF ERICA Stev,47s Erruu ycsist5ni ✓ ^ Pres'ld&f 1 1 1 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL For bidding corporation, the following certification must be made by Secretary of the corporation named as Principal in bond, attached to the Bid Bond and submitted with the bid. MOLLY CLIFTON , certify that I am the Secretary of the corporation named as Principal in the within bond. That STEVE CLIFTON , who signed the bond on behalf of the Principal, was then the PRESIDENT of said corporation; that I know his /her signature and his /her signature thereto is genuine; and that said bond was duly signed, sealed and attested to for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body. Signature of Secretary of the Corporation Name of Secretary of the Corporation MOLLY CLIFTON Corporate Seal B -17 12A. PROPOSED PROJECT BUDGET United Way of the CSRA, Inc. Year 2012 ESG Total Project Cost (includin ESG) Maintenance (Community Voicemail & database System (Voicemail boxes) 50 boxes @ $1.60 per box x 12 months Community Voicemail Federation Membership Dues $960 $300 Office Supplies $2,000 Local Travel $50 Salaries $1,690 Services for Special Po .ulations Case Management Child Care Expenses (Salaries) Outpatient Health Services Mental Health Services Local Travel Services for Special Populations Educational Assistance Legal Services Transportation (Van Driver Salary) Substance Abuse Treatment (Medical/Psychological /Substance Abuse Treatment Insurance Emergency Medical Supplies Bedding Telephone Printing Transportation Rent /Lease Payments Legal Costs Furnishings Shelter Staff If Other, Specify: Maintenance (exterminating, heatin_ & air Labor Materials Tools Major Rehabilitation Conversion SUBTOTAL United Way of the CSRA, Inc. Year 2012 ESG TO: Mr. Steve Clifton S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Martinez, GA 30907 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Dated this 31 day of July 2012. ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE: Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowled • ed on this I d- /•f 41‘) , 2012 By: L _tal;114prAT '. e nt NOTICE OF AWARD Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 902 James Brown Blvd. Augusta, GA 30901 The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in response to its Advertisement for Bids dated July 12, 2012, and Instructions to Bidders. You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for items in the amount of: Six Hundred Fifty Nine Thousand, Three Hundred Forty Nine Dollars and Zero Cents, ($659,349.00) You are required by the Instructions for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Performance Bond and Payment Bond within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said bonds within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER'S acceptance of your BID as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Bond. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of the NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER. C - 1 Bv: ORIGINAL AUGUSTA, GEORGIA / AK Chester A. Wheeler, III AHCDD Director Dyess Park Public Facility Project CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT AGREEMENT BETWEEN AUGUSTA, GEORGIA AND S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. 2012 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT PROGRAM THIS AGREEMENT made this 31 day of July 2012, by and between awarded Contractor, S.D. Clifton Construction, Inc., (a legal entity), organized under the State of Georgia, hereinafter called the "Contractor," and AUGUSTA, GEORGIA, (a political subdivision of the State of Georgia), through its AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT, herein called the "Owner" and Augusta Recreation & Parks Department hereinafter called the "Grant Subrecipient. WITNESSETH, that the Contractor, Owner and Grant Subrecipient for the consideration stated herein, mutually agree as follows: ARTICLE I STATEMENT /SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services and perform and complete all work required for the construction of Project No. 09030 in strict accordance with "the plans, specifications and drawings for this project developed by 2KM Architects, as architects. Numbered 09- 08.05.1, dated 05/15/2012. Said documents being incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof. ARTICLE II CONTRACT PRICE. The Augusta, Georgia Housing & Community Development Department, Owner, shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the Contract, in current funds, subject to additions and deductions as provided in the specifications for completed work meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents, the sum of: Six Hundred Fifty Nine Thousand, Three Hundred Forty Nine Dollars and Zero Cents ($659,349) Said contract price being paid as draws against the contract price and deducting from each draw 10 % as retainage. The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the OWNER and to fully complete the project within 180 consecutive calendar days thereafter. The CONTRACTOR further agrees to pay, as liquidated damages, the sum of $100 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in Paragraph "9" of the General Conditions. 1 Contractor agrees that time is of the essence in the completion of the work in the time required by this contract and hereby waives any formal notice of default for failure to complete the work of any of its component parts on time. (a) This Contract (b) General Conditions (c) Special /Supplemental Conditions (d) Technical Specifications; and (e) Drawings. SPECIAL STIPULATIONS. Dyess Park Public Facility Project CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ARTICLE III ARTICLE IV Contract Documents. The contract documents consist of the following: ARTICLE V The following provisions shall control if in conflict with any of the foregoing terms of this contract. In the event that any provision or any other component part of this Contract conflicts with any provision of any other component part, the provision of the component part first enumerated in the ARTICLE IV shall govern, except as otherwise specially stated. The various provisions in the Addendum shall be construed in the order of the preference of the component part of the Contract which each modifies. (INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) 2 ATTEST: kr; IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Instrument to be executed by and through their authorized representative in four (4) original counterparts as of the day and year first above written. ATTEST: SEAL tXtvg,14:47.274;''' Mol t Clifton As its Corporate Secretary Approved as to form by: CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT qllYtafa-Q CCU (Witness) 3 Dyess Park Public FIcility Project BY: BY: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA Owner A /4/44 David S. Copenhaver b As its Mayor S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. Contractor / Stev ifton As esident Augusta Recreation & Parks Department Grant Sub-recipient Frederick L. Russell C A dministrator Chester A. Wheeler, III Director AHCDD Andrew G. Mac nzie General Counsel Rpm • M i i 11111 MN i i i i i i U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT PROGRAM CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS To: AUGUSTA - RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION Date:_' _ do Ms. Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1. The undersigned, having executed a contract with Augusta- Richmond County Commission for the construction of the above - identified project, acknowledges that: (a) The Labor Standards provisions are included in the aforesaid contract; (b) Correction of any infractions of the aforesaid conditions, including infractions by any of his subcontractors and any lower tier subcontractors, is his responsibility; 2. He certifies that: (a) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (b) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to any of the aforementioned regulatory or statutory provisions. 3. He agrees to obtain and forward to the aforementioned recipient within ten (10) days after the execution of any subcontract, including those executed by his subcontractors and any lower tier subcontractors, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage requirements executed by the subcontractors. 4. He certifies that: (a) The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: ' 10. CSI +Un CO 5 fruC , . 4 whc - ler - Road 14ar4tn GA 30ciOr C -7 (b) The undersigned is: (check one) (1) A Single Proprietorship 2) A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: Name Smv E CLi fto N Title PO Address p® ac, x ( Pig, &v 4uS' 6A; i 0 LA/ el.i 'ETON StG, i I of I l (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Nature of Interest None (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Trade Classification fan 0 Date: 11^J3 f Sa ZO ( 2 S . D. e (,1 PTO /4 00W oe11014 INC ) WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 to be false .... By (Contractor) gnature) U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, passes, utters or shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two C -8 publishes any statement, knowing the same years, or both." Date 1 raj 2012 Official Address L /3 2 � 1 k) h te) ear M'AR T, J Ea, Cpc 30 9d (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY PRIME CONTRACTOR The BIDDER certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under BIDDER's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The BIDDER certifies further that the BIDDER will not maintain or provide for BIDDER's employee any segregated facilities at any of BIDDER's establishments, and that the BIDDER will not permit BIDDER's employees to perform their services at any location under BIDDER's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The BIDDER agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. The BIDDER agrees that, except where the BIDDER has obtained identical certification from proposed Subcontractors for a specific time period, BIDDER will obtain identical certifications from proposed sub - contractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause, and that Bidder will retain such certification in BIDDER's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. By D -58 eu PrD C0031 C"'r10i-1 ieuC (Name of BIDDER) C As its Po s, tractor's Name) (Title) U ' AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT ' CONTRACTOR: S. D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION, INC. PROJECT: DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I ' PROJECT #: CDBG #09030 MANER FENCING P.O. BOX 204598 (706) 863 -6191 LCC 20060034693 AUGUSTA, GA 30917 S.D. CLIFTON CONSTRUCTION CARPENTER P.O. BOX 949 (706) 731 -0978 GCCO 000798 EVANS, GA 30809 C & C CONCRETE t CONCRETE 112 CAIN STREET (706) 294 -2998 12 -706 WAYNESBORO, GA 30830 FERRELL ELECTRIC ELECTRICAL 413 VAUGHN RD. (706) 863 -5129 EN- 213209 MARTINEZ, GA 30907 TOMMY DAWKINS MASONRY ' MASONARY P.O. BOX 476 (706) 359 -4558 12 -198 Lk 1_ •k 4 1: YOUNG'S ROOFING ROOFING 311 PADRICK STREET (706) 863 -5853 AUGUSTA, GA 30907 05368 RA LITTLETON, LLC. PAINTING 1023 CANNON MILL DRIVE (803) 202 -0888 NORTH AUGUSTA, SC 29860 LCC2012000107 CMS PLUMBING PLUMBING 3205 WINDING WOOD PLACE (706) 855 -1272 M -1834 MARTINEZ, GA 30907 ' FERRELL ELECTRIC ELECTRICAN 413 VAUGHN ROAD (706) 863 -5129 MARTINEZ, GA 30907 EN- 213209 SOUTHERN MECHANICAL ' OTHER HVAC P.O. BOX 1445 (706) 823 -0004 AUGUSTA, GA 30903 CN- 007334 THE GROVES NURSERY ' OTHER LANDSCAPE 1738 EDGEFIELD ROAD (803) 278 -3545 014680 NORTH AUGUSTA, SC 29860 MORRIS INSULATION & ENVIRONMENTAL OTHER ABATEMENT 1463 BROAD ST. (706) 364 -2946 LCC20060034427 AUGUSTA, GA 30901 CHAPLIN AND SONS OTHER DEMO 1218 NEW SAVANNAH RD. (706) 945 -0838 LCC20060034276 AUGUSTA, GA 30901 C & C CONCRETE Sitework 112 CAIN STREET (706) 294 -2998 12 -706 ' WAYNESBORO, GA 30830 List all companies that will perform work on this project. List your company for those trades you will perform with your own employees. Submit to the Housing and Community Development (HCDD) Department with your executed contract. No Subcontractor may start work on this project until approved by HCDD. and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: KZ to K 09r Q( Insurance Company: 5o Irnen in5I /nS- Scr'Vlces or Company: Ypurn b R( Cir Policy Number: pc 18215 -01 /AVtv CGA20f73(o 2. Amount of Insurance: 5 coo, 000 1 000 000 Address: t t sd Ha -t-re NAIL-151"a GA\ Federal Tax ID #: S9 — • 0 115 License Number 0566 3OctC_D7 Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: mf n9 Total Terms Payment Schedule: iz� price of project: $ `-�i 5 D° of payment: U C each month ik fl 62, i if z (o l z_ ci------- ontract s nature Date Sub ontractor's signature Date The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: 8.4.0_ 2 do Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with 03ns 11 do (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about C•9 �aJJi C -Ro (Contractor or Subcontractor) tr for t'� Cad t r a (Nature of Work) The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. 8 - 13 (Date) Name (2 A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia Title Address iC1rs '/ 4�.4- pc ( 0 3 1, e c_k_ S',4 7 Pc\ w Z n 1/91 7r<s; G t�.a- 3l' P.d,oc s- (1) A Single Proprietorship (2 A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) (b) He certifies that: Date: 012_ The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name None Address Nature of Interest (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name NUIC Address Trade Classification By: WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." C I `j(9Clft c© 4/N i (Subcontractor) (Signature) CERTIFICATION OF NON- SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date , 2012 icr ricl � �,,� G ,. / v1 ( Naame of SUBCONTRACTOR) Official Address By 311 Po CJrr "(�� 5 r 3O (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration (Subcontractor's Name) As its 1'rJ.(cJ (&,�cy...r- D -59 (Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT i �M' t��}x'� ' �a V L - +� 44 f This Agreement is between (Contractor): R' 1 . ' T C. e. , . S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: 1500 C a p 1 r Insurance Company: Ac--j 6 IfSL flC s__) Company: Cia p i t ,r\ a n ci 5cjY'n 9 Policy Number: R PKG E 4 OM 03 01Ga6t3gp{ CU Address: I Zia K leer Savannah t cI , Amount of Insurance: 3, ooc) i 5 5(D, 00c, Aug US fa, G A,. 30q0 1 FederalTaxlD #: 2..00 O5 License Number: LCC, a c cpc, cx�342 -TG Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 f ?� a �y ® P , "J PL' a ,.k •rj` q uc. q a' . � , fmO 1 C —i Total Terms a"� ['" d +S 1 a .�,. ;� -�K� g +dry :, .M, q ;:.�,`. " : i&" x „� - i�L .1 ',? a§.2 R �A'�fe., £+S^ �$6 �+3 S price of project: $ rT 1 500 o° of payment: I C-r ea-CP MO (-342-- A _474 4 4 /iz)± Contractor's si nature Date a • ' r• or s s ig.iatu - o The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of la ,, - _ ifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 1 1 1 C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date:8_6_ 1 c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney- Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I t 1 i 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with D a C( `non n5-4- ruc-ilo ,� (Contractor or Subcontractor) for Cm (Nature of Work) The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about 8` (Date) C 1 1 (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (1) A Single Proprietorship (2) A corporatio rganized in the State of Georgia 1 (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) ' (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: NarAe Aldv-e —2 �w Title /...)-) / A )r)/P e.k --Ch., r / . 0 - 4.4 - 2 -- ?(Lt e 1—i 2 c4 (-9 L,, 4 — I (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): I Name I Address Nature of Interest Nont ' e The names, addresses O and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): I Name I r Address Trade Classification None Date: g .92/ _ IAN AIM• _ / By: Nk „ (Signature WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, utters or passes, publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both.” C-10 I 1 The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any I segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The I SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and I that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The I SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated I facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date 8-5 , 2012 Official Address 1216 N a vnr h i t AuQu5 , G a 01 (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR As its 491 LIZ (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) ractor's Name) D -59 v as_ (Title) and Project: Project ,a AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: Insurance Company: tjIarC'herd t t C o t hal>1 Company: --fan '" Fence Policy Number: Co P2. 315 7 Y 6 / wce103202 .3 Address: 3S0 \ 1'► r ncz 15 kid • Amount of Insurance: % OC ,Oc o 5t0, 00cp M0r- hr,eZz 1J961 Federal Tax ID #: 5p, - 05'559,3 2. License Number: LCC. 2-COCe cO3.4Gc13 Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 ® � 9 1 f VenCie Total Terms +tA.° ' � " ' . ' '. 4., }`. price of project: $ I0 2 818. O C of payment: 1Q + h 3 e I:. Contractor's 'gnature Date • contractors siva ure Date The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. C-6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: B -( - 1 Z c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with is D (b) Con5ftuc can (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about C-9 (Contractor or Subcontractor) for Fence WDr K (Nature of Work) The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. 8-13 - (Date) 1 (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (1) A Single Proprietorship (3) A Partnership (2) VA corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (4) Other Organization (Describe) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: Name ji+eYl lco ServY 13i g ham Titl Vice Pr-e5 r °de- * E2.ab HcC rarg vice Pres, dent Address r`1Corf u1ea C3[vd .\uglueta, Gfl 509 8o 1 H.3r4ir)eZ Blvd Aug u5 �� J GA anur C I I4 r# i 'Ivd Augusta, GA L (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name W+►ti'arr Vvrerl 8er (- Marbbi n Address Vi G.e P resjdgn t0 Ge -res f d en±- Nature of Interest (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name 1\1 /A Date: 8 /3/12- Address Trade Classification By: attire). WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." C Z 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date a3/0,3/2.9 , 2012 Official Address g Pk; it cc 9 3DJa? (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR As its cc (title) D -59 and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT i & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: Har# i-� i (1 it Insurance Company: AC N 5 I.r1St rave Policy Number: Z 13A895:1,388Q 17 RWC32 %L L Amount of Insurance: 1,000,000 / 5oO,OOD - Company: 50( A- h ( -fl Med Ia n teal Address: V, Q), @X 1446 AUCH US -E-a G A 30 0 6 Federal Tax ID #: f5p - 2- fl (0 No 3 License Number: GN O7,334' j Dysss Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: kVAcr Total Terms Payment Schedule: price of project: $ ,3/c) ` ' dam of payment: I Dt C_ menth i Contractor's ignature Dat Subcontractor's si nature ate The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. t C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: _6_ do Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 1 CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with 61) The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. e -t3 -1? (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION C-9 (Contractor or Subcontractor) for kYAC C -r (Nature of Work) (Date) core-rod-ion 1 ..■ Name Title Address 73 a 2-7 t ....\ 1 __ I 0 YZ- LL- -, ,-_-,. � � e. c k,„p , , / 7) (1) A Single Proprietorship (2) A corporate Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) I 1 1 t t 1 1 (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name ne Address Nature of Interest (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Trade Classification Date: 8-6- 12, By: WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." C (Signature The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date r - h 2012 S /7 & * " R./4 y e Official Address By PC. )( 1 Auquaia, 30c405 (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON- SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR As its D -59 e of SUBCONTRACT, /6 ra (Subcontractor's N me) (Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT d � This Agreement is between (Contractor): ,. er & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT 'y� : � ,` S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: R►(': hard U 41e Insurance Company: U Chu'Ch 4 LICWtr5 I nS . /ACiIS Company: RA Lz{{Irk b(\ LLC Policy Number: MpG7 / RAWC35t S5 Address: 10 23 Ca.nfor) Hill T)n ve Amount of Insurance: i, cXO, Ca00 / I, 004 oco N()r4-h A UgU8 ic Sc.- Federal Tax ID #: 38-365-1770 a q 860 0 License Number: LGC- 2-012 000.10 7 Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 j ' a�' ., ®: 41 ' -- Pinti n Total Terms � :.� � `, ` ass.a'4vb ..�, ,._�.Y�S`f:'�5:,°...'.�"•,.r_. *r?_^ e. 4 U,a � ` .1 � ' "; price of project: $ 25- ) 0c of payment: ( (Th each me ) e fWI'L- -)( S S' Zri/ L Contractor' signature Date Subcontractor's si ature D to The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 1 CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: C-9 Ck-r-On ( Contractor or Subcontractor) for C 1 ati r) O (Nature of Work) (Date) CCn d o (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and PrevailingWage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about 8-15- - (b) He certifies that: ' The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) ' ' (1) A Single Proprietorship (2) A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) I _s Coriveciw 04 n% t e i 1,. Ile ,S 4 'U Sw tt-+ C - IA A i ' (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: ' Name A 14 4 L ,+ 4 Title C .t 0 Address P �p..)1.c /On C...., ,, /kJ/ D[' 1.4 ie. A J L . f f.', J- Are A 0....t ' ` I (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): I Name I Address Nature of Interest None ' e The names, addresses ddresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): I Name Address Trade Classification Date: 8/q 2u /1 tZAL,.14i iL L LC I (Subcontractor) By: f■-e (Signature) WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in "Whoever makes, utters or part: passes, publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." C-10 Official Address 1 3 Ca " k Orlin 1\6 Al. � S 2,'M (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR 1 The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The ' SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are ' segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. I Date ,P / 6 , 2012 A L . 1 - 1 4 - ) I . L C (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) By 1 GN' As its D -59 (Subcontractor's Name) Fre (Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: L iiry - ITTMC Ferrell Insurance Company: ACH5 Compan : ( t l El' Policy Number: A C,p -0 59'04 76 41 W�t`ki �2`tRlo Zc,i1.4 Amount of Insurance: ',QLD, C)OD / 5co)0C0 Federal Tax ID #: 56 -2A r64 6 3 License Number: E lil— 2l ?2 ( Address: ` I 'fa ugh 0 di. t-ta r4 -tng4, 6A ;30c1 07 Dyass Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: E1Cc+ 1 i cr K. Total Terms Payment Schedule: price of project: $ 35 5C0 C ° 00 morrEh of payment: t1 `"' ) of Contractor's s nature Date Sebcontractor's s nature Date The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 t C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: 6 ~G' `Z c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with 6D. Cl t r-E-Ol Wr 5ttu ( -(C)n (Contractor or Subcontractor) for E1?C4i Ca The construction of the above- identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in .which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States purs»rnt to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about -- ( 3 I D, C-9 (Nature of Work) (Date) (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) 7O7 (1) A Single Proprietorship 2 A corporation Organized in the State of G orgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: Name Title Address Shaes 14_ '' "� ` 4 3 V0 i gd . iii 4 �1iA� as (°h� Q t_ 5eciry _ (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Nature of Interest fro (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Trade Classification YLi Aie Date: WARNING: $'lo ° 17e 6 iett Ei-ec C �i/( . U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 to be false .... (Subcontractor) By: _ ignature U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, passes, utters or shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two C-10 publishes any statement, knowing the same years, or both." CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR'S control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date --4o l2---- , 2012 Official Address By 4 413 VATR ,. V L L e z 9 7 (City, Sta Zip) *Must be included without alteration As its Ferre l I E(ecJ C> (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) D -59 7 / (Subcontractor's Name) re-StpeAk (Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT `�' } � mr . �'G, 1 � � This Agreement is between (Contractor): $ h � imp esy � �`i � aY 7 Q of aM 1 S S.' S 1 S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: 6itele D (% brrt 5 Insurance Company: tti i45 Ellin 'O f rYte#z3 t Company : Mtrrs il.tta4 1Dr) d FF`ll■v6c si , Policy Number: ECR o 2.003 35-15 / WCA2LX03 Amount of Insurance: r , 003, occ -- 4, non, f Address: 1463, 3r /\Ucj t,k5f GA FederalTaxlD #: r ` 4q(op l 50:10 4 License Number: LCCZOO (p 0a Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 ehY,� \ x^, ',� F ;� F * N e&, ei : e Q z a ® ^ @+ ® - w ° 'I g Total Terms i . T`. S Y� ^} ?++rr (..%+� :.. n ,,,,,,�}�}''((,,� �`,� +�g•,w4"ppnJ: 5'y+}°M h' �"' yy 4Y ,¢'�. .�� .. %n' �3,° @ 1 �� ''s:4P+i�'}.^e`X a`3xi "x.35.p1,',.�r.+' ��YSe. iE'3 W! . cv�k. s'�, '��' "_5. ..� 8A"_._ . price of project: $ 1 ` � of payment ID each r'non+ Ate 3 I ( f� la Contractor's si nature Date 'Font 7 = c + is - ighnature a at The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 1 a C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: gr&- c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney- Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 t 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with 6 , r1j a l.. lrt` CC) cbns fruci-li (Contractor or Subcontractor) for bCr`1en-1 -- The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: C (Nature of Work) (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of' the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about 8 ` l ` 1 (Date) 1 Name ✓(2) A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership Title Address ...... r V A A i i ► A + � /� �� s , ..► 4. .�.�. - ,. -a_.... (1) A Single Proprietorship ✓(2) A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) 1 Name None Address Nature of Interest Date: (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: Th names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and'cbrpaate, h ng substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Trade Classification q 0 ));; ) WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." C•10 The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date ( (� , 2012 Official Address *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR 1L-crrt5 uta+o{) Eni As its \ 14 LW I ad■- ` ame) D -59 (Na le of SUBCONTRACTOR) Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: - Fray/ 5 Harcjrove Insurance Company: Company: 111g Grovz Nur5er _ Policy Number: Address: t E.dcje -( id d of Insurance: t Or-i -h Aug us . +a, 5G _Amount Federal Tax ID #: 570 B o i 12 2o38(oO License Number.. 01 q( Be Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: __a ndaa pi w Total Terms Payment Schedule: price of project: $ n1 81 3 of payment: \)' Cc:ad Month A fi41 t illd ., 6 b Gz ...,-.. ,2,.. ., Contractor's signature Date Subcontra to signature D The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: 8 - I2 , c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with D, a t £{in Consiitic (Contractor or Subcontractor) for The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: Lanc15 n (Nature of wort' (Nature of Work) (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in .which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about 8 1 3 C•9 (Date) Or) ....■ M EN EM MO M. (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (1) A Single Proprietorship (2) A corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) 09) )2P , , 4 (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: Name Title Address V 1 * .--go Lail4 0,0 �r) (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Nature of Interest Norte (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Trade Classification Inane Date: ii* % /‘ N a g- (Subco 1 . ctor) By: idt &t As a. _ _, ( ignature) WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." C-10 The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date Official Address j'73V al/0 A,LA, (9--q (City, State, Zip) CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES , 2012 *Must be included without alteration BY SUBCONTRACTOR (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) As its (Title) ame) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): Insurance Company: Trararl CC ,St?j'V) Ce,S d F' A vS +'. S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: ep rci Company: 0M5 p,urn i Policy Number: AC_p GLAc.4e33 / wcv667 MO 01 Address: 3 Q35 vdinct i r1CD P a3Z Amount of Insurance: I, O D, OCO / 5O0, C 00 I ~-� neZ� GA - , f { Federal Tax ID #: 5 3 -- 22621 8 License Number: M - 18 3 4 Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: DI ur bin Total Terms Payment Schedule: price of project: $ 06, 835, v1/4 D O fc c,► I mnnth of payment: I oh C ntractor's si ature Date 4 Subcontractor's signature Date The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally - funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the-date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. i C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I i i SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with (b) 1). ConS+nAciion C-9 for The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (Contractor or Subcontractor) piumbrr (Nature of (Nature of Work) (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about 8-15— 12_ (Date) Name Title Address _ 'I. ge.i=i0Q 6:4(VaVN� .3ao l�'%i4atgt. x xzt �1 ikt.3, CU\ 31.1 (1) A Single Proprietorship (2)VA corporation Organized in the State of Georgia (4) Other Organization (Describe) (3) A Partnership 1 (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Nature of Interest (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name N one Address Trade Classification Date: a( By: C-10 WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." 1 Date VA,v 3U b ( e , 2012 t 1 ( State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. C H 5 pfUrribirK3 (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) Official Address B Y (Subcontractor's Name) As its D -59 (Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: c 2�C n Insurance Company: m , + Sfi ry A Policy Number: 6 R OAT- F' 1 Y I Company Ut. C nCrc -+-(e Address: 11'2_ Cai'r'n 0 fire e-F- Amount of Insurance: I, 000,C CO 600,00o waynes bow >. GA cie Federal Tax ID #: 5g - 23E -j‘210 License Number: 12 —T©co 706 Dyass Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: n 1- - 0 vvf)r k.<, g' Cbncrel-e Total Terms Payment Schedule: price of project: $ 26j 6 T 0 C of payment: 10 -W\ C ecach me --h Contractor' 'gnature Date Su • contractor's signature Date The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the -date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 i C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: 8, -Z _1 Z c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 1 1 1 CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with on SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and PrevailingWage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about C (Contractor or Subcontractor) for ��`i ►or�v Q_ `w (Nature of Work) (Date) Name Title Address C �te3 E, C �'1 Se, preSrdCr�1t- f 5�' Nor - h [a Ke �r 14y9 y; i to C-\ op�3i Charles E , Green 7V. ` ice R ideal- 15T or-h la Ke [ K c5v► t te, Gi (1) A Single Proprietorship (2) A cor,�oration Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned ar, The undersigned is: (check one) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name Ncnz Address Nature of Interest (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name None Address Trade Classification Date: By: C-10 C 6 C Cpr"1Cre -1-,C (Subcontractor (Signature WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., provides in part: "Whoever, makes, passes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false .... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date - — f 2-- , 2012 Official Address By 1 5T North Lake- Dr K\(sV Ile GA- 08 (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR As its D -59 C c Can cry z (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) (Subcontractor's Name) Pre5id - E (Title) and Project: Project AUGUSTA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT 49 & COMMUNITY DEPARTMENT SUBCONTRACTOR AGREEMENT This Agreement is between (Contractor): S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Augusta, GA 30907 (Subcontractor): Name: To rn rn \I Da 1.< r s ins masonry y Insurance Company: fr'nnKhn TI A Cj � C.1'IC Policy Number: CLCO 3to1ZOO 025CYXXXXZy 5 I I Amount of Insurance: 1,000, 000 / 50 CompanyT myDq \NIA Address: P. C .Box 1--11'0 tJnCQlh+cn , GA 30817 ( 000 Federal Tax ID #: 5/9 -acc3 T 1 License Number: i a — IC I s Dyess Park Improvements Phase I (Projection Description Attached) #: CDBG #09030 Description of work to be performed: Ha. 0 ru Total Terms Payment Schedule: price of project: $ of payment: MTh O each morn-Eh Contractor's si nature Date Subco ,r. ctor's signature at The Subcontractor identified above, under penalty of law, certifies that he is properly licensed to perform the services specified in the State of Georgia. The Subcontractor further certifies that he has not been barred from participating in federally- funded construction projects, either under this company name of any previous company name. The Subcontractor warrants all materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of completion or the full period of the manufacturer's warranty, whichever is longer. 1 1 C -6 To: AUGUSTA, GEORGIA COMMISSION Date: 8 ._ 3 _. i 2 _ c/o Karan E. Carter Augusta Housing & Community Development Dept. 925 Laney - Walker Blvd., Second Floor Augusta, Georgia 30901 Project Number: CDBG #09030 Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I i 1 1 1 1 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned, having executed a contract with 'r ,D Ct t ri COnarUdibn (Contractor or Subcontractor) for M aSm (Nature o Work) The construction of the above - identified project certifies that: (a) The Labor Standards Provisions of the Contract for Construction are included in the aforesaid contract. (b) Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to Section 5.6 (b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor, Part 5 (29CFR, Part 5) or pursuant to Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a- 2(a)). (c) No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designated as an ineligible contractor pursuant to the aforesaid regulatory or statutory provisions. He agrees to obtain and forward to the contractor, for transmittal to the recipient, within ten (10) days after the execution of any lower subcontract, a Subcontractor's Certification Concerning Labor Standards and PrevailinOiage Requirements, executed by the lower tier subcontractor, in duplicate. (a) The workmen will report for duty on or about U Z (Date) C-9 I I I I (b) He certifies that: The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are: The undersigned is: (check one) (1) A Single Proprietorship (2) A co oration Organized in the State of Georgia (3) A Partnership (4) Other Organization (Describe) (c) The name, title and address of the owner, partners or officers of the undersigned are: Mi T,ele A res_ 4ddress - 0_ 60to4 L: 0,4471 N ame ohnr \, s ;01 (d) The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a substantial interest in the undersigned and the nature of the interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Nature of Interest None (e) The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction contractors in which the undersigned has a substantial interest are (If none, so state): Name Address Trade Classification kiOre Date: I Z ia, I DMt" t)i) \.0) \c))3 )1iON— Cji. 0 i4c_ WARNING: U. S. Criminal Code, Section By: 1010, Title 18 U.S.C., to be false .... shall (Subcontractor) ) (Signature) provides in part: "Whoever makes, passes, utters or be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two C 10 publishes any statement, knowing the same years, or both." The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date - 2- 2012 ���� ( e of SUBCONTRACTOR) Official Address P, Box. 4 , i nch[r on, GA DE (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR By ‘ J-tilyvit (S con ractor's Name) As its PP D -59 (Title) TO: S. D. Clifton Construction, Inc. 4324 Wheeler Road Martinez, GA 30907 PROJECT #: CDBG 09030 PROJECT NAME: Dyess Park Improvements Phase I 902 James Brown Boulevard, Augusta, GA 30901 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: (Construction details attached) You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agreement dated July 31, 2012, on or before August 27, 2012, and you are to complete the work within 180 consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all work is therefore February 27, 2013. AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT D PARTMENT ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE: Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged on this the 16 day of August, 2012 BY: ontract Title itt or Na NOTICE TO PROCEED C -14 BY: Chester A. Wheeler, III, Director SECTION D FEDERAL & GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • General Conditions • Supplemental General Conditions • Federal Labor Standard Provisions • Wage Decision Transcript • Contractor Reporting Requirements • City's Local Small Business Program Statement • Davis Bacon Poster — W -1321 • Certification of Non - Segregated Facilities - Contractor • Certification of Non - Segregated Facilities - Subcontractor 1. Definitions. E. "Owner" means Augusta, Georgia. GENERAL CONDITIONS D -1 CONDUCT OF WORK A. "Architect" means the person or other entity engaged by the Owner or Grant Recipient to perform architectural, engineering, design, and other services related to the work as provided for in the contract. When the Owner uses an engineer to act in this capacity, the terms "architect" and "engineer" shall be synonymous. The Architect shall serve as a technical representative of the Owner and the Grant Recipient. The Architect's authority is as set forth elsewhere in this contract. B. "Contract" means the contract entered into between Owner, Grant Recipient and the Contractor. It includes the forms of Bid, the Bid Bond, the Performance and Payment Bond or Bonds or other assurance of completion, the Certifications, Representations, and Other Statements of Bidders, these General Conditions of the Construction Contract, the applicable wage rate determinations from either the U.S. Department of Labor or HUD, and any Supplemental and Special conditions included in the contract, the Notice to Proceed, the drawings and specifications, and the work write up. It includes all formal changes to any of those documents by addendum, change order, or other modification The Contract, including all referenced documents, constitutes the entire agreement between the parties. No agent, representative, employee or officer of either Owner, the Grant Recipient, or the Contractor has authority to make any statement, agreement or representation, oral or written, in connection with the Contract, which in any way can be deemed to modify, add to or detract from, or otherwise change or alter its terms and conditions. No negotiations between the parties, nor any custom or usage, shall be permitted to modify or contradict any of the terms and conditions of the Contract. No modifications, alterations, changes, or waiver to the Contract or any of its terms shall be valid or binding unless accomplished by a written amendment signed by all parties. All such amendments will be made using the appropriate Owner form. C. "Contractor" means the person or other entity entering into the contract with the Owner and the Grant Recipient to perform all of the work required under the contract. D. "Drawings" means the drawings enumerated in the schedule of drawings contained in the Specifications and as described in the contract clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for Construction" herein. F. "AHCDD" means the Augusta Housing and Community Development Department, the Owner's representative for this contract which may be referred to in these General Conditions as Owner. The Owner provides financial assistance to an eligible Grant Recipient, which includes assistance in financing the work to be performed under this contract. As defined elsewhere in these General Conditions or the contract documents, the determination of Owner's AHCDD is required to authorize changes in the work or for release of funds for payment to the Contractor. Notwithstanding AHCDD's role, nothing in this contract shall be construed to create any contractual relationship between the Contractor, Owner and AHCDD. G. "Grant Recipient" is the person or organization identified as such in the Construction Contract. The term Grant Recipient means the recipient of grant funds or his authorized representative. H. "Project" means the entire project, whether construction or rehabilitation, the work for which is provided for in whole or in part under this contract. I. "Specifications" means the written description of the technical requirements for construction and includes the criteria and tests for determining whether the requirements are met. GENERAL CONDITIONS J. "Testing Laboratory" An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at the project site or elsewhere; and to report and, if required, interpret results of those inspections or tests. 2. Contractor's Responsibility for Work. A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation necessary for performance of the work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary water, heat, light, and power not made available to the Contractor by the Grant Recipient pursuant to the clause entitled "Availability & Use of Utility Services." B. The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with its own organization, work equivalent to at least 12 percent of the total amount of work to be performed under the order. This percentage may be reduced by a supplemental agreement to this order if, during performance of the work, the Contractor requests a reduction and OWNER determines that the reduction would be to the advantage of OWNER and the Grant Recipient. C. At all times during performance of this contract and until the work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall directly superintend the work or assign and have on the work site a competent superintendent who is satisfactory to OWNER and has authority to act for the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of his fault or negligence, and shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the work, the workers, the public, and the property of others. The Contractor shall hold and save the OWNER and Grant Recipient, its officers, and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's performance. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all materials delivered and work performed until completion and acceptance of the entire work, except for any completed unit of work which may have been accepted under the contract. E. The Contractor shall lay out the work from base lines and benchmarks indicated on the drawings and is responsible for all lines, levels, and measurements of all work executed under the contract. The Contractor shall verify the figures before laying out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from its failure to do so. F. The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on the Grant Recipient's premises to areas authorized or approved by OWNER. G. The Contractor shall at all times keep the work area, including storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. After completing the work and before final inspection, the Contractor shall: 1) remove from the premises all scaffolding, equipment, tools, and materials (including rejected materials) that are not the property of the Grant Recipient and all rubbish caused by its work; 2) leave the work area in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to OWNER; 3) perform all specified tests; and, 4) deliver the installation in complete and operating condition. H. The Contractor's responsibility will terminate when all work has been completed, the final inspection made, and the work accepted by the OWNER and the Grant Recipient. The Contractor will then be released from further obligation except as required by the warranties specified elsewhere in the contract. D -2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3. Architect's Duties, Responsibilities, and Authority. A. The Architect for this contract, if any, shall be designated in writing by the OWNER. B. The Architect shall serve as the OWNER's technical representative with respect to architectural, engineering, and design matters related to the work performed under the contract. The Architect, when requested by OWNER, may provide direction on contract performance. Such direction shall be within the scope of the contract and may not be of a nature which: 1) Institutes additional work outside the scope of the contract; 2) Constitutes a change as defined in the "Changes" clause of this contract; 3) Causes an increase or decrease in the cost of the contract; 4) Alters the Construction Progress Schedule; or 5) Changes any of the other express terms or conditions of the contract. C. The Architect's duties and responsibilities may include but shall not be limited to: 1) Making periodic visits to the work site, and on the basis of on -site inspections, issuing written reports to OWNER's AHCDD, which shall include all observed deficiencies. The Architect shall file a copy of the report with the Contractor's designated representative at the site; 2) Making modifications in drawings and technical specifications and assisting OWNER in the preparation of change orders and other contract modifications for issuance by OWNER. 3) Reviewing and making recommendations with respect to: a) the Contractor's construction progress schedules; b) the Contractor's shop and detailed drawings; c) the machinery, mechanical and other equipment and materials or other articles proposed for use by the Contractor. d) Assisting in inspections, signing Certificates of Completion, and making recommendations regarding acceptance of work completed under the contract. GENERAL CONDITIONS CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 1. Pre - construction Conference and Notice to Proceed. A. After the Notice of Award has been issued, but prior to the contract execution, the Contractor shall attend a pre - construction conference with representatives of the Grant Recipient, OWNER, its Architect, and other interested parties convened by OWNER. The conference will serve to acquaint the participants with the general plan of the construction operation and all other requirements of the contract. OWNER will provide all parties with the date, time, and place of the conference. B. The Contractor shall begin work upon receipt of a written Notice to Proceed from OWNER. The Contractor shall not begin work prior to receiving such notice. 2. Construction Progress Schedule. A. The Contractor shall, within three (3) business days after the pre- construction conference or another period of time determined by OWNER, prepare and submit to Architect and OWNER three (3) copies of a practicable schedule showing the order in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and the dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing the several salient features of the work (including acquiring labor, materials, and equipment). The schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of work scheduled for completion by any given date during the period. If the Contractor fails to submit a schedule within the time prescribed, OWNER may withhold approval of progress payments or take other remedies under the contract until the Contractor submits the required schedule. B. The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the chart as required by Architect and OWNER and immediately deliver three (3) copies of the annotated schedule to Architect and OWNER. If OWNER determines, upon the basis of inspection conducted pursuant to the clause entitled "Inspection and Acceptance of Construction ", herein that the Contractor is not meeting the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take steps necessary to improve its progress, including those that may be required by OWNER, without additional cost to OWNER or the Grant Recipient. In this circumstance, OWNER may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and /or the amount of construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form as OWNER deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained. C. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of OWNER under this clause shall be grounds for a determination by OWNER that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the Contract. Upon making this determination, OWNER may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the "Default" clause of this contract. 3. Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work. A. The Contractor acknowledges that he has taken steps reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and that he has investigated and satisfied himself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to: 1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; 2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and roads; D-4 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; 4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and 5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during work performance. B. The Contractor acknowledges that he is satisfied as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and sub - surface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including all exploratory work done by OWNER, as well as from any drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the Contractor to take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the work, or from proceeding to successfully perform the work without additional expense to OWNER or the Grant Recipient. C. OWNER assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor based on the information made available by OWNER. Nor does OWNER assume responsibility for any understanding reached or representation made concerning conditions that can affect the work by any of its officers or agents before the execution of this contract, unless that understanding or representation is expressly stated in this contract. 4. Differing Site Conditions. A. The Contractor shall, within two (2) business days of discovery, and before the conditions are disturbed, give a written notice to Architect and OWNER of: 1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site which differ from those indicated in this contract; or 2) unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inhering in work of the character provided for in the contract. B. The OWNER's Architect shall investigate the site conditions promptly after receiving the notice. Work shall not proceed at the affected site, except at the Contractor's risk, until OWNER's Architect has provided written instructions to the Contractor. If the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or the time required for performing any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed as a result of the conditions, OWNER's Architect will make an equitable adjustment in the contract price, the delivery schedule, or both under this clause and the contract modified in writing accordingly. C. No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract under this clause shall be allowed, unless the Contractor has given the written notice required; provided, that the time prescribed above for giving written notice may be extended by OWNER's Architect. D. No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract for differing site conditions shall be allowed if made after final payment under this contract. 5. Specifications and Drawings for Construction. A. The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the drawings and specifications and at all times give access to OWNER and the Architect. Anything mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In case of difference between drawings and specifications, the specifications D -5 GENERAL CONDITIONS shall govern. In case of discrepancy in the figures, in the drawings, or in the specifications, the matter shall be promptly submitted to the Architect, who will make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without such a determination shall be at its own risk and expense. The Architect shall furnish from time to time such detailed drawings and other information as considered necessary, unless otherwise provided. B. Where in the specifications or drawings the words "directed ", "required ", "ordered ", "designated ", "prescribed ", or like words are used, it shall be understood that the "direction ", "requirement ", "order ", "designation ", or "prescription" of OWNER is intended. Similarly the words "approved," "acceptable," "satisfactory," or like words shall mean "approved by," or "acceptable to," or "satisfactory to" OWNER's Architect and OWNER, unless otherwise expressly stated. C. Where "as shown," "as indicated," "as detailed," or words of similar import are used, it is understood that the reference is made to the drawings accompanying this contract unless stated otherwise. The word "provided" as used herein shall be understood to mean, "provide complete in place ", that is "furnished and installed." D. "Shop drawings" means drawings, submitted to the Architect by the Contractor, subcontractor, or any lower tier subcontractor, showing in detail: 1) the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and 2) the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment details) of materials of equipment. It includes drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, and similar materials furnished by the Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the work required by the contract. OWNER's Architect and OWNER may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop drawings delivered under this contract. E. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval one reproducible and five (5) opaque copies (unless otherwise noted) and to AHCDD for record one opaque copy of all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. Deliver the submittal by such method as to assure receipt within two (2) days of sending. Notify the Architect via facsimile on the day the submittal is sent. F. If this contract requires shop drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate all such drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with other contract requirements and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Shop drawings submitted to the Architect without evidence of the Contractor's approval may be returned for re- submission. OWNER's AHCDD and the Architect will indicate an approval or disapproval of the shop drawings and if not approved as submitted shall indicate the reasons therefore. Any work done before such approval shall be at the Contractor's risk. Approval by OWNER and the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors or omissions in such drawings, nor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of this contract, except with respect to variations described and approved in accordance with paragraph 9G below. G. If shop drawings show variations from the contract requirements, the Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the drawings, at the time of submission. If the Architect approves any such variation and OWNER concurs, OWNER shall issue an appropriate modification to the contract. If the variation is minor or does not involve a change in price or in time of performance, however, a modification need not be issued. D -6 6. As -Built Drawings. 7. Material and Workmanship. GENERAL CONDITIONS D -7 H. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make timely requests of the Architect for such large scale and full size drawings, color schemes, and other additional information, not already in his possession, which shall be required in the planning and production of the work. Such requests may be submitted as the need arises, but each such request shall be filed in ample time to permit appropriate action to be taken by all parties involved, so as to avoid delay. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval six (6) copies (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. One set (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings will be retained by OWNER, the Architect, and the Grant Recipient, and one set will be returned to the Contractor. As required by OWNER's AHCDD, the Contractor, upon completing work under this contract, shall furnish a complete set of all shop drawings as finally approved. These drawings shall show all changes and revisions made up to the time the work is completed and accepted. J. This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all shop drawings prepared by subcontractors are submitted to the Architect and OWNER. K. The Contractor shall provide with each submittal for approval a certificate attesting that the products or materials to be supplied are: 1) currently and readily available; 2) not obsolete or discontinued; and 3) not to be discontinued or deleted from the supplier or manufacturers stock within the next calendar year. A. "As -built drawings," as used in this clause, means drawings submitted by the Contractor or subcontractor at any tier to show the construction of a particular structure or work as actually completed under the contract. "As -built drawings" shall be synonymous with "Record drawings." B. Within five (5) days of notification of substantial completion, the Contractor shall provide the Architect accurate information to be used in the preparation of permanent as -built drawings. For this purpose, the Contractor shall record on one set of contract drawings all changes from the installations originally indicated, and record final locations of underground lines by depth from finish grade and by accurate horizontal offset distances to permanent surface improvements such as buildings, curbs, or edges of walks. No final payment will be made to the contractor until the Architect has received accurate information to be used in the preparation of permanent as -built drawings. C. This clause shall be included in all subcontracts. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all as -built drawings prepared by subcontractors are submitted to the Architect. A. All equipment, material, and articles furnished under this contract shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. References in the contract to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor may use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of, and as approved by OWNER and the Architect, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. B. Approval of equipment and materials: 1) The Contractor shall obtain Architect's approval of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment to be incorporated into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment. When required by this contract or by OWNER, the Contractor shall also obtain OWNER and Architect approval of the material or articles that the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall provide full information concerning the material or articles. Machinery, equipment, material, and articles that do not have the required approval shall be installed or used at the risk of subsequent rejection. 2) When required by the specifications or OWNER, the Contractor shall submit appropriately marked samples (and certificates related to them) for approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges pre -paid. The Contractor shall label, or otherwise properly mark on the container, the material or product represented, its place of origin, the name of the producer, the Contractor's name, and the identification of the construction project for which the material or product is intended to be used. Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, describing each sample submitted for approval and certifying that the material, equipment, or accessory complies with contract requirements. The certificates shall include the name and brand of the product, name of manufacturer, and the location where produced. C. Approval of a sample shall not constitute a waiver of OWNER or the Grant Recipient's right to demand full compliance with contract requirements. Materials, equipment, and accessories may be rejected for cause even though samples have been approved. D. Wherever materials are required to comply with recognized standards or specifications, such specifications shall be accepted as establishing the technical qualities and testing methods, but shall not govern the number of tests required to be made nor modify other contract requirements. OWNER or Architect may require laboratory test reports on items submitted for approval or may approve materials on the basis of data submitted in certificates with samples. Check tests will be made on materials delivered for use only as frequently as OWNER's Architect determines necessary to insure compliance of materials with the specifications. The Contractor will assume all costs of re- testing materials that fail to meet contract requirements and /or testing materials offered in substitution for those found deficient. GENERAL CONDITIONS E. After approval, samples will be kept on the job site until completion of work. They may be built into the work after a substantial quantity of the materials they represent has been built in and accepted. F. Prohibition against use of lead -based paint. The Contractor shall comply with the prohibition against the use of lead -based paint contained in the Lead -Based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act (42 U.S.C. 4821- 4846) as implemented by 24 CFR Part 35. 8. Permits, Licenses, and Codes. A. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations. Notwithstanding the requirement of the Contractor to comply with the drawings and D -8 GENERAL CONDITIONS specifications in the contract, work shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations as amended by any waivers. Before beginning the work, the contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for compliance with all applicable ordinances and codes bearing on the work and shall immediately report any discrepancy it may discover to Architect and OWNER. Where requirements of the drawings and specifications fail to comply with such applicable ordinances or codes for the new or replaced work, OWNER's Architect will adjust the contract by change order pursuant to the clause entitled "Changes" herein to conform to such ordinances or codes, unless waivers in writing covering the difference have been granted by proper authority. B. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, and licenses necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work, whether or not covered by the specifications and drawings for the work. 9. Health, Safety, and Accident Prevention. A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall: 1) Ensure that no laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his/her health and /or safety as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by regulation; 2) Protect the lives, health, and safety of other persons; 3) Prevent damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and, 4) Avoid work interruptions. B. For these purposes, the Contractor shall: 1) Comply with regulations and standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part 1926. Failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91 -54, 83 Statute 96), 40 U.S.C. 327 et seq., 2) Include the terms of this clause in every subcontract so that such terms will be binding on each subcontractor. C. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all accidents incident to work performed under this contract resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment, and shall report this data in the manner prescribed by 29 CFR 1904. D. OWNER's Architect shall notify the Contractor of any non - compliance with these requirements and of the corrective action required. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor or the Contractor's representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the non - compliance and corrective action required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to take corrective action promptly, OWNER's Architect may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall not base any claim or request for equitable adjustment for additional time or money on any stop order issued under these circumstances. GENERAL CONDITIONS E. The Contractor shall be responsible for his subcontractors' compliance with the provisions of this clause. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract as OWNER, the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, or the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 10. Temporary Heating. The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary heating, covering, and enclosures necessary to properly protect all work and materials against damage by dampness and cold, to dry out the work, and to facilitate the completion of the work. Any permanent heating equipment used shall be turned over to the Grant Recipient in the condition and at the time required by the specifications. 11. Availability and Use of Utility Services. A. The Grant Recipient shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of each utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid for by the Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the Grant Recipient. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge. B. The Contractor, at its expense and in a manner satisfactory to OWNER Architect, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the OWNER and the Grant Recipient, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia. 12. Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements. A. The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed under this contract, and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under this contract. B. The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are broken during performance of this contract, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a tree - pruning compound as directed by OWNER's Architect. C. The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities at or near the work site or on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by the Contractor. Prior to disturbing the ground at the construction site, the Contractor shall ensure that all underground utility lines are clearly marked. D. The Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin, secure, and protect as necessary all foundations and other parts of existing structures adjacent to, adjoining, and in the vicinity of the site, which may be affected by the excavations or other operations connected with the construction of the project. E. Any equipment temporarily removed as a result of work under this contract shall be protected, cleaned, and replaced in the same condition as at the time of award of this contract. D -10 GENERAL CONDITIONS D -11 F. New work, which connects to existing work, shall correspond in all respects with that to which it connects and /or be similar to existing work unless otherwise required by the specifications. G. No structural members shall be altered or in any way weakened without the written authorization of OWNER and the Architect, unless such work is clearly specified in the plans or specifications. H. If the removal of the existing work exposes discolored or unfinished surfaces, or work out of alignment, such surfaces shall be refinished, or the material replaced as necessary to make the continuous work uniform and harmonious. This, however, shall not be construed to require the refinishing or reconstruction of dissimilar finishes previously exposed, or finished surfaces in good condition, but in different planes or on different levels when brought together by the removal of intervening work, unless such refinishing or reconstruction is specified in the plans or specifications. I. The Contractor shall give all required notices to any adjoining or adjacent property Grant Recipient or other party before the commencement of any work. J. The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless OWNER, the Architect, and the Grant Recipient from any damages on account of settlement or the loss of lateral support of adjoining property, any damages from changes in topography affecting drainage, and from all loss or expense and all damages for which OWNER, the Architect, or the Grant Recipient may become liable in consequence of such injury or damage to adjoining and adjacent structures and their premises. K. The Contractor will repair any damage to vegetation, structures, equipment, utilities, or improvements, including those that are the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, OWNER may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor. 13. Temporary Buildings and Transportation of Materials. A. Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices, sanitary facilities) and utilities may be erected by the Contractor only with the approval of OWNER and the Grant Recipient and shall be built with labor and materials furnished by the Contractor without expense to OWNER or the Grant Recipient. The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed at the Contractor's expense upon completion of the work. With the written consent of OWNER and the Grant Recipient, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed. B. The Contractor shall, as directed by OWNER's Architect, use only established roadways, or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by OWNER's Architect. When materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any federal, state, or local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads. 14. Clean Air and Water (Applicable to Contracts in Excess of $100,000). A. Definition. "Facility" means any building, plant, installation, structure, mine, vessel or other floating craft, location, or site of operations, owned, leased, or supervised by the Contractor or any subcontractor, used in the performance of the contract or any subcontract. When a location or site of operations includes more than one building, plant, installation, or structure, the entire location or site shall be deemed a facility except when the Administrator, or a designee, of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) determines that independent facilities are collocated in one geographical area. GENERAL CONDITIONS B. In compliance with regulations issued by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 40 CFR Part 15, pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended ( "Air Act "), 42 U.S.C. 7401, et seq., the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended ("Water Act "), 33 U.S.C. 1251, et seq., and Executive Order 11738, the Contractor agrees to: 1) Not utilize any facility in the performance of this contract or any subcontract which is listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities pursuant to Part 15 of the regulations for the duration of time that the facility remains on the list; 2) Promptly notify OWNER's AHCDD if a facility the Contractor intends to use in the performance of this contract is on the EPA List of Violating Facilities or the Contractor knows that it has been recommended to be placed on the List; 3) Comply with all requirements of the Air Act and the Water Act, including requirements of Section 114 of the Air Act and Section 308 of the Water Act, and all applicable clean air and clean water standards; and, 4) Include or cause to be included the provisions of this clause in every subcontract, and take such action as HUD may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 15. Energy Efficiency. The Contractor shall comply with all standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Public Law 94- 163) for the State of Georgia. 16. Inspection and Acceptance of Construction. A. Definitions. As used in this clause: 1) "Acceptance" means the act of OWNER by which OWNER and the Architect approve and the Grant Recipient assumes ownership of the work performed under this contract. Acceptance may be partial or complete. 2) "Inspection" means examining and testing the work performed under the contract (including, when appropriate, raw materials, equipment, components, and intermediate assemblies) to determine whether it conforms to contract requirements. 3) "Testing" means that element of inspection that determines the properties or elements, including functional operation of materials, equipment, or their components, by the application of established scientific principles and procedures. B. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate quality control system and will ensure that the work performed under the contract conforms to contract requirements. All work is subject to inspection and test by OWNER's Architect at all places and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the contract. If Grant Recipient requires the contractor to work overtime, on weekends or on holidays, the contractor must first notify OWNER's Architect and OWNER in writing of the overtime schedule. If OWNER determines it necessary to have OWNER or Architect staff present or on call during the contractor's overtime, the contractor shall reimburse OWNER or the Architect for the staff costs at time and half the regular staff rate. Should the contractor fail to reimburse OWNER by the next progress payment requested by the contractor, OWNER shall deduct such reimbursement from the contractor's next progress payment. GENERAL CONDITIONS C. OWNER and Architect inspections and tests are for the benefit of OWNER and the Grant Recipient and do not: 1) relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 2) relieve the Contractor of responsibility for loss or damaged material before acceptance; 3) constitute or imply acceptance; or, 4) affect the continuing rights of the Grant Recipient after acceptance of the completed work under paragraph J below. D. The presence or absence of OWNER or the Architect does not relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor is he authorized to change any term or condition of the specifications without OWNER's Architect written authorization. Architect shall give all instructions and approvals with respect to the work to the Contractor. E. The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by OWNER. OWNER may charge to the Contractor any additional cost of inspection or test when work is not ready at the time specified by the Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes re- inspection or retest necessary. OWNER and Architect shall perform all inspections and tests in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the work. Special, full size, and performance tests shall be performed as described in the contract. F. OWNER and the Architect may conduct routine inspections of the construction site on a daily basis. G. The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or correct work found by OWNER or the Architect not to conform to contract requirements, unless OWNER decides that it is in their interest or that of the Grant Recipient to accept the work with an appropriate adjustment in contract price. The Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove rejected material from the premises. H. If the Contractor does not promptly replace or correct rejected work, OWNER may: 1) by contract or otherwise, replace or correct the work and charge the cost to the Contractor; 2) terminate for default the Contractor's right to proceed. If any work requiring inspection is covered up without approval of OWNER's Architect, it must, if requested by OWNER, be uncovered at the expense of the Contractor. If at any time before final acceptance of the entire work, OWNER's Architect considers it necessary or advisable to examine work already completed by removing or tearing it out, the Contractor shall, on request, promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and material. If such work is found to be defective or non - conforming in any material respect due to the fault of the Contractor or its subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray all the expenses of the examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the contract, OWNER's Architect shall make an equitable adjustment to cover the cost of the examination and reconstruction, including, if completion of the work was thereby delayed, an extension of time. K. Use and Possession Prior to Completion. GENERAL CONDITIONS J. The Contractor shall notify OWNER and the Architect as to the date when in its opinion all or a designated portion of the work will be substantially completed and ready for inspection. If OWNER and the Architect determine that the state of preparedness is as represented, the inspection will be completed promptly. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, Grant Recipient shall accept, as soon as practicable after completion and inspection, all work required by the contract or that portion of the work OWNER's AHCDD and the Architect determine and designate can be accepted separately. Acceptance shall be final and conclusive except for latent defects, fraud, gross mistakes amounting to fraud, or the Grant Recipient's right under any warranty or guarantee. L. The Grant Recipient shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially completed part of the work. Before taking possession of or using any work, the Architect shall furnish the Contractor a list of items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on those portions of the work that the Grant Recipient intends to take possession of or use. However, failure of DOWNER or the Architect to list any item of work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the terms of the contract. The Grant Recipient's possession or use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract. M. While the Grant Recipient has such possession or use, the Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for: 1) the loss of or damage to the work resulting from the Grant Recipient's possession or use, notwithstanding the terms of the "Permits, Licenses, and Codes" clause of this contract; 2) all maintenance costs on the areas occupied; and, 3) furnishing heat, Tight, power, and water used in the areas occupied without proper remuneration. N. If prior possession or use by the Grant Recipient delays the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, an equitable adjustment shall be made in the contract price or the time of completion, and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. 17. Warranty of Title. The Contractor warrants good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment incorporated in the work and agrees to deliver the premises, together with all improvements thereon, free from any claims, liens or charges, and agrees further that neither it nor any other person, firm or corporation shall have any right to a lien upon the premises or anything appurtenant thereto. 18. Warranty of Construction. A. In addition to any other warranties in this contract, the Contractor warrants, except as provided in paragraph J of this clause, that work performed under this contract conforms to the contract requirements and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or workmanship performed by himself, any subcontractor, or supplier at any tier. This warranty shall continue for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work. If the Grant Recipient takes possession of any part of the work before final acceptance, this warranty shall continue for a period of one year from the date that the Grant Recipient takes possession. D -14 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1) the Contractor's failure to conform to contract requirements; or 2) any defects of equipment, material, workmanship or design furnished by the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall remedy, at the Contractor's expense, any failure to conform, or any defect. In addition, the Contractor shall remedy, at the Contractor's expense, any damage to the Grant Recipient's owned or controlled real or personal property when the damage is the result of: C. The Contractor will restore any work damaged in fulfilling the terms of this clause. The Contractor's warranty with respect to work repaired or replaced will run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. D. The Grant Recipient shall notify the Contractor and OWNER, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of any failure, defect, or damage. E. If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect, or damage within a reasonable time after receipt of notice, OWNER shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the failure, defect, or damage at the Contractor's expense. F. With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for work performed and materials furnished under this contract, the Contractor shall: 1) obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; 2) require all warranties to be executed in writing, for the benefit of the Grant Recipient; and, 3) enforce all warranties for the benefit of the Grant Recipient. G. In the event the Contractor's warranty under this clause has expired, the Grant Recipient may bring suit at its own expense to enforce a subcontractor, manufacturer, or supplier warranty. H. Unless a defect is caused by the negligence of the Contractor or subcontractor at any tier, the Contractor shall not be liable for the repair of any defective material furnished by the Grant Recipient, nor for the repair of any damage that results from any defect in Grant Recipient furnished material. Notwithstanding any provisions herein to the contrary, the establishment of the time periods in paragraphs A and C above relate only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the work, and have no relationship to the time within which his obligation to comply with the contract may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to its obligation other than specifically to correct the work. J. This warranty shall not limit the Grant Recipient's rights under the "Inspection and Acceptance of Construction" clause of this contract with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes or fraud. 19. Prohibition Against Liens. The Contractor is prohibited from placing a lien on the property of Augusta, Georgia, or its officers or agents. This prohibition shall apply to all subcontractors at any tier and all material suppliers. D -15 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1. Contract Period. GENERAL CONDITIONS The Contractor shall complete all work required under this contract within the time schedule established in the Notice to Proceed issued by OWNER. 2. Order of Precedence. In the event of a conflict between these General Conditions and the Specifications, the General Conditions shall prevail. In the event of a conflict between the contract and any applicable state or local law or regulation, the state or local law or regulation shall prevail; provided that such state or local law or regulation does not conflict with, or is less restrictive than applicable federal law, regulation, or Executive Order. In the event of such a conflict, applicable federal law, regulation, or Executive Order shall prevail. 3. Payments to Contractor. A. Payments to the Contractor will be made by OWNER on behalf of the Grant Recipient. OWNER shall pay the Contractor the price as provided in this contract. B. Before any payment is made, an inspection by OWNER's Rehabilitation Inspector and the Architect must be performed. OWNER shall make progress payments approximately every 30 days on the Architect - determined value of work accomplished that meets the standards of quality established under the contract, as approved by Architect. OWNER may, with the approval of the AHCDD's Director, make more frequent payments to contractors that are qualified small businesses. C. Before the first progress payment under this contract, the Contractor shall furnish, in such detail as requested by OWNER's Architect, a breakdown of the total contract price showing the amount for each principal category of the work, which shall substantiate the payment requested and provide a basis for determining progress payments. The breakdown shall be approved by Architect. If the contract covers more than one project, the Contractor shall furnish a separate breakdown for each. The values and quantities employed in making up this breakdown are for determining the amount of progress payments and shall not be construed as a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price. D. The Contractor shall submit, on forms provided by OWNER, requests for payment showing the value of the work performed during the period based upon the approved breakdown of the contract price. Such payment requests shall be submitted only for work completed during that period and are subject to correction and revision as required. OWNER, the Architect, and the Grant Recipient must approve the estimates prior to payment. If the contract covers more than one project, the Contractor shall furnish a separate progress payment estimate for each. E. The OWNER's payment request shall include the following certification, which shall be signed by the Contractor, or payment shall not be made: "I hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge and belief, that: 1) The amounts requested are only for performance in accordance with the specifications, terms, and conditions of the contract; 2) Payments to subcontractors and suppliers have been made from previous payments received under the contract, and timely payments will be made from the proceeds of the payment covered by this certification, in accordance with subcontract agreements; and, 3) This request for progress payments does not include any amounts that the prime contractor intends to withhold or retain from a subcontractor or supplier in accordance with the terms and conditions of the subcontract." D -16 GENERAL CONDITIONS F. Except as otherwise provided in State law, OWNER shall retain ten (10) percent of the amount of progress payments until completion and acceptance of all work under the contract.; G. OWNER may authorize material delivered on the site and preparatory work already completed to be taken into consideration when computing progress payments. Material delivered to the Contractor at locations other than the site may also be taken into consideration if the Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that: 1) it has acquired title to such material; 2) the material is properly stored in a bonded warehouse, storage yard, or similar suitable place as may be approved by OWNER's Architect; 3) the material is insured to cover its full value; and 4) the material will be used to perform this contract. H. Before any progress payment that includes delivered material is made, the Contractor shall furnish such documentation as OWNER and Architect may require assuring the protection of the Grant Recipient's interest in such materials. The Contractor shall remain responsible for such stored material notwithstanding the transfer of title to the Grant Recipient. I. All material and work covered by progress payments made shall, at the time of payment become the sole property of the Grant Recipient, but this shall not be construed as: 1) relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all material and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work; or, 2) waiving the right of the Grant Recipient to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the contract. J. In the event the Contractor's work has been damaged by other contractors or persons other than employees of OWNER, the Architect, or the Grant Recipient in the course of their employment, the Contractor shall restore such damaged work without cost to OWNER or the Grant Recipient and seek redress for its damage only from those who directly caused it. K. OWNER shall make the final payment due the Contractor under this contract after: 1) completion and final acceptance of all work; and 2) presentation of release of all claims against OWNER or the Grant Recipient arising by virtue of this contract, other than claims, in stated amounts, that the Contractor has specifically excepted from the operation of the release. Each such exception shall embrace no more than one claim, the basis_ and scope of which shall be clearly defined. L. The amounts for such excepted claims shall not be included in the request for final payment. A release may also be required of the assignee if the Contractor's claim to amounts payable under this contract has been assigned. M. Prior to making any payment, OWNER may require the Contractor to furnish receipts or other evidence of payment from all persons performing work and supplying material to the Contractor, if OWNER determines such evidence is necessary to substantiate claimed costs. D -17 GENERAL CONDITIONS N. Prompt Pay Act. This agreement is intended by the parties to, and does, supersede any and all provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.C.G.A. Section 13 -11 -1, et seq. In the event any provision of this agreement is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act, the provision of this agreement shall control. O. OWNER shall not: 1) determine or adjust any claims for payment or disputes arising thereunder between the Contractor and its subcontractors or material suppliers; or, 2) withhold any money for the protection of the subcontractors or material suppliers. The failure or refusal of OWNER to withhold money from the Contractor shall in no way impair the obligations of any surety or sureties under any bonds furnished under this contract. 4. Contract Modifications. A. Only OWNER has authority to modify any term or condition of this contract. Any contract modification shall be authorized in writing. B. OWNER may modify the contract unilaterally: 5. Changes. 1) pursuant to a specific authorization stated in a contract clause (e.g., Changes); or 2) for administrative matters which do not change the rights or responsibilities of the parties (e.g., changes in addresses). All other contract modifications shall be in the form of supplemental agreements signed by OWNER, the Contractor, and the Grant Recipient. C. When a proposed modification requires the approval of Augusta, Georgia's Commission prior to its issuance (e.g., a change order that exceeds the Grant Recipient's approved threshold), modification shall not be effective until the required approval is received by OWNER. A. OWNER may at any time, without notice to the sureties, by written order indicated to be a change order, make changes in the work within the general scope of the contract including changes: 1) in the specifications (including drawings and designs); 2) in the method or manner of performance of the work; 3) Grant Recipient furnished facilities, equipment, materials, services, or site; or, 4) directing the acceleration in the performance of the work. B. Any other written order or oral order (which, as used in this paragraph, includes direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination) from OWNER that causes a change shall be treated as a change order; provided, that the Contractor gives OWNER and Architect written notice stating: 1) the date, circumstances and source of the order; and 2) that the Contractor regards the order as a change order. D -18 GENERAL CONDITIONS C. Except as provided in this clause, no order, statement, or conduct of OWNER shall be treated as a change under this clause or entitle the Contractor to an equitable adjustment. D. If any change under this clause causes an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or the time required for the performance of any of the work under this contract, whether or not changed by any such order, OWNER shall make an equitable adjustment and modify the contract in writing. However, except for an adjustment based on defective specifications, no proposal for any change under paragraph B above shall be allowed for any costs incurred more than 20 days (5 days for oral orders) before the Contractor gives written notice as required. In the case of defective specifications for which OWNER or the Architect is responsible, the equitable adjustment shall include any increased cost reasonably incurred by the Contractor in attempting to comply with the defective specifications. E. The Contractor must assert its right to an adjustment under this clause within 30 days after: 1) receipt of a written change order under paragraph A of this clause; or 2) the furnishing of a written notice under paragraph B of this clause, by submitting a written statement describing the general nature and the amount of the proposal. F. If the facts justify it, OWNER may extend the period for submission. The proposal may be included in the notice required under paragraph B above. No proposal by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this contract. G. The Contractor's written proposal for equitable adjustment shall be submitted in the form of a lump sum proposal supported with an itemized breakdown of all increases and decreases in the contract in at least the following details: 1) Direct Costs. Materials (list individual items, the quantity and unit cost of each, and the aggregate cost); Transportation and delivery costs associated with materials; Labor breakdowns by hours or unit costs (identified with specific work to be performed); Construction equipment exclusively necessary for the change; Costs of preparation and /or revision to shop drawings resulting from the change; Worker's Compensation and Public Liability Insurance; Employment taxes under FICA and FUTA; and, Bond Costs - when size of change warrants revision. 2) Indirect Costs. Indirect costs may include overhead, general and administrative expenses, and fringe benefits not normally treated as direct costs. 3) Profit. The amount of profit shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent, and complexity of the work required by the change. H. The allowability of the direct and indirect costs shall be determined in accordance with the Contract Cost Principles and Procedures for Commercial Firms in Part 31 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR 1 -31), as implemented by HUD Handbook 2210.18, in effect on the date of this contract. The Contractor shall not be allowed a profit on the profit received by any subcontractor. Equitable adjustments for deleted work shall include a credit for profit and may include a credit for indirect costs. On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of the contract, the application of indirect costs and profit shall be on the net - change in direct costs for the Contractor or subcontractor performing the work. The Contractor shall include in the proposal its request for time extension (if any), and shall include sufficient information and dates to demonstrate whether and to what extent the change will delay the completion of the contract in its entirety. J. OWNER shall act on proposals within 30 days after their receipt, or notify the Contractor of the date when such action will be taken. D -19 C. A claim under this clause shall not be allowed: 7. Disputes. GENERAL CONDITIONS D -20 K. Failure to reach an agreement on any proposal shall be a dispute under the clause entitled "Disputes" herein. Nothing in this clause, however, shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the contract as changed. L. Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no change shall be made by the Contractor without a prior order from OWNER. 6. Suspension of Work. A. OWNER may order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of the work of this contract for the period of time that OWNER determines appropriate for the convenience of OWNER or the Grant Recipient. B. If the performance of all or any part of the work is, for an unreasonable period of time, suspended, delayed, or interrupted: 1) By an act of OWNER in the administration of this contract; or 2) By OWNER's failure to act within the time specified in this contract (or within a reasonable time if not specified); an adjustment shall be made for any increase in the cost of performance of the contract (excluding profit) necessarily caused by such unreasonable suspension, delay, or interruption and the contract modified in writing accordingly. However, no adjustment shall be made under this clause for any suspension, delay, or interruption to the extent that performance would have been so suspended, delayed, or interrupted by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor or for which any equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other provision of this contract. 1) For any costs incurred more than 20 days before the Contractor shall have notified OWNER and Architect in writing of the act or failure to act involved (but this requirement shall not apply as to a claim resulting from a suspension order); and, 2) Unless the claim, in an amount stated, is asserted in writing as soon as practicable after the termination of the suspension, delay, or interruption, but not later than the date of final payment under the contract. A. "Claim," as used in this clause, means a written demand or assertion by one of the contracting parties seeking, as a matter of right, the payment of money in a sum certain, the adjustment or interpretation of contract terms, or other relief arising under or relating to the contract. A claim arising under the contract, unlike a claim relating to the contract, is a claim that can be resolved under a contract clause that provides for the relief sought by the claimant. A voucher, invoice, or other routine request for payment that is not in dispute when submitted is not a claim. The submission may be converted to a claim by complying with the requirements of this clause, if it is disputed either as to liability or amount or is not acted upon in a reasonable time. B. Except for disputes arising under the clauses entitled "Labor Standards" and "Labor Standards - Non - routine Maintenance ", all disputes arising under or relating to this contract, including any claims for 8. Default. GENERAL CONDITIONS damages for the alleged breach thereof which are not disposed of by agreement, shall be resolved under this clause. C. All claims by the Contractor shall be made in writing within ten (10) calendar days from the date of the occurrence of the dispute and submitted to AHCDD for a written decision. A claim by the Grant Recipient against the Contractor shall be subject to a written decision by OWNER. All claims by the Contractor shall be made in writing and submitted to OWNER for a written decision. D. OWNER shall, within 60 days after receipt of the request, decide the claim or notify the Contractor of the date by which the decision will be made. E. OWNER's decision shall be final unless the Contractor: 1) appeals in writing to the OWNER's AHCDD Director in accordance with AHCDD's policies and procedures; 2) refers the appeal to the County Administrator for independent mediation or arbitration in accordance with OWNER's policies and procedures; or 3) files suit in the Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by executing this agreement, specifically consents to venue in Richmond County and waives any right to contest the venue in the Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. F. Such appeal must be made within 14 days after receipt of OWNER's decision. G. The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of this contract, pending final resolution of any request for relief, claim, appeal, or action arising under or relating to the contract, and comply with any decision of OWNER. A. OWNER may declare the Contractor in default by written notice thereof to the Contractor, and terminate the whole or any part of this Contract for any of the following reasons: 1) Failure to begin work within the time specified in the Contract or as otherwise specified; 2) Failure to perform the work with sufficient labor, equipment, or material to insure the completion of the specified work in accordance with the Contract terms; 3) Unsatisfactory performance of the work; 4) Failure or refusal to remove material, or remove and replace any work rejected as defective or unsatisfactory; 5) Discontinuance of work without approval; 6) Failure to resume work, which has been discontinued, within a reasonable time after notice to do so; 7) Insolvency or bankruptcy; 8) Assignment made for the benefit of creditors; 9) Failure or refusal within 10 days after payment by OWNER or upon written notice by OWNER, to make payment or show cause why payment should not be made, of any amounts due for materials furnished, labor performed, equipment rentals, or utility services rendered; D -21 GENERAL CONDITIONS 10) Failure to protect, to repair, or to make good any damage or injury to property; or 11) Breach of any provision of this Contract. B. In the event that OWNER terminates this Contract in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph A above, OWNER may procure, upon such terms and in such manner as it determines, services similar or identical to those so terminated, and the Contractor shall be liable to OWNER for any reasonable excess costs for such similar or identical services included within the terminated part of the Contract. C. If the Contract is terminated as provided in Subparagraph A above, OWNER, in addition to any other rights provided in this paragraph, may require the Contractor to transfer title and deliver immediately to the Grant Recipient in the manner and to the extent directed by OWNER, such partially completed work, including, where applicable, reports, working papers and other documentation, as the Contractor has specifically produced or specifically acquired for the performance of such part of the Contract as has been terminated. Payment for completed work accepted by OWNER's Architect shall be at the Contract price. Except as provided below, payment for partially completed work including reports and working papers, delivered to and accepted by OWNER shall be in an amount agreed upon by the Contractor and OWNER. OWNER may withhold from amounts otherwise due the Contractor for such completed or partially completed works, such sum as OWNER determines to be necessary to protect OWNER and the Grant Recipient against Toss. D. The rights and remedies of OWNER provided in this paragraph shall not be exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract. E. OWNER failure to exercise any rights or remedies provided in this paragraph shall not be construed to be a waiver by OWNER of its rights and remedies in regard to the event of default or any succeeding event of default. F. The Contractor's right to proceed shall not be terminated or the Contractor charged with damages under this clause if the delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include: 1) acts of God, or of the public enemy; 2) acts of the Grant Recipient, OWNER, or other governmental entity in either its sovereign or contractual capacity; 3) acts of another contractor in the performance of a contract with OWNER or the Grant Recipient; 4) fires; 5) floods; 6) epidemics; 7) quarantine restrictions; 8) strikes; 9) freight embargoes; 10) unusually severe weather; or 11) delays of subcontractors or suppliers at any tier arising from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of both the Contractor and the subcontractors or suppliers. D -22 G. The Contractor, within 10 days from the beginning of such delay (unless extended by Owner) must notify Owner and Architect in writing of the causes of delay. Owner and Architect shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay. If, in the judgment of Owner, the findings of fact warrant such action, time for completing the work shall be extended by written modification to the contract. The findings of Owner shall be reduced to a written decision that shall be subject to the provisions of the "Disputes" clause of this contract. H. If, after termination of the Contractor's right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the termination had been for convenience of Owner and the Grant Recipient. 9. Liquidated Damages. GENERAL CONDITIONS A. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, or any extension, as specified in the clause entitled "Default" of this contract, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner, as liquidated damages, the sum of $100.00 for each day of delay. If different completion dates are specified in the contract for separate parts or stages of the work, the amount of liquidated damages shall be assessed on those parts or stages which are delayed. To the extent that the Contractor's delay or nonperformance is excused under another clause in this contract, liquidated damages shall not be due the Grant Recipient. The Contractor remains liable for damages caused other than by delay. B. If Owner terminates the Contractor's right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages until such reasonable time as may be required for final completion of the work together with any increased costs occasioned Owner in completing the work. C. If Owner does not terminate the Contractor's right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages until the work is completed or accepted. 10. Termination for Convenience. A. Owner may terminate this contract in whole, or in part, whenever Owner determines that such termination is in the best interest of Owner and the Grant Recipient. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a Notice of Termination specifying the extent to which the performance of the work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. B. If the performance of the work is terminated, either in whole or in part, Owner and the Grant Recipient shall be liable to the Contractor for reasonable and proper costs resulting from such termination upon the receipt by OWNER of a properly presented claim setting out in detail: 1) the total cost of the work performed to date of termination less the total amount of contract payments made to the Contractor; 2) the cost (including reasonable profit) of settling and paying claims under subcontracts and material orders for work performed and materials and supplies delivered to the site, payment for which has not been made by OWNER to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the subcontractor or supplier; 3) the cost of preserving and protecting the work already performed until the Grant Recipient or assignee takes possession thereof or assumes responsibility therefor; 4) the actual or estimated cost of legal and accounting services reasonably necessary to prepare and present the termination claim to OWNER; and 5) an amount constituting a reasonable profit on the value of the work performed by the Contractor. D -23 C. OWNER will act on the Contractor's claim within 60 days of receipt of the Contractor's claim. 11. Assignment of Contract. GENERAL CONDITIONS D. Any disputes with regard to this clause are expressly made subject to the provisions of the "Disputes" clause of this contract. A. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Contract, this Contract shall be binding upon the parties and their respective successors and assigns. B. The Contractor shall not subcontract with any person or entity to perform all or any part of the work to be performed under this Contract without the prior written consent of OWNER, which consent may be withheld at the sole and absolute discretion of OWNER. C. The Contractor may not assign, in whole or in part, this Contract or its rights, duties, obligations, or responsibilities hereunder without the prior written consent of OWNER, which consent may be withheld at the sole and absolute discretion of OWNER. D. The Contractor may not, without the consent of OWNER, assign its rights to payment to be received under the Contract. E. For the purposes of this Contract, the term "assign" shall include, but shall not be limited to, the sale, gift, assignment, pledge,. or other transfer of any Grant Recipient's interest in the Contractor provided, however, that the term shall not apply to the sale or other transfer of stock of a publicly traded company. F Any assignment consented to by OWNER shall be evidenced by a written assignment agreement executed by the Contractor and its assignee in which the assignee agrees to be legally bound by all of the terms and conditions of the Contract and to assume the duties, obligations, and responsibilities being assigned. G. A change of name by the Contractor, following which the Contractor's federal tax identification number remains unchanged, shall not be considered to be an assignment hereunder. The Contractor shall give OWNER written notice of any such change of name. 12. Insurance and Bonds. A. Before commencing work, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall furnish OWNER with certificates of insurance showing the following insurance is in force and will insure all operations under the Contract: 1) Workers' Compensation, in accordance with State of Georgia Workers' Compensation laws. 2) Commercial General Liability with a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence to protect the Contractor and each subcontractor against claims for bodily injury or death and damage to the property of others. This shall cover the use of all equipment, hoists, and vehicles on the site(s) not covered by Automobile Liability under (3) below. If the Contractor has a "claims -made" policy, then the following additional requirements apply: the policy must provide a "retroactive date" which must be on or before the execution date of the Contract; and the extended reporting period may not be less than five years following the completion date of the Contract. D -24 13. Subcontracts. A. Definitions. As used in this contract: GENERAL CONDITIONS 3) Automobile Liability on owned and non -owned motor vehicles used on the site(s) or in connection therewith for a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not Tess than $1,000,000 per occurrence. B. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall furnish OWNER with a certificate of insurance evidencing that Builder's Risk (fire and extended coverage) Insurance on all work in place and /or materials stored at the building site(s), including foundations and building equipment, is in force. The Builder's Risk Insurance shall be for the benefit of the Contractor and the Grant Recipient as their interests may appear and each shall be named in the policy or policies as an insured. The Contractor in installing equipment supplied by the Grant Recipient shall carry insurance on such equipment from the time the Contractor takes possession thereof until OWNER and the Grant Recipient accept the Contract work. The Builder's Risk Insurance need not be carried on excavations, piers, footings, or foundations until such time as work on the superstructure is started. It need not be carried on landscape work. Policies shall furnish coverage at all times for the full cash value of all completed construction, as well as materials in place and /or stored at the site(s), whether or not partial payment has been made by OWNER. The Contractor may terminate this insurance on buildings as of the date taken over for occupancy by the Grant Recipient. The Contractor is not required to carry Builder's Risk Insurance for modernization work that does not involve structural alterations or additions and where the Grant Recipient's existing fire and extended coverage policy can be endorsed to include such work. C. Prior to signing of the Construction Contract, the Contractor must furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder, issued at 100% of the Contract Amount for all coverages. The Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond may be in one, or may be in separate instruments, in accordance with local law. D. The Contractor shall furnish copies of all insurance certificates to OWNER before commencing with the work, showing evidence of coverage and naming as additional insured to the policies the Grant Recipient, including their respective Commissioners, Board Members, Officers, Agents and Employees, individually and collectively. The contractor shall not be allowed to commence work until the required certificates are provided to OWNER. Additionally, should the insurance become ineffective or lapse during construction, OWNER shall require the contractor to cease work until such time as the contractor submits proof of insurance in compliance with the requirements of this contract. If such suspension of work is necessary, the contractor shall not be entitled to addition time to complete the work. E. All insurance shall be carried with companies that are financially responsible and admitted to do business in the State of Georgia. If any such insurance is due to expire during the construction period, the Contractor (including subcontractors, as applicable) shall not permit the coverage to lapse and shall furnish evidence of coverage to OWNER. All certificates of insurance, as evidence of coverage, shall provide that no coverage may be canceled or non - renewed by the insurance company until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER. 1) "Subcontract" means any contract, purchase order, or other purchase agreement, including modifications and change orders to the foregoing, entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies, materials, equipment, and services for the performance of the prime contract or a subcontract. D -25 GENERAL CONDITIONS 2) "Subcontractor" means any supplier, vendor, or firm that furnishes supplies, materials, equipment, and services for the performance of the prime contract or a subcontract. B. No subcontract for assignment of this contract shall be made without the written consent of OWNER. C. The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any subcontractor who has been denied participation in any OWNER or HUD program or who has been suspended or debarred from participating in contracting programs by Augusta, Georgia, OWNER, HUD, or any other agency of the United States Government or of the State of Georgia. D. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the acts or omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as for the acts or omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor. E. The Contractor shall insert appropriate clauses in all subcontracts to bind subcontractors to the terms and conditions of this contract insofar as they are applicable to the work of subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in this contract shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and OWNER or between any subcontractor and the Grant Recipient. 14. Subcontracting with Small Firms and Labor Surplus Area Firms. The Contractor shall take the following steps to ensure that, whenever possible, subcontracts are awarded to small business firms and labor surplus area firms: A. Placing qualified small businesses on solicitation lists; B. Ensuring that small businesses are solicited whenever they are potential sources; C. Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small businesses.; D. Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirements of the contract permit, which encourage participation by small businesses; and E. Using the services and assistance of the U.S. Small Business Administration and State and local governmental small business agencies. 15. Equal Employment Opportunity. A. During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. 2) The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. Such action shall include, but not be limited to: (a) employment; D -26 GENERAL CONDITIONS (b) upgrading; (c) demotion; (d) transfer; (e) recruitment or recruitment advertising; (f) layoff or termination; (g) rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and (h) selection for training, including apprenticeship. B. The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment the notices to be provided by OWNER that explain this clause. C. The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. D. The Contractor shall send, to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, the notice to be provided by OWNER advising the labor union or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under this clause, and post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. E. The Contractor shall comply with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor. F. The Contractor shall furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. G. In the event of a determination that the Contractor is not in compliance with this clause or any rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts, or Federally assisted construction contracts under the procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246, as amended. In addition, sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked against the Contractor as provided in Executive Order 11246, as amended, the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. H. The Contractor shall include the terms and conditions of this clause in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued under Executive Order 11246, as amended, so that these terms and conditions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance; provided that if the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into the litigation to protect the interests of the United States. D -27 GENERAL CONDITIONS 16. Employment, Training, and Contracting Opportunities for Low - Income Persons, Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968. A. The work to be performed under this contract is subject to the requirements of section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701 u (section 3). The purpose of section 3 is to ensure that employment and other economic opportunities generated by HUD assistance or HUD assisted projects covered by section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed to low- and very low- income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of HUD assistance for housing. B. The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD regulations in 24 CFR part 135, which implement section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this contract, the parties to this contract certify that they are under no contractual or other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the part 135 regulations. C. The contractor agrees to send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers representative of the contractors commitments under this section 3 clause, and will post copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site where both employees and applicants for training and employment positions can see the notice. The notice shall describe the section 3 preference, shall set forth minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability of apprenticeship and training positions, the qualifications for each; and the name and location of the person(s) taking applications for each of the positions; and the anticipated date the work shall begin. D. The contractor agrees to include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR part 135, and agrees to take appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in this Section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the contractor has knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR part 135. E. The contractor will certify that any vacant employment positions, including training positions, that are filled (1) after the contractor is selected but before the contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom the regulations of 24 CFR part 135 require employment opportunities to be directed, were not filled to circumvent the contractors obligations under 24 CFR part 135. F. Noncompliance with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR part 135 may result in sanctions, termination of this contract for default, and debarment or suspension from future HUD assisted contracts. G. In the event of a determination by OWNER that the Contractor is not in compliance with this clause or any rule, regulation, or report submission requirements of OWNER, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further OWNER contracts. 17. Interest of Members of Congress. GENERAL CONDITIONS No member of or delegate to the Congress of the United States of America shall be admitted to any share or part of this contract or to any benefit that may arise therefrom. 18. Interest of Members, Officers, or Employees and Former Members, Officers, or Employees. 19. Limitations on Payments Made to Influence Certain Federal Financial Transactions. No member, officer, or employee of OWNER, the Grant Recipient, no member of the governing body of Augusta, Georgia and no other public official of Augusta, Georgia who exercises any functions or responsibilities with respect to the project, shall, during his or her tenure, or for one year thereafter, have any interest, direct or indirect, in this contract or the proceeds thereof. H. The Contractor agrees to comply with Section 1352 of title 31, United States Code which prohibits the use of Federal appropriated funds to pay any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, and officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with any of the following covered Federal actions: the awarding of any Federal contract; the making of any Federal grant; the making of any Federal loan; the entering into of any cooperative agreement; or the modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. The Contractor further agrees to comply with the requirement of the Act to furnish a disclosure (OMB Standard Form LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities) if any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including profit or fee received under a covered Federal transaction) have been paid, or will be paid, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with a Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. J. Indian tribes (except those chartered by States) and Indian organizations as defined in section 4 of the Indian Self- Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450B) are exempt from the requirements of this clause. 20. Royalties and Patents. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. It shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save OWNER and the Grant Recipient harmless from loss on account thereof; except that OWNER, the Architect, and the Grant Recipient shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified and the Contractor has no reason to believe that the specified design, process, or product is an infringement. If, however, the Contractor has reason to believe that any design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall promptly notify OWNER. Failure to give such notice shall make the Contractor responsible for resultant loss. 21. Examination and Retention of Contractor's Records. K. OWNER, HUD, or the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives shall, until 3 years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractor's directly pertinent books, documents, papers, or other records involving D -29 GENERAL CONDITIONS 22. Labor Standards - Davis -Bacon and Related Acts. 23. Minimum Wages. transactions related to this contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions. L. The Contractor agrees to include in first -tier subcontracts under this contract a clause substantially the same as paragraph (a) above. "Subcontract," as used in this clause, excludes purchase orders not exceeding $10,000. M. The periods of access and examination in paragraphs A and B above for records relating to (1) appeals under the "Disputes" clause of this contract, (2) litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, or (3) costs and expenses of this contract to which OWNER, HUD, or Comptroller General or any of their duly authorized representatives has taken exception shall continue until disposition of such appeals, litigation, claims, or exceptions. If the total amount of this contract exceeds $2,000, the Federal labor standards set forth in the clause below shall apply to the construction work to be performed under the contract, except if the construction work has been determined to be "Non- routine Maintenance" subject to the terms of that clause of this contract. N. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or, under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project) will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover the regular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid not less than the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein; provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH -1321) shall be posted at all times by the Contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. O. Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when all the following criteria have been met: D -30 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; 2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and 3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. P. If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employee Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30 -day period that additional time is necessary. Q. In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30 -day period that additional time is necessary. R. The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (b)(2)(ii) or (iii) of this clause shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. S. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. T. If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program; provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. U. Withholding of funds. HUD or its designee shall, upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other Federally- assisted contract subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime Contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or, under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. D -31 HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the Contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of direct Davis -Bacon Act contracts. 24. Payrolls and basic records. GENERAL CONDITIONS V. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or, under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found, under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv), that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. W. The Contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to OWNER for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under subparagraph C (1) of this clause. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH -347 (Federal Stock Number 029- 005 - 00014 -1) is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. X. Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the Contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: 1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under paragraph C of this clause and that such information is correct and complete; 2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3; and 3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. Y. The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH -347 shall satisfy the requirements for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by subparagraph C of this clause. D -32 GENERAL CONDITIONS Z. The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the Contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 3729 of Title 31 of the United States Code. AA. The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under subparagraph D available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD or its designee, OWNER, or the Department of Labor and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. BB. Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at Tess than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated in this paragraph, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work perfomied until an acceptable program is approved. CC. Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at Tess than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not Tess than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed in the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour D -33 GENERAL CONDITIONS Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate in the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not Tess than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. DD. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees, and journeymen under this clause shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. EE. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are hereby incorporated by reference in this contract. FF. Contract termination; debarment. A breach of this contract clause may be grounds for termination of the contract and for debarment as a Contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. GG. Compliance with Davis -Bacon and related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis - Bacon and related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. HH. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this clause shall not be subject to the general dispute clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the Contractor (and any of its subcontractors) and OWNER, HUD, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 25. Certification of eligibility. II. By entering into this contract, the Contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the Contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). JJ. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). KK. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 26. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used in this paragraph, the terms "laborers" and "mechanics" include watchmen and guards. LL. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics, including watchmen and guards, shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which the individual is employed on such work to work in excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one -half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek. D -34 MM. Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the provisions set forth in subparagraph J (1) of this clause, the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic (including watchmen and guards) employed in violation of the provisions set forth in subparagraph J (1) of this clause, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by provisions set forth in subparagraph J (1) of this clause. NN. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other Federally - assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime Contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the provisions set forth in subparagraph J (2) of this clause. 27. Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts all the provisions contained in this clause, and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors include these provisions in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all these provisions. 28. Labor Standards - Non - routine Maintenance. Not applicable. 29. Non- Federal Prevailing Wage Rates. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00. Any prevailing wage rate (including basic hourly rate and any fringe benefits), determined under State law to be prevailing, with respect to any employee in any trade or position employed under the contract, is inapplicable to the contract and shall not be enforced against the Contractor or any subcontractor, with respect to employees engaged under the contract whenever either of the following occurs: 1) Such non - Federal prevailing wage rate exceeds: (a) the applicable wage rate determined by the Secretary of Labor pursuant to the Davis -Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.) to be prevailing in the locality with respect to such trade; (b) an applicable apprentice wage rate based thereon specified in an apprenticeship program registered with the Department of Labor or a DOL- recognized State Apprenticeship Agency; (c) an applicable trainee wage rate based thereon specified in a DOL- certified trainee program. PP. Such non - Federal prevailing wage rate, exclusive of any fringe benefits, exceeds the applicable wage rate determined by the Secretary of HUD to be prevailing in the locality with respect to such trade or position. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 1. Architect: Architectural and Engineering services for this project will be provided by: 2KM Architects, Inc. 2275 Wrightsboro Road Augusta, Georgia 30904 2. Approved Equal: Whenever a product is defined in this invitation by trade name and catalogue number of a manufacturer or contractor, the term "or approved equal ", if not inserted therewith shall be implied. Any reference to a particular manufacturer's product either by trade name or by limited description is solely for the purpose of more clearly indicating the minimum standard of quality desired, except where a "no substitute" is requested. When a "no substitute" is requested, the housing authority will consider bids for the referenced product only. The term "or approved equal" is defined as meaning any other make which, in the sole opinion of the Augusta Housing & Community Development Department (OWNER), is of such character, quality and performance equivalence as to meet the standard of quality of products specified for which it is to be used equally as well as that specified. The bidder quoting on a product other than the referenced product shall furnish complete identification on the bid form of the product he is offering by trade name, brand and /or model number. The bidder shall also furnish with his /her bid, descriptive literature and data with respect to the substitute product he proposes to furnish. Bidders offering a substitute shall also indicate any known specification deviations from the referenced product. 3. Delivery: All materials and products shall be delivered F.O.B. Destination with any delivered duty paid (DDP). The contractor agrees to bear the risk of loss, injury or destruction of products ordered which occur prior to receipt by the Grant Recipient and acceptance by OWNER. Such loss, injury or destruction shall not release contractor from any contractual obligations. All products must be delivered within the time period specified on the order. Time is of the essence and, in addition to any other remedies contained in this invitation for bid, the order is subject to termination for failure to deliver as specified. In the event of termination, OWNER shall have the right to purchase in the open market a corresponding quantity of the products and the contractor shall be responsible for any excess cost to the Grant Recipient and OWNER. 4. Inspection and Rejection: No product received by OWNER shall be deemed accepted until OWNER has had a reasonable opportunity to inspect said product. Any product, which is discovered to be defective or fails to conform to the specifications may be rejected upon initial inspection or at any later time if the defects contained in the products or the noncompliance with the specifications were not reasonably ascertainable upon the initial inspection. The decision of OWNER and Architect shall be final. It shall thereupon become the duty of the contractor to remove rejected products from the premises without expense to OWNER within fifteen (15) days notification. Rejected products left longer than fifteen (15) days will be regarded as abandoned, and OWNER shall have the right to dispose of them as its own property and shall retain that portion of the proceeds of any sale which represents OWNER costs and expenses in regard to the storage and sale of the products. Upon notice of rejection, the contractor shall immediately replace all such rejected products with others conforming to the specifications and which are not defective. If the D -36 contractor fails, neglects or refuses to do so, OWNER shall then have the right to purchase in the open market a corresponding quantity of such products, and deduct from any monies due or that may thereafter become due to the contractor, the difference between the price stated in the contract or purchase order and the actual cost thereof to OWNER. 5. OWNER Approval of Subcontracts. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Any proposed subcontracts shall be disclosed in Contractor's bid submission. Contractor shall furnish such written information as OWNER may require concerning the proposed subcontractor, together with the proposed subcontractor's Non - Collusion Affidavit in the form prescribed by OWNER within five (5) days of OWNER request for such information. Any objection shall be expressed in writing by OWNER within ten (10) days after receipt. B. OWNER may, without claim for extra cost by the contractor, disapprove any subcontractor for cause on the basis of its own determination or because of the fact that the proposed subcontractor is listed as ineligible to receive awards of contracts from the United States on a current OWNER list or list furnished by HUD. C. Nothing contained in the contract shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and OWNER. 6. Withholding for damages. OWNER may withhold, or cause to be withheld, from any monies payable for acceptable work performed by the contractor or subcontractor, damages caused by the contractor or subcontractor, or other claims against the contractor or subcontract such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor. 7. Hold Harmless. It is understood and agreed that contractor shall be deemed and considered an independent contractor in respect to the work covered by this Agreement, and shall assume all risk and responsibility for casualties of every description in connection with the work which can be attributed either directly or indirectly to the contractor. Contractor itself, its successors, assigns, heir, executors and administrators, agrees to indemnify, defend and save harmless the Grant Recipient and OWNER, all its officers and subordinates: A. from all suits and actions of every nature brought against the OWNER and Grant Recipient or any of them for or on account of any damage or loss sustained by the OWNER and Grant Recipient, and does agree to pay any and all such damages including costs of litigation and counsel fees whether defended by OWNER or contractor; and SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS D -38 B. if the contractor is required to enter premises owned, leased, occupied by or under the control of the Grant Recipient during the performance of this contract, the contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless both the Grant Recipient and OWNER, its officers and employees, from any Toss, cost, damage expense or liability by reason of property damage, or personal injury, including death, of whatsoever nature or kind arising out of as a result of such performance, whether arising out of actions of the contractor or any of its employees, subcontractor, and lower tier subcontractors. It is not the intention of this contract or anything herein provided to confer a third party beneficiary right or action upon any person whatsoever and nothing herein before or herein after set forth shall be construed so as to confer upon any person other than the Grant Recipient and OWNER a right of action either under this contractor or in any manner whatsoever. 8. Taxes, Industrial Laws and Benefits. In all matters relating to this contract, the contractor shall be acting as an independent contractor. Neither the contractor nor any of the persons furnishing materials or performing work or services which are required by this contract are employees of OWNER within the meaning of or the application of any federal, or state unemployment insurance law, or other social security, or any workmen's compensation, industrial accident law, or other industrial or labor laws. At its own expense, the contractor shall comply with such laws and assume all obligations imposed by any one or more of such laws with respect to this contract. In addition, contractor shall be liable for the payment of all federal, state and local taxes, and any special assessments. 9. No Waiver of Conditions. Failure of OWNER to insist on strict performance shall not constitute a waiver of any of the provisions of this contract or waiver of any default of the contractor. 10. Severabitity. If any provision of this contract, or any application thereof to any person or circumstance, is held invalid, such invalidity shall not affect other provisions or applications of this contract which can be given effect without the invalid provisions or application, and to this end the provisions of this contract are severable. FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) Applicability Applicable to construction contracts in excess of $2,000 or residential rehabilitation contracts involving more than eight units. The Project or Program to which the construction work covered by this contract pertains is being assisted by the United States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provisions are included in this Contract pursuant to the provisions applicable to such Federal assistance. A. 1. (i) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached thereto and made a part thereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification of the time actually work therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification an wage rates conformed under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH -1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible, place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed I the classification (if known), or their representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will D -39 1 1 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee within the 30 -day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215- 0140.) (c) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator for determination The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30 -day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1214- 0140.) (d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (1)(ii)(b) or (c) of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215- 0140.) 2. Withholding. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federal- assisted contract subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice trainee or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension or any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for an on account of the contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of direct Davis -Bacon Act contracts. D -40 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) 3. (i) Payrolls and basic records. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is fmancially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices and trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Numbers 1215 -0140 and 1215- 0017.) (ii) (a) the contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to HUD or its designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set our accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH -347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029 - 005- 00014 -1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget Under OMB Control Number 1215- 0129.) (b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(3)(i) and that such information is correct and complete' (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (c) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH -347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by subparagraph A.3.(ii)(b). D-41 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) (d) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under subparagraph A.3.(i) available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. 4. Apprentices and Trainees. (i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they perform when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Training Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to his entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as state above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ration permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. D -42 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) Every Trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under 29 CFR Part 5 shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. 5. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are incorporated by reference in this contract. 6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in subparagraphs 1 through 11 of this paragraph A and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and a copy of the applicable prevailing wage decision, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in this paragraph. 7. Contract termination; debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. 8. Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. 9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any if its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 10. (i) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to D -43 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a government contract by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Additionally, U.S. Criminal Code, Section 1 01 0, Title 18, U.S.C., "Federal Housing Administration transactions ", provided in part: "Whoever, for the purpose of ... influencing in any way the action of such Administration..... makes, utters or publishes any statement knowing the same to be false..... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both." 11. Complaints, Proceedings, or Testimony by Employees. No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary, or other labor standards provisions of this Contract are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner discriminated against by the Contractor or any subcontractor because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding or has testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or relating to the labor standards applicable under this Contract to his employer. B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The provisions of this paragraph B are applicable only where the amount of the prime contract exceeds $100,000. As used in this paragraph, the terms "laborers" and "mechanics" include watchmen and guards. (1) Overtime Requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one- half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violations of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in sub paragraph (1) of this paragraph. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract, or any other Federal contract with the same prime contract, or any other Federally - assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act which is held by the same prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor D -44 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Reprint of HUD -4010) or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (2)of this paragraph. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1) through (4) of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph. C. Health and Safety. The provisions of this paragraph C are applicable only where the amount of the prime contract exceeds $100,000. (1) No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to this health and safety as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by regulation. (2) The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 and failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, 40 USC 3701 et. seq. (3) The Contractor shall include the provisions of this paragraph in every subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each subcontractor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. D-45 WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 General Decision Number: GAl20219 01/20/2012 GA219 Superseded General Decision Number: GA20100291 State: Georgia Construction Type: Building County: Richmond County in Georgia. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2012 1 01/20/2012 CARP0283 -003 10/01/2010 CARPENTER (including formwork and scaffold builder; excluding drywall hanging) $ 20.80 MILLWRIGHT $ 23.32 * ELEC1579 -009 10/01/2011 ENGI0474 -012 07/01/2010 Rates Fringes 8.87 8.87 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN $ 22.13 10.85 Rates Fringes Operating Engineers: Backhoe /Excavator, Bulldozer, Boom (15 tons and under), Compactor, Forklift (under 15 tons), Hoist (one drum), Loader, and Scraper $ 21.47 11.60 Boom (over 15 tons), Crane (over 10 tons), Drill, Forklift (15 tons and over), and Hoist (two drum).$ 23.30 11.60 Crane (over 120 tons) $ 24.30 11.60 Crane (over 250 tons) $ 25.30 11.60 Oiler $ 19.13 11.60 IRON0709 -001 09/01/2010 WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL $ 23.10 8.15 PLUM0150 -001 10/01/2011 Rates Fringes Plumbers and Pipefitters $ 21.96 12.46 SHEE0085 -001 08/01/2011 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER, Includes Installation of HVAC Duct and Metal Roofs Buildings over 100,000 square feet $ 29.70 13.41 Buildings up to 100,000 square feet $ 25.49 11.73 FOOTNOTE: Work on swinging stages, boatswains chairs or scaffolds, booms, or scissors lifts over 50 ft. high: $1.25 per hour additional. SUGA2008 -203 08/21/2008 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER $ 11.65 0.17 CEMENT MASON /CONCRETE FINISHER $ 13.06 1.71 DRYWALL FINISHER /TAPER $ 15.22 0.00 DRYWALL HANGER $ 16.00 0.00 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.05 0.21 LABORER: Common or General $ 9.47 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer $ 13.06 3.56 OPERATOR: Grader /Blade $ 9.00 0.24 OPERATOR: Mechanic $ 17.95 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller $ 10.88 0.00 WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray, Excludes Drywall Finishing /Taping $ 13.43 0.00 ROOFER (Excluding Metal Roof) $ 10.00 0.00 TILE SETTER $ 15.00 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER $ 12.38 0.99 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non - union. Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198 -005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four - digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate /collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rate. Non -Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non -union data. Example: SULA2004 -007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. END OF GENERAL DECISION WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT Genera( Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. * ELEC1579 -002 10/01/2011 ENGI0474 -002 07/01/2011 PAIN1756 -002 04/01/2010 SUGA2008- 050 08/06/2008 WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 General Decision Number: GAl20066 01/20/2012 GA66 Superseded General Decision Number: GA20100138 State: Georgia Construction Type: Heavy County: Richmond County in Georgia. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2012 1 01/20/2012 Operating Engineers: Bulldozer and Forklift (under 15 tons) $ 21.97 Forklift (15 tons and over) $ 23.80 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN $ 22.13 10.85 Rates Fringes 11.80 11.80 Rates Fringes PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray $ 20.50 7.60 Rates Fringes CARPENTER $ 13.00 0.00 CEMENT MASON /CONCRETE FINISHER $ 11.99 0.00 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.50 2.04 LABORER: Common or General $ 7.45 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer $ 13.06 3.56 OPERATOR: Backhoe /Excavator $ 11.68 0.00 OPERATOR: Crane $ 20.00 0.00 WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 OPERATOR: Grader /Blade $ 14.16 0.27 OPERATOR: Loader $ 13.65 1.78 OPERATOR: Piledriver $ 10.63 0.48 OPERATOR: Trackhoe $ 11.00 1.10 OPERATOR: Roller $ 9.75 0.19 TRUCK DRIVER $ 10.82 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the that have been found to be prevailing for the in the area covered by the wage determination. listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" particular rate is union or non - union. Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198 -005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four - digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate /collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rate. Non -Union Identifiers classification and wage rates cited type(s) of construction The classifications are that indicate whether the Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non -union data. Example: SULA2004 -007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. WAGE DECISION TRANSCRIPT General Wage Decision: GA Date Verified on Department of Labor Web Site: May 17, 2012 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS There are a variety of information submittals, form processing and report generation efforts required to award the contract and throughout the course of administering this contract. This part is intended to provide the potential bidder with a brief but thorough list of these requirements. You may request copies of reporting and documentation forms from the OWNER's Augusta Housing & Community Development Department (AHCDD) during the bidding process by calling the AHCDD office at (706) 821 -1797. Owner's AHCDD reserves the right to revise the reporting and documentation requirements at any time. Pre - Construction Administrative Requirements 1. Bonds. A. Bonds must be obtained from guarantee or surety companies acceptable to the U.S. Government and authorized to do business in the State of Georgia. Individual sureties will not be considered. Each bond shall clearly state the rate of premium and the total amount of premium charged. The current power of attorney for the person who signs for the surety company must be attached to the bond. The effective date of the power of attorney shall not precede the date of the bond. The effective date of the bond shall be on or after the execution date of the contract. 2. Pre - construction Conference. Prior to the award of a contract under this solicitation and prior to the start of work, the successful bidder will be required to attend a pre- construction conference with representatives of the Grant Recipient, Owner's AHCDD and its Architect, and other interested parties convened by OWNER. The conference will serve to acquaint the participants with the general plan of the construction operation and all other requirements of the contract (e.g., Section 3, Equal Employment Opportunity, Labor Standards). Owner's AHCDD will provide the successful bidder with the date, time, and place of the conference. 3. Certificates of Insurance. A. In accordance with the General Conditions, shall be submitted prior to the scheduled pre - construction conference. The OWNER is to be added as an additionally named insured to the Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage. The amount required is not less than $1,000,000.00 per occurrence for General Liability and $500,000.00 for Automobile Liability. B. Additionally, before commencing work, the Contractor shall furnish OWNER's AHCDD with a certificate of insurance evidencing that Builder's Risk (fire and extended coverage) Insurance on all work in place and /or materials stored at the building site(s), including foundations and building equipment, is in force. The Builder's Risk Insurance shall be for the benefit of the Contractor, Owner and Grant Recipient as their interests may appear and each shall be named in the policy or policies as an insured. The Contractor in installing equipment supplied by the Grant Recipient shall carry insurance on such equipment from the time the Contractor takes possession thereof until the Contract work is accepted by the Owner's AHCDD. The Builder's Risk Insurance need not be carried on excavations, piers, footings, or foundations until such time as work on the super- structure is started. It need not be carried on landscape work. Policies shall furnish coverage at all times for the full cash value of all completed construction, as well as materials in place and /or stored at the site(s), whether or not partial payment has been made by Owner's AHCDD. The Contractor may D-49 CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS terminate this insurance on buildings as of the date taken over for occupancy by the Grant Recipient. The Contractor is not required to carry Builder's Risk Insurance for modernization work that does not involve structural alterations or additions and where the Grant Recipient's existing fire and extended coverage policy can be endorsed to include such work. C. All insurance shall be carried with companies that are financially responsible and admitted to do business in the State of Georgia. If any such insurance is due to expire during the construction period, the Contractor (including subcontractors) shall not permit the coverage to lapse and shall furnish evidence of coverage to OWNER's AHCDD. All certificates of insurance, as evidence of coverage, shall provide that no coverage may be canceled or non - renewed by the insurance company until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner's AHCDD. D. Certificates of the Contractor's Insurance shall be filed with Owner's AHCDD and shall be subject to their approval for adequacy of protection. These certificates shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be canceled without a minimum of thirty (30) days prior written notice to the Augusta Housing & Community Development Department. 4. Construction Progress Schedule. A. A Construction Progress Schedule shall be submitted five (5) days after the scheduled pre - construction conference to Architect and OWNER. The schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of work scheduled for completion by any given date during the period. If the Contractor fails to submit a schedule within the time prescribed, Owner's Architect may withhold approval of progress payments or take other remedies under the contract until the Contractor submits the required schedule. B. The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the chart as required by Owner, and immediately deliver three copies of the annotated schedule to OWNER and Architect. If OWNER, upon the basis of inspection conducted according to the General Condition clause entitled "Inspection and Acceptance of Construction," determines that the Contractor is not meeting the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take steps necessary to improve its progress, including those that may be required by Owner's Architect, without additional cost to the OWNER. In this circumstance, Owner's AHCDD may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and /or the amount of construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form as OWNER and Architect deem necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained. C. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of OWNER under this clause shall be grounds for a determination by OWNER that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the Contract. Upon making this determination, OWNER may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the "Default" clause of this contract. D -50 CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 5. Contractor's own forces work equivalent. The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with its own forces work equivalent to at least 12% of the total amount of work to be performed under the contract. 6. Contractor's obligation to directly superintend the work. At all times during performance of this contract and until the work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall directly superintend the work or assign and have on the work site a competent superintendent who is satisfactory to Owner and has authority to act for the Contractor. Five (5) days prior to the scheduled pre- construction conference, the Contractor shall submit the following information for approval by Owner's AHCDD: A. Superintendent's Name B. Superintendent's Work History C. Superintendent's Education onstruction Phase Reporting Requiremen The Contractor is advised of the following Reporting and Administrative requirements required during the course of construction activities: 1. Labor Provision Requirements: A. The Contractor is required to submit weekly Certified Payroll Form WH -347 for the General Contractor and each Subcontractor. B. The Contractor is required to post in a conspicuous place the Secretary of Labor's Wage Poster and Wage Determination. C. The Contractor is required to report in writing worker disputes that the Contractor cannot resolve informally. 2. Contract Progress Payments: A. Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments. A copy of the Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments previously approved by Owner and /or the OWNER's architect. D -51 CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS B. Pay Request. Required to be completed and submitted for each Pay Request. Only one copy with original signatures need be submitted. 3. Change Order. Required to be completed and submitted with the Pay Request only if there have been any approved change orders issued on the project. 4. Schedule of Materials Stored. Required to be completed and submitted with Pay Request only if the Contractor wishes to be paid for inventory purchased prior to that inventory being incorporated into the work. Supporting invoices must accompany any Stored Materials Request. The Owner's AHCDD Rehabilitation Inspector will inspect the facility where the materials are stored to verify their. existence. Each Subcontractor requesting payment for materials stored must also complete this form. 5. Summary of Materials Stored. Required to be completed and submitted with each Pay Request, which has a completed "Schedule of Materials Stored". 6. Construction Progress Schedule. The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the progress schedule. The schedule should indicate the order in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and the dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing the several salient features of the work (including acquiring labor, materials, and equipment). 7. Section 3 Summary Report, Economic Opportunities for Low- and Very Low - Income Persons, form HUD - 60002. The Contractor is required to submit report form HUD - 60002, Section 3 Summary Report, Economic Opportunities for Low- and Very Low - Income Persons, with each request for contract payments. Please note that this is the same report used by OWNER to report annual accomplishments regarding employment and other economic opportunities provided to low- and very low- income persons under Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968. 8. Shop Drawings and Test Results. A. "Shop drawings" means drawings, submitted to OWNER or its architect by the Contractor, subcontractor, or any lower tier subcontractor, showing in detail (1) the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements and (2) the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment details) of materials of equipment. It includes drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, and similar materials furnished by the Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the work required by the contract. OWNER and OWNER's D -52 CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS Architect may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop drawings delivered under this contract. B. The Contract shall submit shop drawings and test results at least 15 days before the scheduled installation or work concerning the shop drawing or test results. The Contractor shall coordinate all such drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with other contract requirements and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Shop drawings submitted to Owner's Architect without evidence of the Contractor's approval may be returned for resubmission. Owner's Architect will indicate an approval or disapproval of the shop drawings and if not approved as submitted shall indicate Architect's reasons therefor. Any work done before such approval shall be at the Contractor's risk. Approval by Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors or omissions in such drawings, nor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of this contract. C. The Contractor shall submit to Owner's Architect for approval (6) copies (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. Five (5) sets (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings, will be retained by OWNER and Architect and one set will be returned to the Contractor. As required by OWNER and Owner's Architect, the Contractor, upon completing the work under this contract, shall furnish a complete set of all shop drawings as finally approved. These drawings shall show all changes and revisions made up to the time the work is completed and accepted. D. This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all shop drawings prepared by subcontractors are submitted to OWNER and Owner's Architect. E. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of OWNER under this clause shall be grounds for a determination by OWNER that the Contractor is not in compliance with the Contract. Upon making this determination, OWNER may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the "Default" clause of this contract. 9. As -Built Drawings. A. "As -built drawings," as used in this clause, means drawings submitted by the Contractor or subcontractor at any tier to show the construction of a particular structure or work as actually completed under the contract. "As -built drawings" shall be synonymous with "Record drawings." As required by OWNER, the Contractor shall provide OWNER's Architect accurate information to be used in the preparation of permanent as -built drawings. For this purpose, the Contractor shall record on one set of contract drawings all changes from the installations originally indicated, and record final locations of underground lines by depth from finish grade and by accurate horizontal offset distances to permanent surface improvements such as buildings, curbs, or edges of walks. B. This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all as -built drawings prepared by subcontractors are submitted to OWNER's Architect and OWNER. D -53 CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS D -54 C. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of OWNER under this clause shall be grounds for a determination by OWNER that the Contractor is not in compliance with the Contract. This will result in OWNER's AHCDD withholding from the Contractor's final payment and /or retention an amount of money sufficient to gather and /or reproduce the accurate information necessary to be used in the preparation of permanent as -built drawings. 10. Approval of equipment and materials. A. The Contractor shall obtain OWNER's Architect approval of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment to be incorporated into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish to Architect the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment. When required by this contract or by Owner's Architect, the Contractor shall also obtain Owner's Architect approval of the material or articles, which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall provide full information concerning the material or articles. Machinery, equipment, material, and articles that do not have the required approval shall be installed or used at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When required by the specifications or OWNER or Architect, the Contractor shall submit appropriately marked samples (and certificates related to them) for approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges pre -paid. The Contractor shall label, or otherwise properly mark on the container, the material or product represented, its place of origin, the name of the producer, the Contractor's name, and the identification of the construction project for which the material or product is intended to be used. C. Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, describing each sample submitted for approval and certifying that the material, equipment or accessory complies with contract requirements. The certificates shall include the name and brand of the product, name of manufacturer, and the location where produced. D. Approval of a sample shall not constitute a waiver of OWNER's right to demand full compliance with contract requirements. Materials, equipment and accessories may be rejected for cause even though samples have been approved. 11. Use and Possession Prior to Completion. The Grant Recipient shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially completed part of the work. The request for Use and Possession Prior to Completion shall be made by the Grant Recipient in writing to OWNER. Before taking possession of or using any work, OWNER's Architect shall furnish the Contractor a list of items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on those portions of the work that the Grant Recipient intends to take possession of or use. However, failure of the Grant Recipient to list any item of work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the terms of the contract. The Grant Recipient's possession or use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract. While the Grant Recipient has such possession or use, the Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for (1) the loss of or damage to the work resulting from the Grant Recipient's possession or use, CONTRACTOR REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 6. An original completed copy of Contractor's Certificate and Release. This form must be notarized. D -55 notwithstanding the terms of the clause entitled "Permits and Codes" herein; (2) all maintenance costs on the areas occupied; and, (3) furnishing heat, light, power, and water used in the areas occupied without proper remuneration therefor. If prior possession or use by the Grant Recipient delays the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, AHCDD shall make an equitable adjustment in the contract price or the time of completion, and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. Contract Close -out Reporting Requirements After the Contractor has completed all the items noted on the Architect's inspection punch list, the Contractor may submit closing documents to Architect for transmittal to AHCDD. Closing documents shall consist of the following: 1. The Contractor shall notify Architect and OWNER's AHCDD, in writing, as to the date when in its opinion all or a designated portion of the work will be substantially completed and ready for inspection. If the state of preparedness is as represented, Architect will promptly arrange for the inspection. 2. Final Pay Request marked "FINAL" with all associated payment forms as explained above. 3. One original of the executed Final Waiver of Lien for the Contractor for each subcontractor and all material suppliers. 4. Certificate of Occupancy, if required. 5. Any special warranty or guarantees required by the Technical Specifications. At a minimum, the Contractor is required to provide a one -year workmanship warranty, in accordance with General Conditions. This warranty may be in the form of a letter on company stationery, signed by an authorized individual establishing the coverage period and the method of notification for covered repairs. Other special equipment warranties shall be from the manufacturer. 7. An original completed copy of Grant Recipient's Certificate and Release. This form must be notarized. 8. Accurate and complete information to be used in the preparation of permanent as -built drawings. For this purpose, the Contractor shall record on one set of contract drawings all changes from the installations originally indicated, and record final locations of underground lines by depth from finish grade and by accurate horizontal offset distances to permanent surface improvements such as buildings, curbs, or edges of walks. Augusta enforces DBE requirements and /or DBE goals set by Federal and /or State Agencies in accordance with State and Federal laws. The U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Georgia has entered an Order enjoining the Race -Based portion of Augusta, Georgia's DBE Program. (A copy of this Order may be obtained at htt : `` \' uQusta a.00 F.'index.as :4' ID =1 448). Thus, Augusta, Georgia does not have or operate a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE), Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) or Women owned Business Enterprise (WBE) program for projects (or portions of projects) having Augusta, Georgia as the source of funding. D -56 EMPLOYEE RIGHTS UNDER THE DAVIS -BACON ACT FOR LABORERS AND MECHANICS EMPLOYED ON FEDERAL OR FEDERALLY ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS THE UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR WAGE AND HOUR DMVMSION PREVAILING WAGES OVERTIME ENFORCEMENT APPRENTICES PROPER PAY You must be paid not less than the wage rate fisted in the Davis - Bacon Wage Decision posted with this Notice for the work you perform. You must be paid not less than one and One -half times your basic sate of pay -f . all. bour s.warked..oYBG4Q- inhworkweek. TAers.are.few.... . exception.. Contract payments can be withheld to ensure workers receive wages and overtime pay due, and liquidated damages may apply if overtime pay requirements are not met. Davis -Bacon contract clauses allow contract termination and Oebarnient of contractors tram future federal contracts for up to three years. A contractor who fafasies certified payroll records or induces wage kickbacks may be subject to civil or criminal prosecution, fines and/or Imprisonment. Apprentice tutee apply only to apprentices properly registered under approved Federal or State apprenticeefip programs. if you do not receive proper pa% or require further Information on the applicable wages, contact me Contracting Officer listed below: Belinda Brown City of Augusta Housing & Community Development Department 925 Laney Walker Bled, 2 door Augusta, Georgia• 30901 006) 821 -1797 or contact the U.S. Department of tabor's Wage and Hour Division. D -57 • x . ; Via _,,. �s:� la�w•sr rases i•_ _. ms's': . �3 •� ,~' v s<" Y3 �.Cs.C�/�. s ,� + ' I S� •- .^� a' -- r`..`T+•.ir4i: ..•r`' 'r �`'7 J`L�.: n t� v r`" " . . .•N,ir,:�.n':J:r-;'-�. :an t; . f?: • }:rc: ?t:� a H ... ,.!.: .. - F - !v • 1.. a .•.'�._cr rx: �...1�' "a•`i .r...._ ;r. :,c'+ 1 E h, . *� ua's"ii -t ^&- - ::gig: &'>;.: :.S^'" :x� < 3ayr Kst a. r ti !Ile g Aii xt �.y.. " fi r: 0 t• •4� ..ice. '. •. ...i �.. � ,. va .•._ :..'. a� a:. a.YC. rl.laS L`•.`Gi:.:i:.:l- � .I:'6.•1.�.. il•ill U.. D,panin.nt d Labw + entakponsat Standards Adnanfshadon 1 Wary and Moue Madan 1414 DIITIPnandoaana The BIDDER certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under BIDDER's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The BIDDER certifies further that the BIDDER will not maintain or provide for BIDDER's employee any segregated facilities at any of BIDDER's establishments, and that the BIDDER will not permit BIDDER's employees to perform their services at any location under BIDDER's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The BIDDER agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking Tots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. The BIDDER agrees that, except where the BIDDER has obtained identical certification from proposed Subcontractors for a specific time period, BIDDER will obtain identical certifications from proposed sub - contractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause, and that Bidder will retain such certification in BIDDER's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date . 2012 CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY PRIME CONTRACTOR (Name of BIDDER) Official Address By (Contractor's Name) (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration As its (Title) The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR certifies further that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not maintain or provide for SUBCONTRACTOR's employee any segregated facilities at any of SUBCONTRACTOR's establishments, and that the SUBCONTRACTOR will not permit SUBCONTRACTOR's employees to perform their services at any location under SUBCONTRACTOR's control where segregated facilities are maintained. The SUBCONTRACTOR agrees that a breach of this certification will be a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in any contract resulting from acceptance of this BID. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or nation origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. This certification is applicable to all contracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. SUBCONTRACTOR will retain such certification in SUBCONTRACTOR's files. Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. §1001. Date , 2012 CERTIFICATION OF NON - SEGREGATED FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTOR (Name of SUBCONTRACTOR) Official Address 0 By (Subcontractor's Name) (City, State, Zip) *Must be included without alteration As its D -59 (Title) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION E PRECONSTRUCTION • Preconstruction Agenda 1 ITEM SUMMARY ACTION 1. Introduction of all parties. AHCDD reviewed the following: a. Contract: Pending Owner final approvals b. Contractor: S.D. Clifton Construction, Inc. c. Notice to Proceed: August 27, 2012 d. Completion Date: February 27, 2013 e. Contract time: 180 days robmauldin.2kmarchitects @comcast.net 2. Rob Mauldin reviewed the Pre - Construction Conference Agenda (attached). clehi.2kmarchitects@comcast.net 3. Key elements: a. Augusta Housing & Community Development: 1) Vinson Baker (Prime contact) 2) Belinda Brown 3) Vickie Johnson b. Augusta Recreation, Parks and Facilities Contacts: 1) Ron Houck (Prime contact) 2) Maurice McDowell c. 2KM Architects Contacts: 1) Rob Mauldin (Prime contact) 2) Jamie Patterson 3) Chris Lehi d. Basic requirements to the contract: S.D. Clifton Construction, Inc. Contacts: Project Manager: Lamar McCoy Phone No.: 706 - 731 -0978 Cell No.: 706 - 394 -1204 Fax No.: 706 - 733 -4030 Superintendent: Artie Swift Cell No.: 706 - 306 -7805 e. Contractor to develop detailed project Progress Schedule. f. Contractor to develop a detailed Schedule of Values with cost breakdowns (no lump sums). g. Weekly Certified Payroll documents must be submitted to lmccovAsdclifton.com Belinda Brown (AHCDD). 2KM does not need this information. NAME FIRM E -MAIL Robert Mauldin 2KM Architects, Inc. robmauldin.2kmarchitects @comcast.net Chris Lehi 2KM Architects, Inc. clehi.2kmarchitects@comcast.net Lamar McCoy S.D. Clifton Construction, Inc. lmccovAsdclifton.com Chester Wheeler Augusta Housing and Community Development cwheelerna,augustaga.gov Vinson Baker Augusta Housing and Community Development vbaker(augustaga.gov Maurice McDowell Augusta Recreation, Parks and Facilities mmcdowellAaugustaga.gov Ron Houck Augusta Recreation, Parks and Facilities rhoucka,augustaga.gov Belinda Brown Augusta Housing and Community Development bbrown(iaugustaga.gov Vickie Johnson Augusta Housing and Community Development vjohnson(a,augustaga.gov Karan Carter Augusta Housing and Community Development karanecarter(a,augustaga.gov Nora Lamb Augusta Recreation, Parks and Facilities nlamb(a,augustaga.gov Bill Shanahan Augusta / Richmond County bshanahanAaugustaga.gov 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 KM ARCHITECTS ••• PRE - CONSTUCTION MEETING REPORT Project Name: Dyess Park Improvements, Phase I Project No.: 09- 08.05.01 Meeting Location: 925 Laney Walker Blvd, 2 Floor Date: 08/16/12 Purpose: Pre - Construction Meeting Time: 03:00 PM ATTENDEES CSLZ: Active Projects \2009 Pmje is \09 -08 AHCDD \09 -08.05 Dyess Park Phase 1 \09 -08.05.1 PHASE 1\ADMINISTRATION\(CA) Construction Administration \(PRE) Pre-Construction 08- 16- 12.doc 1 cc: All attendees Please notify the recorder of these minutes of corrections within 2 days of receipt. PREPARED BY: e Christopher S. Lehi Project Manager / Contract Administrator APPROVED BY: Ro6ie ?1taaedct Robert L Mauldin, NCARB, AIA Principal Architect, GA -RA -05958 CSLZAAotive_Projects\2009 Projects \09 -08 AHCDD \09 -08.05 Dyess Park Phase 1 \09- 08.05.1 PHASE 1\ADMINISTRATION\(CA) Construction Administration\(PRE) Pre- Construction\MM 08- 16- 12.doc 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 h. i. j. k. 1. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. Contractor shall review, stamp, sign and date all shop drawings before submitting to 2KM for approval. Contractor to provide a transmittal with Project Name, number, date and detailed description of item(s). Due to the fast track nature of the project, R. Mauldin requested the submittals be scanned and E- mailed to 2KM for expediting. Hard copies are to follow for proper approvals and signatures. All workers are required to have valid photo ID at all times while on site. Contractor shall control construction site access and safety at all times. 1) Provide and maintain safety barriers. 2) Secure work areas and materials. (Conex trailer) R. Houck noted there is a church meeting in the community center on Sundays from 9:30 am to 1:00 pm. He also noted the James Brown Turkey Give -a -way is scheduled to take place in November. Contractor shall ensure that site is clean and safe at all times. R. Mauldin discussed the importance of the contractor reaching out to the sheriff's department to help identify who should and should not have access to the project site. R. Houck indicated he would help facilitate this request. G.C. is responsible for storage of materials must be well h. G.C. to scan and submit submittals via e-mail, prior to delivering hard copies so review can begin ASAP. k. Augusta Recreation, Parks and Facilities to coordinate any interruptions with Users due to construction. 1. Contact is to be made with the sheriff's department to have patrols in the area during construction. secured. G.C. is responsible for installing temporary utilities and safety barricades: orange safety netting, cones, safety tape, etc.). 1) Temporary port-o -let toilets for workmen. 2) Temporary power or water if required. 3) Schedule and sequence work to limit impact to site. Contractor to give building Owner advance notice of work. Also any shut - downs. (Water). Architect & AHCDD to conduct weekly site inspections (these do not replace Inspection Department visits). 1) Weekly O.A.C. meetings — First meeting, August 30, 2012 @ 8:00 at the jobsite. AHCD staff, (V. Baker) will review weekly: Construction Start Date proposed for August 27, 2012. 2KM will send several items to the contractor to price in the form of a proposal request. This list will include but is not limited to, paving, interiors, and raising the floor. Areas will be identified and Proposal Request will be issued to identify schedule and total cost. L. McCoy indicated the pre - construction meeting with Planning and Zoning has not yet taken place. All parties will work to get this meeting set -up as soon as possible. R. Houck to help facilitate. 4. a. b. Meeting was adjourned -AHCDD reviewed documents to be filled out and filed by G.C. S.D. Clifton turned over to 2KM the first set of project submittals for review. cc: All attendees Please notify the recorder of these minutes of corrections within 2 days of receipt. PREPARED BY: e Christopher S. Lehi Project Manager / Contract Administrator APPROVED BY: Ro6ie ?1taaedct Robert L Mauldin, NCARB, AIA Principal Architect, GA -RA -05958 CSLZAAotive_Projects\2009 Projects \09 -08 AHCDD \09 -08.05 Dyess Park Phase 1 \09- 08.05.1 PHASE 1\ADMINISTRATION\(CA) Construction Administration\(PRE) Pre- Construction\MM 08- 16- 12.doc 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . > > A(� , .,... �G t* r V � � f ' ._. , ..: r � N `U 4. . @ g t . 5 } �` < >„! PH.*- t a5 FX: ?o10"?XG -- 7 t 0 0 EMAIL: *76 ViAsztoW, v.2kM4.4fic /t om 7 , ■I 2 ��{{ Gwt.' , , _ 7'11 , 4- 6-4 4 ciAge6 L1 2tc h, Aacammar 1tp0C. 2215 '' PH: X76-1 349-5 FX: EMAIL:C-E4 ‘Mrat itio..ise cr+rwst t McCor S.O. arivK & ii / C. Mr GOit1546C a Affliiegiae , 914 • 3 ' co PH: z20- 3M -czvr FX: EMAIL: A C --4).01 4/�.e A �a !✓ 4 �. FX: EMAIL: eat. 1 . elogieshje. sob 11 ! / ,''/ FX: EMAIL: 'y � "1' i , i NAiil'Q- /4G / " ` 2e, Zr? # P N41.4 46 PH: - 20re - , • ''''''' EMAIL: i � � "'r/ " A o) 1 PH: - - J QL FX: 706 ?,L - IO ?? EMAIL: r/tai 3 "T,17!/1aik-lifec31D/1( A-71 e h 5- te a' -tro a/ C ,f _ / 3 081) ( PH: 964o- rAi --/791 I FX: 700 — gat —1/ 7 EMAIL: `� • C . - 11�1N A 4-630 4 1, 25 n1. y 2 A 4p k �dra hI 36901 a'` PH. ri©6-92I-'I rli 7 FX: 1 TA_ EMAIL: l PH: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 KM ARCHITECTS 06 Date: August 16, 2012 Location: 530 Greene Street, Room 605, Augusta, GA Time: 3:00 p.m. Site: Followed by On -Site Visit 902 James Brown Blvd., Augusta, GA PRE- CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE I AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT CDBG #09030; 2KM #09 -08.5 ATTENDEES 4 VFC: \UserslChris'AppData\ Local\ Microsoft \Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Conteot.Outloo \W1KXPO40\201248.16PreCon.doc olA �. �I�� : FX: EMAI ' / S taill..,Alk . 1 Sill 5ha �... I . ± ' 4, A( r � �. - . 10;.ir G 60t9 5 FX: 1(34 - 7c!(cr go 9 9 EMAIL: LAtn • fh i ' ,.t 4 A I / G cam'., 3 i , i . v PH: 70 L / 7 FX: 1� C. EMAIL: 6401t0 ggraus • PH: FX: EMAIL: PH: FX: EMAIL: PH: FX: EMAIL: PH: FX: EMAIL: • • . PH: FX: EMAIL: PH: FX: EMAIL: PH: FX: EMAIL: • I PRE- CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AGENDA DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE I K M AUGUSTA HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT `R` "I'`T` CDBG #09030; 2KM #09 -08.5 Date: August 16, 2012 Location: Time: 10:00 a.m. Site: 530 Greene Street, Room 605, Augusta, GA Followed by On -Site Visit 902 James Brown Blvd., Augusta, GA 4 VF C:\ Users\ Chris\ AppDatia.ocahMicrosoil \Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content .Outlook \W7 KXPO40\2012 -08 -I6 Pre Con.doc 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 '� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION F TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION F TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.01 Fitting and Coordination of the Work The contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of all work and for the coordination of the operations of all trades, subcontractors or material men engaged upon this contract. He shall provide to each of his subcontractors the locations and measurements that they may require for the fitting of their work to all surrounding work. The Contractor shall lay out the work from base lines and benchmarks indicated on the drawings and be responsible for all lines, levels, and measurements of all work executed under the contract. The Contractor shall verify the figures before laying out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from its failure to do so. ALL CHANGE ORDERS MUST BE IN WRITING AND APPROVED BY THE HOUSING & COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT BEFORE PROCEEDING. ALL WORK MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH RICHMOND COUNTY BUILDING CODES. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONSULTANT STAMP SHEET DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS - PHASE 1 FOR RECREATION & PARKS DEPARTMENT' AUGUSTA, GEORGIA CDBG# 09030 CONSULTANTS 2KM ARCHITECTS, INC. 2275 Wrightsboro Road Augusta, GA 30904 (706) 736 -3333 FACILITIES ENGINEERING, LLC 410 Whaley Pond Road Graniteville, SC 29829 (803) 663-3370 2KM # 09 -083 Section Title Cover Consultants Stamp Sheet Contents DIVISION 1 01080 01090 01100 01300 01700 01710 01732 01770 DIVISION 2 02064 02065 02210 02230 02300 02361 02441 02741 02751 02764 02826 02827 02830 02870 02920 DIVISION 3 03300 DIVISION 4 04200 04720 04810 DIVISION 5 05500 DIVISION 6 06100 06176 06200 GENERAL REOUIREMENTS Applicable Codes Abbreviations & Symbols Alternates Submittals Execution Requirements Cleaning Selective Demolition Close -out Procedures SITE WORK Lead Based Paint Removal & Disposal of Lead -Based Paint Attachment Topsoil &Finish Grading Site Clearing Earthwork Termite Control Irrigation Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Cement Concrete Pavement Pavement Joint Sealants Ornamental Railings & Fencing (Steel) Enclosed Track Gate System Landscape Planting Site Furnishings Lawns and Grasses CONCRETE Cast -in -Place Concrete MASONRY Unit Masonry (Porch) Cast Stone Unit Masonry (CMU) METALS Metal Fabrications DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS — PHASE 1 FOR Recreation & Parks Department Augusta, Georgia CDBG# 09030 TABLE OF CONTENTS WOOD & PLASTICS Rough Carpentry Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Finish Carpentry 210/1 # 09 -08.5 Pages 1 -4 1 1 -3 1 1 -3 1 -7 1 1 1 -4 1 -8 1 -3 1 -5 1 -7 1 -10 1 -3 1 -3 1 -3 1 -5 1 -3 1 -6 1 -10 1 -2 1 -4 1 -6 1 -4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 Section DIVISION 7 07210 07311 07411 07530 07620 07901 DIVISION 8 08110 08710 DIVISION 9 09255 09300 09900 DIVISION 10 10425 10522 10800 DIVISION 11 DIVISION 12 DIVISION 13 13125 DIVISION 14 DIVISION 22 22 00 00 22 05 00 22 05 23 22 05 29 22 05 53 22 07 19 22 08 00 22 11 16 22 13 16 22 46 13 22 46 16 22 47 13 DIVISION 23 23 00 00 23 31 13 Title DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS — PHASE 1 FOR Recreation & Parks Department Augusta, Georgia CDBG# 09030 TABLE OF CONTENTS THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Building Insulation Composite Shingle Roofing Manufactured Roof Panels Single -Ply Membrane roofing Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Joint Sealants and Gasketing DOORS & WINDOWS Steel Doors and Frames Door Hardware FINISHES Gypsum Board Assemblies Ceramic Tile Painting SPECIALTIES Signs Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, Accessories Toilet and Bath Accessories EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Pre - Engineered Buildings CONVEYING SYSTEMS PLUMBING Plumbing Common Work Results for Plumbing General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Plumbing Piping Insulation Commissioning of Plumbing Domestic Water Piping Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Security Water Closets and Urinals Security Lavatories and Sinks Drinking Fountains HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) Metal Ducts 2KM # 09 -08.5 Pages 1 -4 1 -5 1 -5 1 -3 1 -3 1 -5 1 -5 1 -8 1 -7 1 -6 1 -6 1 -2 1 -3 1 -2 (Not Used) (Not Used) 1 -6 (Not Used) 1 -7 1 1 1 -2 1 1 -2 1 1 1 -2 1 1 1 1 -7 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 Section DIVISION 26 26 00 00 26 05 00 26 05 19 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 53 26 08 00 26 20 00 26 24 16 26 24 16.11 26 50 00 26 51 00 Title DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS — PHASE 1 FOR Recreation & Parks Department Augusta, Georgia CDBG# 09030 TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRICAL Electrical Common Work Results for Electrical Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Identification for Electrical Systems Commissioning of Electrical Systems Low - Voltage Electrical Transmission ( <600 Volts) Panelboards Panelboards 240 VAC, 48 VDC Lighting Interior Lighting 2KM # 09 -08.5 Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 Section Title LIST OF DRAWINGS: G0.1 INDEX ARCHITECTURAL A0.1 DEMOLITION PLAN A1.1 SITE LAYOUT PLAN A1.2 ENLARGED ENTRY PLAZA & SIDEWALK PLAN Al.3 SITE ENLARGEMENTS & FENCING DETAILS A1.4 GATE DETAILS & STREET PARKING DETAILS A2.1 COMMUNITY CENTER UPGRADES A2.2 COMMUNITY CENTER ROOF PLAN & DETAILS A2.3 COMMUNITY CENTER ELEVATIONS A3.1 NEW PICNIC SHELTER PLANS & SCHEDULES A3.2 NEW PICNIC SHELTER FRAMING PLAN & RCP A3.3 NEW PICNIC SHELTER ROOF PLAN & ALTERNATE #1 A3.4 NEW PICNIC SHELTER ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS A3.5 NEW PICNIC SHELTER DETAILS & ISOMETRICS A3.6 NEW PICNIC SHELTER DETAILS LANDSCAPE L1.1 LANDSCAPE PLAN L1.2 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION PLAN MECHANICAL M1.1 HVAC PLAN ELECTRICAL E1.1 ELECTRICAL NOTES, DETAILS & SCHEDULES E2.1 ELECTRICAL PLAN E3.1 ELECTRICAL &11'h PLAN PLUMBING P1.1 P2.1 P3.1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DYESS PARK IMPROVEMENTS — PHASE 1 FOR Recreation & Parks Department Augusta, Georgia CDBG# 09030 TABLE OF CONTENTS BOUNDARY & EXISTING CONDITIONS SURVEY PLUMBING NOTES, DETAILS & SCHEDULES PLUMBING PLAN PLUMBING SITE PLAN 2KM # 09 -08.5 Pages Page 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK 1.2 APPLICABLE CODES PART 2- PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01080 — APPLICABLE CODES A. The Division 1 General Requirements, Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Modifications are binding on all work required for this Project. A. The following Building Codes are currently adopted by the State of Georgia: 1. 120 -3 -3 2010 State Minimum Fire Safety Standards 2. ADA 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 3. FGI 2010 Guidelines for Design & Construction of Healthcare Facilities 4. IBC 2006 International Building Code (2007, 2009, 2010 Amendments) 5. IEBC 2006 International Existing Building Code (2009 Amendments) 6. IECC 2009 International Energy Conservation Code (2011, 2012 Amendments) 7. IFC 2006 International Fire Code (2007, 2010 Amendments) 8. IFGC 2006 International Fuel Gas Code (2007 — 2010, 2012 Amendments) 9. IMC 2006 International Mechanical Code(2007, 2008, 2010 — 2012 Amendments) 10. IPC 2006 International Plumbing Code (2007 — 2012 Amendments) 11. NFPA 13 2007 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems (w/ GA Amendments) 12. NFPA 70 2011 National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. NFPA 72 2002 National Fire Alarm Code (2007 Amendments) 14. NFPA 80 1999 Standard for Fire Doors & Other Opening Protectives (w/ GA Amendments) 15. NFPA 90A 2009 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilating Systems (w/ GA Amendments) 16. NFPA 99 2005 Standard for Health Care Facilities 17. NFPA 101 2000 Life Safety Code (2010 Amendments) 18. NFPA 241 2004 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, & Demolition Operations (per 120 -3 -3, Page 82, Paragraph 85) 19. O.C.G.A. 50 -8 -18 Energy Efficiency and Sustainable Construction Act 2008 20. ASME A17.1 2007 American National Standard Safety Code (ANSI) for elevators (w/ GA Amendments) B. Reference to other applicable codes and standards are made in other sections of this specification. (Not Used) (Not Used) END OF SECTION APPLICABLE CODES 01080 -1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS SECTION 01090 - ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS A. Reference to a technical society, institute, association, organization or governmental authority may be made in the Specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations: AAR American Association of Railroads AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AECI Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AGA American Gas Association, Inc. AGC Associated General Contractors of America AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHC Architectural Hardware Consultants AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air- Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA American Standards Association ASC American Standards Code ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASM American Society for Metals ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood - Preservers' Association 01090 -1 AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CGA Compressed Gas Association CISPI Cast Iron Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories FIA Factory Insurance Association FM Factory Mutual IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ISA Instrument Society of America JIC Joint Industrial Council MCA Manufacturing Chemists Association MIA Marble Institute of America MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC National Electric Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSC National Safety Code NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. NWMA The National Woodwork Manufacturers Association, Inc. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS 01090 -2 PMA Pump Manufacturer's Association RLM Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers RTMA Radio - Television Manufacturer's Association SAE Society of Automobile Engineers SCPI Structural Clay Products Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Tile Council of America TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturers Association UL Underwriter's Laboratories USPS United States Product Standard PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS END OF SECTION 01090 -3 DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01100 — ALTERNATES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS AND WORK A. Reference the Proposal Form for all work related to this Section for this Project. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and perform all work and services necessary for all Alternates as shown on drawings and as specified, in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and coordinated with work of all other trades. All prices shall include overhead and profit. B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary and miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to for a complete installation. C. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required by Contract Documents. D. All materials and methods of construction used on this project shall conform to the qualifications established by the Contract Documents. 1.3 QUANTITIES A. When materials, devices or equipment are referred to as if singular in number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the work. PART 2 — ALTERNATES 2.1 ALTERNATES A. State in proposal the amount to be added or deducted from the Base Bid for each of the Alternates described below. Upon execution of the Contract, implement work and modify work as established under various Alternates as accepted or rejected by the Owner. Clarifications of Alternates shall be as follows: Deduct Alternate #1: Deduct to use pre - engineered metal building for picnic shelter (alternate design). Deduct Alternate #2: Delete existing Community Center Window Sash replacement. Deduct Alternate #3: Delete existing Community Center exterior repainting. Deduct Alternate #4: Delete existing Community Center Roof replacement. Unit Price #1: Cost to Add or Delete sidewalk demolition, disposal and installation of new 4" thick x 5' wide concrete sidewalk (per 100 SF) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 01100 -1 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01300 — SUBMITTALS A. The following provisions shall apply: Contractor shall compile one completed set of approved set of Shop Drawings and submittals to turn in with the 0 & M Manuals. B. Contractor shall submit six prints of each shop drawing to the Architect for review. If corrections are required after the Architect's review, two copies of marked up drawings will be returned to the Contractor for necessary revisions. Contractor shall then resubmit six prints of corrected drawings for final review and distribution. However, if for any reasons further corrections are necessary, follow the above procedure until no corrections are required. C. For standard manufactured items the Contractor shall submit six copies of all catalogue sheets, vendors' drawings and certified drawings to the Architect for review. If corrections are required after the Architect's review, two copies of marked up drawings will be returned to the Contractor for revision. Contractor shall then resubmit six corrected copies for final review and distribution. D. Shop drawings submitted for review must bear the stamp of the Contractor stating that they have been checked. It is the Contractor's responsibility to fully check all shop drawings for arrangement and conformance with drawings and specifications, and accuracy of dimensions, including coordination of shop drawings submitted on other work under these specifications. If it appears that such checking has been inadequate, even though stamped as being checked, drawings will be returned to the Contractor for proper checking before further processing by the Architect regardless of any urgency claimed by the Contractor. E. The review of such drawings by the Architect will be general only. Such review shall not be interpreted as a checking of detailed dimensions or approval of deviations from plans and specifications, unless such a check or deviation is requested at time of submission Review of drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for accuracy of same, nor for the furnishing of all materials required by the contract, even though same may not be indicated on the reviewed shop drawings. F. The Contractor must schedule the submission of shop drawings and schedules to allow the Architect a minimum of ten working days, after receipt, for the review of each submission. The review of a shop drawing does not authorize changes from the Contract requirements as to materials, workmanship, extent of the work or price unless authorized in a separate Change Order. G. Submit shop drawings, vendor drawings and certified drawings, to the Architect with a transmittal letter or form addressed to 2KM Architects, Inc., 2275 Wrightsboro Road, Augusta, Georgia, 30904. Transmittals shall include the sender's name, the project number, name of the Owner, a list of shop drawing numbers and titles and quantity of each print submitted. In addition, Contractor shall mark each drawing with the project number and name of the Owner. 1.2 SAMPLES A. The "General Conditions covers samples The following provisions shall also apply: 1. Name of Project 2. Location of Project 3. Name of Contractor 4. Material or Equipment Represented 5. Manufacturer's data sheets and drawings, if available B. Approval or acceptance of samples will not preclude the rejection of the completed work. After a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted, unless satisfactory SUBMITTALS 01300 -1 13 CERTIFICATES evidence is presented to and approved by the Architect that the manufacturer cannot make delivery of the approved material on schedule. The right is reserved to require submission of samples of any material or any material lists whether or not particularly mentioned herein. A. Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance from all authorities having jurisdiction over the work and deliver these certificates to the Architect. The work will not be deemed complete nor will final payment be made until such certificates have been delivered. 1.4 RELEASE OF WAIVER OF LIENS A. Furnish releases and waivers as required by the Contract Documents with final payment application. 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Owner will furnish the Contractor one complete set of Drawings to be maintained at the site, and on which, as the work progresses, the Contractor shall record all changes and actual dimensions of the installed work where deviations are made from the original drawings or specifications relative to work included in this contract: B. On completion of the job, the Contractor shall deliver one print of such corrected drawings to the Architect. The Contractor shall make such additional corrections as the Architect may require and shall then deliver the corrected prints to the Owner. C. These Record Drawings are a specific requirement and the Contract will not be considered complete until they have been submitted in an acceptable form. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. The Contractor shall deliver to the Architect, upon demand and upon completion of all work under this Contract, a written guarantee made out to the Owner, satisfactorily warranting the requirements specified under this section. The Contractor's overall guarantee shall cover a period of one year or longer periods as specified. This guarantee shall be binding upon the Contractor, his successors and assigns. 1.7 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT A. Prior to receipt of Final Payment, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect the following documents in the quantity indicated: (All copies shall have original signatures and seals.) 1. All Affidavits, Warranties, Certifications, and other documents indicated in the General Conditions, not less than four (4) copies. 2. Operating and Service Manuals on all equipment including Mechanical and Electrical work, including all on -site training, three (3) copies, bound, labeled, and indexed in 3 -ring binders, see General Conditions, and Specification Sections. 3. Product Data (tests, labs, etc) for all rated materials (Class A,B,C) installed in the building (paints, fabrics, paper, etc). Also all contractors will be on site with date for each F.M. inspection (scheduled). 4. Waste Manifests for proper disposal of hazardous waste. 5. Manufacturers certificates as required in Article E -6. 6. Contact list of all subcontractors including names, addresses and phone numbers. 7. Comprehensive color section schedules as installed. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300 -2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Project Phasing & Sequence of work. 3. General installation of products. 4. Occupancy and continued use. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Protection of the installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of site work, mechanical, and electrical systems and other construction site improvements affecting the Work. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning, investigate and verify the existence, location, and sizes of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations: 1. Examine for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations. 2. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing new work. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a "Request for Information" to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Use standard form & numbering and dated. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -1 B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Final Acceptance. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instruction of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -2 G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering required to ensure protection of walls and roof from damage or deterioration until Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance. H Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. 1. Contractor shall test all roof drains for proper flow and submit a report to the Owner. In the event that a roof drain is clogged or drains slowly, or if a roof drain line leaks, the Contractor shall make the necessary repairs to correct the condition. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that roof drain lines are clear and free flowing at the date of Final Completion and Acceptance. Any clogged or slow draining roof drain shall be corrected by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. I. Limiting Exposure: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to unauthorized access by non - construction personnel during the construction period. 3.5 SEQUENCE OF WORK: A. Phase I: 1. Install temporary safety barricades and site fencing with access gates. 2. Install temporary utilities and toilet facilities and complete work as specified in construction documents. 3. Schedule off -hour and weekend work areas: a. Utility connections. b. Service tie -ins inside existing occupied areas. 4. Work on Exterior shall be scheduled to minimize construction time. 5. Expedite material ordering and installation to allow timely billing to Owner within 90 days per the following schedule. a. Demo concrete sidewalks. b. Remove trees & grind stumps. c. Install new concrete sidewalks. d. Construct new 6" plaza planter. e. Restripe existing parking lot. f. Purchase fencing materials. g. Purchase 24'w slide gate materials and operator. h. Purchase 3.5'w swing gate materials. i. Construct new brick columns with caps. j. Construct new plaster -faced art wall with cap. k. Order benches. 1. Concrete foundations & slab. m. Clean, Scrape & Repaint Community Center Brick n. Split -Faced Masonry Walls o. Demo existing, Install new Single Ply & roof drains. p. Prime & Paint Exterior Masonry q. Order New Thermal Wood Clad Sash & Hardware. r. Install U.G. Utilities for Toilet Rms. s. Install U.G. Utilities for Toilet Rms. & Gates B. Phase II: 1. Maintain secure and water tight building. 2. Install foundations and U.G. utilities. 3. Construct new shelter building. 4. Install new roof, overflow scuppers, flashing and metal copings. 5. Complete all trades. 6. Clean all areas for review & acceptance. 7. Commission primary trades. a. HVAC and controls. b. Electrical systems. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -3 c. Sanitize new water lines and provide test report. 8. Train Owners' staff on 0 & M procedures. 9. Complete installation of new landscape, irrigation, fence, and columns. Replace grass damaged by staging/access with sod of like species. Provide temporary watering to establish new work. 3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Manufacture's Field Service: Manufacturer's representative is required to inspect roofs and installation and certify it complies with manufacturer's requirements. 3.7 PROTECTIVE OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration through time of Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance. 3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective work, refinishing damaged surfaces, and touching up with matching materials. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. 3.9 SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall submit detailed schedule and sequence of work. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -4 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 CLEANING OF METAL WORK 1.3 CLEANING OF GLASS & GLAZING 1.4 INTERIOR CLEANING 1.5 FINAL CLEAN -UP PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) CLEANING DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01710 — CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the building and surrounding grounds are to be put in clean and orderly condition. In all instances, the subcontractors are directly responsible for the neatness and orderliness of their work. However, it will be the General Contractor's final responsibility to ascertain the entire project is in a thoroughly clean and acceptable condition. A. All exposed metal work shall be thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance of the project. During construction, all exposed metal, finish hardware and all other exposed finish metals shall be protected with polyethylene film, Vaseline or other appropriate protective covering. Immediately prior to final acceptance, such metals shall be thoroughly cleaned. No damaged, scratched, stained, injured or discolored materials will be accepted and must be replaced. A. All glasswork shall be cleaned thoroughly prior to final acceptance. Glass shall be cleaned inside and outside in accordance with glazing manufacturer's recommendations. Broken or scratched glazing shall be cause for rejection and requires replacement of the work. Clean away all excess construction materials and sealant. Clean and polish all mirrors. A. The Interior in building, lay -down and work areas, are to be left in a clean condition. Trash, debris, or unused materials are to be removed from the site. Included is the final cleaning of all existing work soiled or damaged by construction activities. A. Prior to Architect's Final Inspection, execute final clean-up as follows: 1. Remove all debris from building site. 2. Remove all stains, spots, marks, and dirt from new finish surfaces of the work. END OF SECTION 01710 -1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building interior. 2. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing branch utilities for extension to new locations. 3. Disconnecting and removal of select portions of ductwork & HVAC equipment, controls and piping systems. 4. Salvage of doors, hardware and fixtures. 1.2 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 1- SITEWORK SECTION 01732 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during demolition. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option in a lawful manner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust - control measures. C. Proposed noise - control measures. D. Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Dates for turn-over of salvaged items to Owner. E. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minor building areas scheduled for selective demolition will be temporarily vacated use discontinued before start of Work. Adjacent areas will remain occupied and egress and use must be maintained. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1 B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of building areas to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of pre -bid inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Arrange demolition schedule to not interfere with Owner's adjacent facility operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities to be removed have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of demolition. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing systems, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities. a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas and systems to be selectively demolished. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations. B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people or damage to adjacent building facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area. 1. Erect temporary protection, such as dust barriers where required by authorities having jurisdiction (non - combustible, zip -wall). 2. Protect existing site improvements to remain. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2 3. Install access protection at areas of overhead work to protect egress and walkways. D. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of work to remain. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1. Do not create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution, when using water. 2. Vacuum work areas. 3. Contain dust within work areas. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will safely convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of demolition. 3.5 DEMOLITION A. Select Interior Demolition: Demolish interior work as indicated on drawings and completely remove from the site. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On -site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 2. Remove fixtures without damaging. B. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations. Work shall match existing. 3.6 SALVAGE A. Salvage doors, hardware, light fixtures diffusers, ceiling tile (2' x 2'), and fire alarm devices. Reuse as indicated. B. Turn-over excess materials to owner (transmit to maintenance staff on- site). 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection Procedures. 2. Record Drawings. 3. Closeout Documentation. 4. Operations and Maintenance (0 & M) Manuals. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01770 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete the following: 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected "Preliminary Punch List", indicate the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. The Architect will evaluate and add items as necessary at time of inspection.. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record "Red Lined Prints ", operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to a location designated by the Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final change over of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of change over security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test records and certify water systems sterilization tests. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of change over in power and other utilities. 12. Submit change over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touch -up painting. 14. Touch -up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. 1. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Substantial Completion. 2. Contractor shall identify the schedule to complete all work for certified "Final Completion ". 13 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting Final Inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a Final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures ". 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (Preliminary Punch List), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Provide documentation of training. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -1 B. Inspection: Submit a written request for Final Inspection for acceptance. Indicate areas needing correction from Preliminary Punch List. Final inspection will require 48 hours prior notice. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (FINAL PUNCH LIST) A. Contractor shall submit written estimated schedule for completion to the Owner and Architect. The Architect will coordinate a final review of the remaining items on the Final Punch List. B. Subsequent inspections shall be at the Contractor's expense. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of prints of the Contract Drawings with incorporated Addenda and approved Change Orders. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Locations of concealed utilities. g. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. h. Changes made following Architect's written orders. i. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. j. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. k. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings completely and accurately. 4. Mark record set with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 2.2 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION A. Organization of Closeout Documents. Each item shall be indexed with tabs as indicated below in a 3- ring binder (at least 3) completed copies (one original) shall be supplied to the Owner. Documents shall be organized and shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. General [Tab 1 ] 1.0 Index 1.1 Affidavits a. Non - Influence b. Statutory 1.2 Lien Waivers (Contractor and Subcontractors) 1.3 Consent of Surety for Final Payment 1.4 Contractor's Warranty 1.5 Certificate of Completion 1.6 List of major subcontractors with contact name, address and phone numbers. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -2 B. The balance of the warranties, operations and maintenance material shall be divided into manageable sections and binders. See Section 01300 Submittals. 2.3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit three copies of each manual. Label and index each manual. Include project title and date of submittal. 1. Use heavy duty 3 -ring binders to accommodate data. Provide protective sleeves for loose and odd sized manufacturer's information. 2. Divide manuals into major categories, Division 1 -16 per specification section: a. Tab 1 - General — Division 1. b. Tab 2 Civil/Structural c. Tab 3 -12 Architectural d. Tab 15 Mechanical e. Tab 16 Electrical B. C. Include copies of transmittals for required materials. D. Include maintenance procedures for installed products. 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and method of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Provide schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 COMMISSIONING 2. Refer to Division 1, Section 01300 for additional submittals and warranties. 3. Refer to each specification section for Close -Out and 0 & M information. 4. Final payment will not be processed or reviewed by Architect until all Closeout Documents and Operations and Maintenance manuals are completed. Include all required warranties and manufacturers data as required per each section of the specification. 1. Contractor shall review specification, log and track the necessary warranties. 2. Architect will review submittal log with Owner for completeness. 3. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. A. Contractor shall coordinate all trades for third party systems commissioning: 1. Fire Alarm system. 2. Nurse Call system. 3. Fire Sprinkler system. 4. HVAC Controls. 5. Emergency Power. 6. Electrical panelboard grounding and panelboard connections. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -3 PART 1 -. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK SECTION 02064 - LEAD BASED PAINT A. The work covered by this plan includes the surface preparation of components to be repainted as well as the containment of debris from these activities. B. This work will consist of the removal of small quantities of paint that has been previously shown to contain measurable amounts of lead. This is not a lead abatement project. Nor is this project subject to HUD guidelines. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. HEPA Filter Equipment — A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtered vacuuming equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining 99.9% of airborne particles with an aerodynamic diameter of .3 microns or larger. B. Personal Monitoring — Sampling of lead concentrations within the breathing zone of a lead worker. C. Time Weighted Average (TWA) — The TWA is an 8 -hour time weighted average airborne concentration of lead. D. Permissible Exposure Limit — 50 ug/m of air reported as an 8 -hour time weighted average. E. Action Level — 30 ug/m of air reported as an 8 -hour time weighted average. F. Title to Materials — All materials resulting from demolition and/or removal work, shall be disposed of as specified herein, and title to materials shall remain with owner. G. Training — Within twelve (12) months prior to assignment to this lead work project, the Contractor shall instruct each employee with regard to the hazards of lead, safety and health precautions, and the use and requirements of protective clothing and equipment including respirators. H. Safety Compliance — In addition to the detailed requirements of these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations regarding handling, storing, transporting and disposing of lead waste materials. The Contractor will comply with the applicable requirements of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Decontamination Safety — The Contractor shall provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory protection equipment approved by the Department of the Interior or the National Institute for Occupational Safety & Health, Education and Welfare under the provisions of 30 CFR Part N and shall be used in accordance with OSHA Standards. Cartridge filters shall be approved for respiratory protection against dusts, fumes and mists having a permissible exposure limit of less than 0.05 milligrams per cubic meter (a high efficiency filter). J. Testing Laboratory — The laboratory selected by the owner who is responsible for air quality monitoring, procedure monitoring and final clearance testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITALS A. Submittals are requested and checked by Consultant to assist Contractor in confirming compliance with contract documents and shall be accepted by Consultant subject to the following conditions. The following is a list of pre -work submittals: LEAD BASED PAINT 02064 1 1. Schedule of Values (if applicable) 2. Project schedule with time line 3. Worker Training Certification 4. Proposed Landfill Site 3.2 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL AREA A. For the removal and/or disturbance of lead containing paint, a safe zone will be established by placing barricade tape around the building near the area of work. Only trained personnel will be allowed inside of the barricade tape. A decontamination area consisting of a minimum of a hand wash sink and HEPA equipped vacuum area will be available on site and used with double suit procedures. 3.3 INTERFACE OF CONSTRUCTION TRADE A. During disturbance of lead based paint from the aforementioned building, only lead project contractor authorized personnel, third party air monitoring personnel and the owner's authorized representatives will be allowed to enter the lead control area. 3.4. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. The lead work includes the disturbance by scraping of lead containing paint and disposal of the chips from these activities. 3.4 EQUIPMENT A. The owner's representative will be famished with two sets of personal protective equipment for each entry into and inspection of the lead control area as requested. 3.5 WORK PROCEDURES LEAD BASED PAINT 1. Respirators - All individuals entering the lead control area where levels are found to be above the action level shall be required to wear respiratory equipment. The workers shall wear, at a minimum half -face negative pressure respirators while performing this work. All respirators must be fitted with a HEPA filter designated by NIOSH. 2. Protective Clothing — Personnel exposed to airborne concentrations of lead in excess of the action shall wear fire retardant disposable protective whole -body clothing, head covering, gloves and foot covering consisting of material impermeable to lead dust. 3. Worker Decontamination — A worker decontamination unit consisting of a clean area where the workers will change out of street clothes and put on clean lead work clothes, a decontamination shower and an equipment room for storage of contaminated equipment and removal of dirty clothing prior to entering the shower will be constructed adjacent to the lead control area. 4. Warning Signs — Warning signs sufficient in size to be clearly legible will be provided at all possible entrances to the lead control area to prevent accidental entrance to this area by unprotected persons. These signs shall comply with all OSHA requirements. 5. Tools — HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment will be placed inside the work area during lead paint disturbance to aid in the clean -up of any debris. A Lead related work will be performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and as specified herein. Wet removal and/or non - powered scraping will be used. Personnel will wear and use protective equipment and clothing as specified herein. Eating, smoking or drinking will NOT be permitted in the lead control area. Personnel of other trades not engaged in the preparation of the components for repainting shall not be permitted in the lead control area. 1. Cleaning During Work — The Contractor shall clean the work area using HEPA vacuum equipment or wet cleaning techniques. 2. Protection of the Ground — The Contractor shall provide a sheet of 6 -mil poly to cover the ground under the area of work. This shall be placed in a manner to prevent any flakes of paint from contacting the ground. This sheet shall be cleaned daily and/or replaced as needed. 02064 2 I 3.6 LEAD PAINT HANDLING PROCEDURES A. Wet sanding and/or hand scraping will be used to accomplish all work. Power tools or heat will not be used to prepare the surface for work B. Cleanup and Disposal — During surface preparation the lead control area will be kept free of accumulations of debris in order to restrict the spread of lead dust. After inspection to determine that no visible contamination remains, the Contractor may begin repainting of the components in accordance with project plans and specifications. C. All personnel air sampling will be conducted at the direction of the Contractor's Representative. Area air monitoring will be conducted by the Testing Laboratory employed by the owner. D. Disposal of the lead debris — All lead wastes and scraps, debris, bags, containers and contaminated clothing shall be placed in appropriate containers for storage. At the completion of the project, each waste stream shall be sampled to determine if the material shall be handled as hazardous waste. This shall be accomplished by obtaining a representative sample of each stream and testing for lead content utilizing the TCLP procedure. Any stream producing results in excess of 5 ppm lead when analyzed by this procedure shall be transported and disposed of as hazardous waste. E. Landfills Receipts — Original Waste Shipment Records and Chain of Custody Forms for regulated waste will be required and submitted to the owner. 3.7 POST - SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS A. Three (3) copies of the following documents shall be submitted to the Owner through the Consultant: 1. Proof of insurance naming the Owner, and Consultant as additional certificate holder. 2. Proof of worker training for each employee involved in the project. 3. Medical examination report for each employee of the Contractor who was involved in the project. 4. Respirator training for each employee of the Contractor who was involved in the project. 5. "Worker Release Form" for each employee of the Contractor who was involved in the project. 6. Material Safety Data Sheets for all hazardous chemicals incorporated in the work. 7. Regulated area sign in/sign out sheets and daily logs maintained by the Contractor's supervisor. 8. Certificate of Visual Inspection for each regulated area signed by the Contractor and a representative of the Owner. 9. TCLP laboratory analysis of the waste stream. 10. Original Waste Shipment Records and Chain of Custody Forms for regulated waste. B. Post - submittals shall be bound in three -ring binders with each section tabbed or separated by a colored sheet of paper and cross - referenced to an index. The cover shall be labeled with the project name and inclusive dates. Four (4) copies of the post- submittals shall be forwarded to the Consultant at the following address within 10 days of project completion: Alternative Construction & Environmental Solutions, Inc. Packages to: PO Box 3229 ACES Augusta, GA 30914 -3229 2247 Wrightsboro Road ATTN: Mr. Mark E. Hartz Augusta, GA 30904 END OF SECTION LEAD BASED PAINT 02064 3 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK SECTION 02065 — REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT A. Restoration involves scraping, cutting, and patching component surfaces containing lead -based paint to prepare the surfaces for repair, replacement, and repainting, and to drill through lead - based paint surfaces during renovation. All testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Alternative Construction & Environmental Solutions, Inc. (ACES) has been engaged by the Owner to perform these required testing services. The on -site representative of the ACES shall be responsible for compliance inspections, air monitoring, and enforcing requirements. The contractor shall be responsible for one day of area air monitoring (upwind and downwind) to verify compliance with the specifications. All lead air samples shall be below detectable limits. The contractor shall pay for this air monitoring at a rate of $450.00 per shift. This shall be paid direct to Alternative Construction & Environmental Solutions, Inc. upon receipt of invoices documenting the services expended. The contractor's final pay request will not be processed until all air monitoring invoices are paid. For purposes of determining the need for air monitoring, if detectable levels of lead are returned on the analysis, the contractor shall be required to continue monitoring until non - detectable levels are established. C. Disposal of debris contaminated with lead -based paint dust (i.e., cleaning rags, mops, etc.) shall be properly disposed of as solid waste or hazardous waste, according to the results of Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) testing. All costs are to be included in the Contractor's Bid. D. Contractor shall provide all qualified, technical support and stabilization procedures required for lead paint stabilization and disposal. 1.2 LEAD -BASED PAINT STABILIZATION PERSONNEL A. A Competent Person knowledgeable in lead -based paint shall be present at all times that lead - based paint is being disturbed. The Competent Person must be knowledgeable in the hazards associated with lead -based paint and the proper use, maintenance and fitting of all types of personal protective equipment to be used on the project. B. Lead -based paint stabilization workers shall be properly trained to perform LBP stabilization activity in accordance with Federal Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead -Based Paint Hazards. Workers shall be instructed regarding the hazards associated with lead -base paint and the proper use, maintenance and fitting of all types of personal protective equipment to be used on the project. C. The Contractor shall insure that all employees involved in removing lead -based paint shall be enrolled in a medical surveillance program as described in Chapter 9 of the of Federal Guidelines and in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1910.134 and all State of Georgia adopted requirements. 1.3 INSURANCE A. A copy of a valid Certificate of Insurance naming the Owner as an additional insured will be required from the Contractor. Insurance shall be project specific and provide for lead -based paint stabilization coverage. 1.4 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE A. It is the intent of this section for the Contractor to comply fully with all Federal, State and Local regulations and codes regarding removal and disposal of lead -based paint. Nothing in this section should be interpreted to conflict with this intent. REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 1 B. It shall be further understood that the Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless and reimburse Owner for any claims, expenses and/or legal fees arising from the Contractor's failure to comply with said regulations. C. No attempt has been made to specify all applicable Federal and/or State requirements dealing with worker safety or public safety within the confines of these specifications. This should not be construed as an abridgement of these requirements. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine which non - specified requirements apply to his work and the responsibility to initiate steps to comply with these non - specified requirements on an as needed or required basis. 1.5 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA SAFETY STANDARDS A. Contractor is responsible to ensure worker safety complies with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) safety requirements. Hard hats, eye goggles, gloves, safety belts, respirators and other safety equipment shall be wom when work tasks require this additional safety protection. PART 2 — PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1 TRISODIUM PHOSPHATE A. Provide a detergent containing at least five (5) percent trisodium phosphate (TSP). Ensure that workers carefully follow the specific manufacturer's instructions for the proper use of the product, especially the recommended dilution ratio. B. Provide waterproof gloves for workers to wear when applying TSP. Decontaminate gloves after each shift or dispose of as contaminated waste. 2.2 POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC SHEETING A. Provide polyethylene plastic sheeting in the largest sheet size possible to minimize seams, 4 -mil and 6 mil thickness, clear, frosted and/or black, as required. B. Polyethylene plastic sheeting shall be flame resistant and conform to the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, "Small -scale Fire Test for flame- Resistant Textiles and Films. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Duct tape shall be 3" wide with adhesive formulated to stick aggressively to polyethylene plastic sheeting. B. Spray adhesive shall be formulated to stick aggressively to polyethylene plastic sheeting. 2.4 DISPOSAL BAGS A. Provide 6 -mil thick leak -tight polyethylene plastic disposal bags. 2.5 PERSONAL PROTECTION A. Provide workers with proper protection in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, & Local standards. Respiratory protection shall be provided on the basis of prior employee air monitoring results conducted within the past 12 months for of similar stabilization tasks. If prior employee monitoring is not available for similar projects, then it shall be assumed that lead exposure will be above the permissible exposure limit (PEL) and all applicable parts of 10 CFR 1926.62 pertaining to exposure above the PEL shall be followed. B. Provide respirators that are the most comfortable and affords the best seal and protection. Minimum protection shall be a half -face, negative pressure respirator equipped with a HEPA filter cartridge approved by NIOSH/MSHA for use in lead dust environments. If chemical stripping of any painted surfaces is anticipated, an organic filter cartridge shall also be provided. C. Provide workers with protective full body clothing. A sufficient number of disposable coveralls shall be available to provide each worker clean suits upon each entry into the work area. REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 2 D. Full face shields shall be provided if chemical stripping of lead -based painted surfaces is anticipated. 2.6 HIGH EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE ABSOLUTE (HEPA) FILTERS A. Vacuum cleaners, sanders, drills, and saws shall be equipped with a high efficiency particulate absolute (HEPA) filtration system capable of filtering particles of 0.3 microns or greater at 99.97 percent efficiency. 2.7 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION A. Equip all circuits for any purpose entering the regulated area with ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI). Locate GFCI's outside the regulated area so that all circuits are protected prior to entry into the regulated area. Provide circuit breaker type GFCI equipped with test button and reset switch for all circuits to be used for any purpose in the regulated area, decontamination units, exterior, or as otherwise required by national electrical code, OSHA or other authority. Locate the panel exterior to the regulated area. B. Use only grounded extension cords, Use "hard- service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Use single lengths or use waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric fords, if single lengths will not reach areas of work. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall provide a personnel decontamination station with separate facilities for storing protective work clothing and equipment and worker's street clothes, and for worker decontamination. Wherever feasible, employers should provide shower facilities onsite and ensure workers shower and shampoo before lunch and at the end of the shift. B. The personnel decontamination station shall consist of: 1. An area where workers can change from street clothes to protective clothing prior to entering the work area, and a wash area where workers shall wash hands, face, respirator and other protective gear after leaving the work area. Contractor shall ensure view into station is obscured. C. As a minimum, require that all workers adhere to the following sequence when entering or leaving the work area. 1. At the personnel decontamination station, worker removes street clothing, dons two sets of clean disposable coveralls and a respirator. Worker proceeds to work area and puts on a hard hat, goggles, full face shield and breathing protection, if required, and gloves. 2. Before leaving the work area, worker removes all gross contamination and debris from the outer set of coveralls, shoes, hard hat and other protective gear with a HEPA vacuum. Remove the outer set of coveralls by rolling to reduce airborne dust. Do not remove the respirator at this time. 3. The worker then proceeds to the personnel decontamination station, removes the hard hat, goggles, face shield, if required, and gloves. Decontaminate this equipment with cleaning cloths soaked with TSP wash water and rinse with clear water. 4. Next, the worker removes the second set of disposable coveralls in the same manner as the outer set. While still wearing the respirator, use soap and water or an approved disinfectant/sanitizer, wipe the outside of the respirator, remove it, and continue thoroughly cleaning the respirator. Remove HEPA filters and dispose of as contaminated waste. 5. The worker then proceeds to wash face, hands, arms, and fingernails with soap and water, rinse thoroughly with clear water, and rinse or shampoo hair. Dress in either two clean sets of disposable coveralls for another entry into the work area, or street clothes if leaving the work site. 6. Place the coveralls in a polyethylene plastic bag, seal with duct tape and dispose of as general construction debris. REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 3 3.2 EXTERIOR WORK AREA PREPARATION A. Establish a 10 -foot perimeter on the grounds around the exterior work area and post hazard warning signs. Do not allow individuals inside the work area without proper personal protective equipment (i.e., disposable coveralls, respirators). B. Owner will remove all movable objects from this area. Pre -clean objects remaining in the area using a HEPA vacuum and/or TSP wet cleaning methods. Cover all objects with at least one layer of 4 -mil polyethylene plastic sheeting secured in place with duct tape or weights. C. Seal one layer of 6 -mil polyethylene plastic sheeting to the exterior wall directly below the painted component to be prepared for repainting. Sheeting shall extend six (6) feet to either side of the component. Allow the polyethylene plastic to drape onto the ground and over any shrubbery to a point not less than 10 feet from the exterior wall. This layer of plastic shall be weighted to prevent displacement by wind. Raise edges of the plastic to create a basin to prevent contaminated runoff in the event of unexpected precipitation. D. Keep all windows and doors within 20 feet of working surfaces closed, including windows and doors of adjacent structures. E. Erect vertical shrouds if constant wind speed creates visible movement of dust and/or debris beyond the ground sheeting. Shrouds shall be of sufficient height and extend a sufficient distance from the building to prevent such movement. Do not conduct work if wind speeds are greater than 20 miles per hour. F. Erect no more primary barriers or wind shrouds than necessary for any one day's shift. 3.3 LEAD PAINT REMOVAL PROCEDURES A. Pre -clean painted surfaces involved using a HEPA vacuum and/or TSP wet cleaning methods. These surfaces include but are not limited to: 1. Dyess Park Community Center: a. Painted exterior masonry walls b. Window frames and jambs c. Painted brick or stone sills d. Decorative painted masonry & wood heads and jambs e. Wood trim around doors B. The following removal methods are approved and recommended: 1. HEAT GUNS. The use of heat guns is limited to electric- powered flameless guns operating below 1,100 degrees Fahrenheit. Hold the nozzle of the heat gun three to six inches from the surface. Allow the heat stream leaving the gun to merely soften the paint. Do not allow the paint film to scorch or smoke. At the very first sign of paint softening, blistering, or bubbling, discontinue the use of heat and immediately scrape the loose paint off the surface. Respirators for workers using the heat gun shall be equipped with both a HEPA - filtered cartridge and an organic vapor cartridge. 2. SANDING. This method uses traditional electric sanders such as disc, orbital or vibrating sanders equipped with specially designed shrouds or containment systems that are placed under local exhaust ventilation. All exhaust air is passed through a HEPA filter using an ordinary HEPA vacuum to reduce the amount of airborne particulate lead. Sanders equipped with a shroud must be in constant contact with the surface to be effective. This configuration makes it impossible to sand to the edge of protruding surfaces such as baseboards or window and door casings. The HEPA sander type that pierces the sandpaper draws dust through the holes. This configuration permits sanding to the edge of protruding surfaces. Respirators equipped with HEPA- filtered cartridges must be worn by workers using sanders. 3. WET SCRAPING. This method of lead -based paint removal can be performed using a spray bottle or sponge attached to a paint scraper. Wet scraping is often used to remove loose and flaking paint prior to paint film stabilization or encapsulation. Lightly mist the surface with water from a sprayer or sponge. Loose material should be scraped from the surface and deposited on the polyethylene plastic sheeting. Paint chips should be cleaned up as soon as possible to prevent tracking them throughout the work area. Respirators equipped with HEPA- filtered cartridges must be worn by workers wet scraping. REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 4 4. NEEDLE GUN. The needle gun is appropriate for metal surfaces but may cause significant damage to masonry, wood, drywall and plaster. Metal needles rapidly pound against the painted surface, dislodging the paint. A HEPA vacuum connected to the gun head draws paint chips and dust into the vacuum minimizing the dispersion of lead dust. Losing shroud contact with the surface can cause the deposition of significant amounts of chips onto the polyethylene plastic sheeting. Chips should be cleaned us as soon as possible. Respirators equipped with HEPA- filtered cartridges must be worn by workers using the needle gun. C. Dry scraping is not recommended for this project. Contractor is permitted to have qualified sampling and testing done to limit the areas of "Lead Stabilization ". D. All waste materials generated by stabilization operation shall be segregated by type: 1. Paint chips shall be collected and placed in leak -tight disposal bags. 2. TSP waste wash water & personnel decontamination waste water shall be filtered & retained in 55 -gallon sealed drum lined with a lead -tight disposal bag. 3. Filters and cleaning rags saturated by TSP wash water shall be placed in leak -tight disposal bags and/or a 55 -gallon sealed drum lined with a lead -tight disposal bag. 4. Incidental polyethylene plastic sheeting, disposable suits, gloves, and other personal protective items shall be decontaminated by HEPA vacuuming and/or wet cleaning and disposed of as general construction debris. 3.4 WORK AREA CLEANING PROCEDURES A. All surfaces where lead -based paint was removed and surfaces of polyethylene plastic sheeting installed as part of the containment system shall be thoroughly cleaned using HEPA- vacuum and wet cleaning methods. 1. Start HEPA- vacuuming at the highest point and work down., 2. After thoroughly HEPA- vacuuming all surfaces where lead -based paint was removed and surfaces of polyethylene plastic sheeting installed as part of containment system, thoroughly and completely clean the surfaces by scrubbing with a 5 -10 percent TSP solution and rinsing with clean water. 3. Start TSP washing at the highest point and work down. 4. The Contractor shall HEPA- vacuum and wet clean surfaces where lead -based paint was removed and surfaces of polyethylene plastic sheeting installed as part of the containment system, a minimum of two (2) times before proceeding with the visual inspection. 5. Allow sufficient time for the lead dust generated by the removal activity to settle out of the air between the first and second cleaning. 3.5 VISUAL INSPECTION A. The Owner's Representative shall visually inspect all surfaces where lead -based paint was removed and surfaces of polyethylene plastic sheeting installed as part of the containment system, to ensure: 1. All designated lead -based paint has been removed. 2. All surfaces, including polyethylene plastic sheeting installed as part of the containment system, have been thoroughly and completely HEPA- vacuumed and wet cleaned. 3. No visible dust or debris remains on surfaces, including surfaces of polyethylene plastic sheeting installed as part of the containment system. B. Once the Owner's Representative has confirmed the work area has been properly cleaned, complete the "Certification of Visual Inspection" attached to this Section. Final wipe clearance samples will not be collected if this form has been signed by the Contractor and the Owner's Representative. This visual will then serve as release criteria as in 3.7. 3.6 FINAL WIPE CLEARANCE SAMPLING A. Final wipe clearance samples will be taken after completion of all cleaning required and analyzed in accordance with NIOSH Method 7082 for total lead if the area does not meet the visual release criteria. The services of a testing laboratory will be employed by the Contractor to perform final wipe clearance testing REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 5 B. For each day lead -based paint stabilization was conducted; final clearance wipe samples shall be collected as appropriate: 1. One exterior surface wipe sample from each area where lead -based paint was removed (either the floor of a porch or an exterior wall). 2. One field blank. C. Wipe sample collection and laboratory analysis will conform to procedures outlined in Federal Lead guidelines. 3.7 RELEASE CRITERIA A. Decontamination of an interior work area will be considered complete if the concentration of total lead for each interior surface floor wipe sample is less than or equal to 100 micrograms per square foot. B. Decontamination of an exterior work area will be considered complete if the concentration of total lead for each surface sampled is less than or equal to 800 micrograms per square foot. C. If decontamination of the work area is not confirmed, the Contractor shall be required to re -clean the area and perform additional final wipe testing. Such re- cleaning and retesting shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 4 — WASTE DISPOSAL 4.1 TOXICITY CHARACTERISTIC LEACHING PROCEDURE (TCLP) TEST A. A Testing Laboratory, engaged by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, will collect one composite sample from each type of waste generated by the LBP stabilization activity. As a minimum, one TCLP (Lead) shall be conducted on each of the following: 1. Paint chips. 2. TSP waste wash water and personnel decontamination waste water. 3. Filters and cleaning rags saturated by TSP wash water. B. The Contractor shall pay for disposal of all waste materials generated by his work both hazardous and non - hazardous waste at the Richmond County Landfill. C. If TCLP test results show that any of the waste materials generated by the work are hazardous wastes, the materials shall be disposed of as hazardous waste. D. All waste generated by stabilization activities that contain five parts per million (5 ppm) or greater lead when analyzed by TCLP extraction is hazardous waste. 4.2 SOLID WASTE (NON- HAZARDOUS) DISPOSAL A. Waste which has been evaluated and determined to be non - hazardous can be disposed of in an approved landfill as solid waste. Coordinate all disposal procedures with Owner. 4.3 HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL A. Hazardous waste shall be disposed of at a hazardous waste disposal facility known as a treatment, storage and disposal (TSD) facility. A TSD must have an EPA ID number and authorization to operate. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm the TSD meets all legal requirements. B. Hazardous waste shall be transported to an approved TSD by a hazardous waste transporter. Transporters must have an EPA ID number and must meet U.S. Department of Transportation requirements for shipping containers. C. The Contractor shall ensure that all methods and procedures utilized for solid or hazardous waste disposal shall be in compliance with Federal guidelines; applicable EPA, OSHA, NIOSH, State of Georgia; and the EPA's "Understanding the Small Quantity Generator Hazardous Waste Rules" guidebook. Coordinate the timing and amount of all disposal with Owner. REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 6 4.4 WASTE DISPOSAL SUBMITTALS A. Prior to disposal of any waste generated by the leaded paint stabilization, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Copies of TCLP test results and chains of custody forms. 2. Copy of a letter from the Contractor to the solid waste landfill where the non - hazardous waste will be disposed of describing the materials that will be deposited in the landfill, their lead content, and the disposal procedures to be utilized. 3. Copy of a letter from the solid waste landfill documenting they will accept the non- hazardous waste described in the above letter. 4. Copy of a letter from the Contractor to the hazardous waste landfill where the hazardous waste will be disposed of describing the materials that will be deposited in the landfill, their lead content, and the disposal procedures to be utilized. 5. Copy of a letter from the hazardous waste landfill documenting they will accept the hazardous waste described in the above letter and describing the disposal procedures to be to be utilized. 6. Detailed procedures for the storage, containerization, and transportation of the hazardous wastes in accordance with Federal and State requirements. 7. Copies of the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest for hazardous waste disposal must be included in post - stabilization submittal packages. PART 5 — PROJECT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION 5.1 DAMAGE REPAIR AND CLEAN -UP A. Any damage caused by the Contractor's activity or his workers during construction shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall: 1. Remove all debris from the building site. 2. Replace all broken glass caused by the Contractor's activity or his workers. 3. Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from walls and other surfaces caused by the Contractor's construction activity. 4. Leave site in broom clean condition. 5.2 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION A: Contractor shall submit three bound volumes of the following documents to the Owner's Representative for approval: 1. Proof of insurance naming the Owner as additional certificate holder. 2. Verification of Contractor Superintendent's experience and training in lead -based paint stabilization. 3. Verification of worker experience and training. 4. Medical examination report & a blood lead level test for each employee of the Contractor who was involved in project. Blood lead level test must be within the past six months. 5. Respirator training for each employee of the Contractor who was involved in the project. 6. Copy of daily logs maintained by the Contractor's General Superintendent. 7. Original of Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Form. END OF SECTION REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT 02065 - 7 ATTACHMENT SECTION 02065 — REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD -BASED PAINT CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION LEAD -BASED PAINT ABATEMENT In accordance with Section 02065, Paragraph 3.7, the contractor hereby certifies that he has visually inspected the work area identified below and has found no dust, debris, or residue. Work Inspected: By: (Signature): Date: (Print Name) (Print Title) OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE CERTIFICATION The Owner's Representative hereby certifies that he has accompanied the contractor on his visual inspection of the above identified work area and verifies that this inspection has been thorough and to the best of his knowledge and belief, the Contractor's certification above is a true and honest one. By: (Signature): Date: (Print Name) (Print Title) REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF LEAD BASED PAINT 02065 - ATTACHMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK SECTION 02210 — TOPSOIL & FINISH GRADING A. This Section includes the following: 1. Topsoil. 2. Finish Grading. 3. Topsoil stripping, stockpiling, and rough grading. 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. Topsoil Quantity: Verify existing quantity sufficient for completion of work of this Section. Where quantity is not sufficient, provide imported topsoil at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. C. Topsoil: Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing characteristics of representing topsoils on the vicinity which produce a heavy growth; free from subsoil, weeds, litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than one inch diameter, stumps, roots, trash, toxic substances, or any materials which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations; having a minimum pH of 6.0 and a maximum pH of 7.0 and obtained from naturally well drained areas which have never been stripped before. The pH testing results of the new topsoil shall be submitted to the Owner /Architect prior to beginning planting operations. Topsoil shall not be delivered in a frozen or muddy condition. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Spread topsoil after subgrade has been regraded and approved by Architect. Before depositing and spreading topsoil, rake subsoil surface clean of stones, debris or rubbish and loosen to a depth of 3- inches. C. Establish finish grades and place topsoil at planting and lawn areas. D. Spread, rake, compact and manipulate topsoil to form a settled thickness of 3- inches throughout all lawn areas and a thickness of 6- inches throughout all shrub and/or ground cover beds. 1. Finish grade for all areas shall be 2- inches below adjacent paved surfaces or curbs. 2. Allow sufficient space for placement of 3 -inch layer of mulch in planting beds. E. Remove hard clods, stiff clay, sods, stones, roots, sticks, and debris over 1 -inch. F. Do not spread topsoil in muddy or frozen conditions. G. Provide positive drainage from all finished graded areas. H. Remove from site, and legally dispose of, excess topsoil. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finish grade shall have a minimum deviation from proposed grades of not more than 1 -inch in 10 -feet. B. Provide finish surface free of ruts, rocks, and clods. Final inspection to determine acceptance of graded areas shall be made by Architect. 1. Areas which fail to show a uniform grade shall be regraded at Contractor's expense. 2. Repeat until affected areas are approved by Architect. END OF SECTION TOPSOIL & FINISH GRADING 02210 -1 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on proper- ty adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. D. Utility Locator Service: Notify and schedule utility locator service for area of the Project and identify all utilities before site clearing. Sl'1'E CLEARING DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING Section includes the following: Protecting existing trees shrubs groundcovers plants and grass to remain. Removing existing trees groundcovers plants and grass as noted on drawings. Clearing and grubbing. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities as noted on drawings. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying sub- soil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diame- ter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared mate- rials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. A. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical con- ditions. A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to coordinate the work and confirm qualified workmen are aware of project requirements. A. Traffic Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site - clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities with- out permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 02230 - 1 E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Divi- sion 2 Section "Earthwork." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off -site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on -site. Conform to type and material use requirements. a. Select structural fill or backfill. b. Topsoil fill. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and dis- charge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, in accor- dance with; Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Drawings, The Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia and Georgia NPDES Storm water Permit B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during re- moval. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction opera- tions, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full- growth status, as determined by Architect. SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2 3.4 UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new con- struction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inch- es below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and com- pact each layer to a density equal to specified compaction required by Division 2 — Earthwork section. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with under- lying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil on site. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut Length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces verti- cally. 3.8 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3 END OF SECTION 02230 - 4 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.4 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02300 — EARTHWORK A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade walks pavements lawns and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs -on- grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete pavements. 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved mate- rials. 1. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. 2. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs -on- grade. 3. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches wide. A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low- strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimen- sions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond in- dicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 EARTHWORK H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows /2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot -mix asphalt pave- ment, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement con- crete or hot -mix asphalt walk. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Geotextile. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site and borrow soil material pro- posed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock - definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility servic- es according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility- locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. 02300 - 2 B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT ac- cording to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of op- timum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse - aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natu- ral sand; ASTM D 448; coarse - aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 GEOTEXTILES A. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 Ibf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 Ibf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufac- tured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a pro- tective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION EARTHWORK 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by set- tlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork opera- tions. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumula- tion. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumu- late in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classi- fied as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices in- cluded in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract time may be authorized for rock ex- cavation. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; un- derground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of ma- terial not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation. 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and sub - grade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without ex- ceeding the following dimensions: a. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. b. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. c. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches wide. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES 02300 - 4 A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If ap- plicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing con- crete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Exca- vate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Struc- tures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or mi- nus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: As indicated. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat - bottomed, multiple - duct conduit units, hand- excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an un- disturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equip- ment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated sub - grades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof - rolling in direction per- pendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10- wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as de- termined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or con- struction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Arc- hitect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. EARTHWORK B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bo- dies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satis- factory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Divi- sion 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." D. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any di- mension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displace- ment of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.13 SOIL FILL 02300 - 6 A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill ma- terial will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, satisfactory soil material. 4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory soil material. 5. Under footings and foundations, use satisfactory soil material. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A . Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before com- paction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that ex- ceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for materi- al compacted by hand - operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and un- iformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight ac- cording to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90 per- cent. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface to- lerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10- foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES EARTHWORK 02300 - 7 A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written in- structions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot -mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 4. Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 5. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight ac- cording to ASTM D 1557. C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and com- pact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in -place concrete slabs -on- grade as follows: 1. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 2. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage and pay a qualified independent geotechnical engineer- ing testing agency to perform field quality - control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with require- ments. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Archi- tect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following loca- tions and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. EARTHWORK 02300 - 8 E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of com- paction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; re- compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.20 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed sur- faces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construc- tion operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dis- pose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK 02300 - 9 PART 1- GENERAL DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK SECTION 02361- TERMITE CONTROL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control: 1. Pipe trenches. 2. Footings and foundations. 3. Below all concrete slab on grade and sidewalks. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be done by a bonded subcontractor licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities, whose principal business is extermination and treatment for pest control and who can show evidence of at least five years of successful operation in the field of Pest Control. Evidence of such qualifications shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to beginning the work. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparing substrate and application. C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by the State of Georgia and local authorities. D. Terminix Services is the current acceptable installer and termite protection system subcontractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS WARRANTY 1. Furnish 2- copies of written guarantee certifying the applied soil poisoning treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, if subterranean termite activity is discovered during the guarantee period, the Subcontractor will re -treat soil & repair /replace damage caused by termite infestation at no cost to Owner. 2. Provide guarantee for a period of five (5) years from date of treatment, signed by the Applicator and the Subcontractor. Cost of 5 -year guarantee to be included in the Base Bid. 3. Owner reserves the right to renew warranty for additional five years. Submit cost of guarantee extension. 4. Draw the guarantee in favor of the Owner and submit a sample form of guarantee to the Architect for approval before beginning the work. A. Installer must examine finished surfaces which are to receive soil treatment & other areas that are a component of this work, and shall notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer, after excavating, filling and grading operations are completed for each construction operation. B. Protect contiguous work & materials from spattering, deterioration or other harmful effects might result from the installation of this product. Damage to existing work will be compensated for by the installer of this product. C. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. TERMITE CONTROL 02361 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers with manufacturer's labels and seals identifying content, and comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. B. Conform to State of Georgia and Richmond County requirements for application licensing and authority to use toxicant chemicals. C. Comply with EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. D. All application, material handling, and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements. E. Comply with Federal, State, and Local fire and safety requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Use an emulsible, concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water, specially formulated to prevent termite infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. Provide solution consisting of one of the following: Conform to "Terminix Services" system requirements. 1. Chloropyrifos: Dursban TC, Dow Chemical Co. 2. Permathrin: Dranet FT, FMC Corp. Torpedo, ICI Americas, Inc. 3. Cypermethrine: Prevail FT, FMC Corp. Demon, ICI Americas, Inc. 4. Fenvalerate: Gold Coast Tribute, Dupont. 5. Isofenphose: Pryfon, Mobay Corp. B. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by material manufacturer. C. Use only soil treatments which are not harmful to plants. D. Terminix Sentricon baiting system. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATORY WORK A. All clearing, grading, grubbing, stripping, fill for subgrade and subgrade compaction shall be complete prior to application of chemicals. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Rate of Application: 1. Footings and Pipe Trenches. Before footings are poured, treat footing trench with 2 gal. /5lin. ft. of trench area and perimeter foundations, both sides, and walls, conduits, columns and other penetrations of slabs on grade. 2. Under Floor Slab Areas, apply 1 gallon per 10 square feet. Apply 1 1/2 gallons /1 Osfto areas of washed gravel and other coarse absorbent material. 3. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soil or during inclement weather. 4. At masonry foundations and grade beams, treat voids with 2 gallons per 10 linear feet applied in hollow spaces. 5. At expansion joints apply 4 gallons per 10 linear feet of penetration. 6. Before finished grading, treat exterior base walls using two gal. /5 lin. ft. footings and back fill in 6 -inch increments treating in same manner. TERMITE CONTROL 02361 -2 B. Locate baiting system in accordance with full protection requirements for the entire building and exterior improvements. 3.3 PRECAUTIONS A. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signage after areas are covered by other construction. B. Reapply soil treatment to areas disturbed after application. 3.4 CERTIFICATION A. Provide certification letter from a licensed installer confirming the complete termite treatment installation. Provide a bonded warranty for a five -year period with a yearly inspection and recertification. Warranty and certification shall cover renovated building areas. TERMITE CONTROL END OF SECTION 02361 -3 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION B. Related work: 1. Drawing A1.1 — Site Layout DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK SECTION 02441— IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Provide an underground irrigation system as shown and specified which is a two -wire decoder control. The work includes: 1. Irrigation system including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads, and accessories. 2. Valves and fittings. 3. Controller(s), decoders & control wire. 4. Testing. 5. Excavating and backfilling irrigation system work. 6. Associated interior and exterior plumbing, and accessories to complete the system (if noted on plans). 7. Pipe sleeves. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contact the manufacturer's technical representative for assistance with the installation of a decoder system. B. Installer's qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience installing irrigation systems of comparable size and having installed a two -wire decoder system. C. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electrical Code. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). 3. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF). 4. The Irrigation Association, (IA). D. Excavating, backfilling, and compacting operations. 1. Test irrigation system prior to installing backfill materials where possible. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for controllers. B. Upon irrigation system acceptance, submit written operating and maintenance instructions. C. Provide irrigation system record drawings: 1. Locate dimensioned locations of all valves, decoders & grounding 2. Locate path of main line from service point. D. Provide instruction to Owner's representative for operation and maintenance of the system. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer's original undamaged and unopened containers with labels intact and legible. B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends, both threaded or plain. C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinkler heads, and similar components that can not be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02441 -1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Known underground and surface utility lines are located on the civil plans. Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor for as-built locations. B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of the final landscape work. C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work operations. Cost of repairs at Contractor's expense. D. Promptly notify the Architect of unexpected sub - surface conditions. E. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads, valves, and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at time of installation to conform to minor changes in construction. 1. Space sprinkler components as indicated. 2. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to clear existing fixed obstructions. Final system layout shall be acceptable to the Architect. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable irrigation system manufacturers: 1. Rainbird 2. Hunter Industries, Inc. 3. The Toro Co. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of their specified class and kind. 2. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name of trademark, size schedule and type of pipe, working pressure at 73 degrees F. and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval. B. Plastic pipe, fittings, and connections: 1 Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D2241, rigid, unplasticized PVC, extruded from virgin parent material. Provide pipe homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles, and dents. a. 2 1/2" diameter and under: Bell & socket glued. (Zone Lines class 200, Main Lines Sch. 40 unless noted differently on plans). b. 3" and up, class 200 (Main Lines unless noted differently on plans). Pipe in sizes 3" and greater shall be integral bell piping supplied with a rubber sealing gasket and sufficient lubricant. All fittings shall be compatible including adapters for joining to other piping materials 2. PVC pipe fittings: ASTM D2241 schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for solvent weld, slip joint ring tight seal, or screwed connections. Fittings made of other materials are not permitted. a. Size slip fitting socket taper to permit a dry un softened pipe and to be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. Saddle and cross fittings are not permitted. b. Schedule 80 PVC may be threaded. c. Use male adapters for plastic to metal connections. Hand tighten male adapters plus one turn with a strap wrench. C. Sprinkler heads, valves, and associated equipment: 1. Refer to drawings D. Electrical control wire, splice connectors and surge protection: 1. Electrical control and ground wire: Shall be color coded and shall be approved for direct burial. Wire shall be 2 wire twisted IDWIRE -2 12/2 AWG /2 mm from the controller to the IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02441 -2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Drainage fill: 1/2" to 3/4" washed pea gravel B. Fill: clean soil free of stones larger than 2" diameter foreign matter, organic material, and debris. 1. Provide imported fill material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and pay all costs for imported materials. 2. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system work may be used as fill material subject to the Architect's review and acceptance. C. Valve access boxes: Tapered enclosure of rigid plastic material comprised of fibrous components chemically inert and unaffected by moisture corrosion and temperature changes. Provide lid of same material, green in color. Size according to number of valves in box. 1. 12" deep x 18" long x 13" wide base dimensions. 2. 10" deep x 13" diameter base dimension. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start irrigation system work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. If work is started then conditions will be considered acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION decoders and twisted 18 AWG /1.024 mm from the decoders to the electric solenoids. 2. Electrical Splice Connectors: Decoders: shall be twisted 2 wire 3MDBR and decoders to solenoids DBY. 3. Surge Protection: End line protection IDE. In -line protection IDN. Design is based on no more than 11 decoders or 1000' of wire without surge protection as well as at the Controller. Resistance value of 10 ohms or less @ each grounding point. A. Layout and stake the location of each pipe run and all sprinlder heads and sprinlder valves. B. Place sleeves as indicated for installation of piping and control wire (unless already provided - see civil drawings). A. Excavating and backfilling• 1. All excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include all materials encountered. 2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fittings. 3. If the pulling method is used, the pipe "plow" shall be a vibratory type. Starting and finishing holes for pipe pulling shall not exceed a 1' -0" by 3' -0" opening. 4. Excavating to depths required to provide 2" depth of earth fill or sand bedding for piping when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered. 5. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place and compact fill in layers not greater than 8" depth. 6. Install irrigation lines with a minimum cover of 12" based on finished grades. B. Plastic pipe: 1. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Saw cut plastic pipe larger than 1 ". Use a square -in- sawing vice, to ensure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation. 3. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Use only solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall make arrangements with pipe manufacturer for all necessary field assistance. 4. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02441 -3 5. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. C. Sprinklers, fittings, valves, and accessories: 1. Install fittings, valves, decoders, sprinlder heads, risers, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concrete thrust blocks where required at fittings and valves. 3. Set sprinlder heads perpendicular to finished grades, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Install gear driven and spray pop -up sprinklers with an adjustable triple swing joint riser of at least 3 standard 90 degree elbows. Fabricate triple swing joint risers of schedule 80 PVC nipples and schedule 40 PVC elbows. The horizontal nipple connected directly into the side of the lateral line shall be a minimum of 3" long. All other nipples of the swing joint riser shall be of length as required for proper installation of the sprinlder head. a. If the sprinlder heads have a side inlet, 2 street ells and a nipple may be used instead of a double swing joint assembly. 5. Install in- ground control valves in a valve access box as indicated. 6. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level foundation at proper grade and to provide drainage of the access box. 7. Seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves with Teflon tape or approved plastic joint type compound. D. Control wiring: 1. Install electric control cable in the piping trench wherever possible. Place wire in trench adjacent to pipe. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion joints in wire may be provided at 200 -foot intervals by making 5 -6 turns of the wire around a piece of 1/2" pipe instead of slack. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12 ". 2. Provide sufficient slack at site connections at remote control valves in control boxes, and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice to the surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required. 3. Connect decoders where shown on the plans. 4. Make wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the field as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Wire splices shall be made in valve boxes and recorded on the "record drawings ". E. Flushing, testing, and adjustment: 1. After sprinlder piping and risers are installed and before sprinlder heads are installed, open control valves and flush out the system with full head of water. 2. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary repairs and retest repaired sections as required. 3. Adjust sprinklers after installation for proper and adequate distribution of the water over the coverage pattern. Adjust for the proper arc of coverage. 4. Adjust all electric remote control valve pressure regulators and flow control stems for system balance and optimum performance. 5. Test and demonstrate the controller by operating appropriate day, hour, and station selection features as required to automatically start and shut down irrigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions. 6. Provide a plan showing location of all zones connected to the controller. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable excavated materials, rock, trash, and debris. B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean, and free of debris. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE A. Test and demonstrate to the Architect and Owner the satisfactory operation of the system free of leaks. Irrigated areas will be inspected at completion of installation and submission of completed Final Inspection Check List (3.07) at the end of this section. B. Instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of the system, including adjustment of IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02441 -4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 sprinklers, controller(s), valves, controller, and/or moisture and freeze sensing controls. C. Upon acceptance the Owner will assume operation of the system. 3.6 CLEANING A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair all damage resulting from irrigation system installation. 3.7 FINAL INSPECTION CHECK LIST - IRRIGATION CHECK IF COMPLETE 1) As -built as indicated in specifications complete. 2) All zones operate properly with final adjustment on all heads. 3) All heads in approximate location as indicated on plan. 4) High -pops where indicated. 5) Pipe class or schedule as specified and minimum 12" cover. 6) All pop -up heads 1 -2" away from curbs or walks. All stationary risers 6" away from walls and 6" above adjacent planting. 7) All exposed risers schedule 80. 8) All turf heads on triple swing joints and shrub spray heads on flex pipe. 9) All wire splices with waterproof wire connects and in valve boxes. 10) All valve boxes have gravel bottom. 11) Location of zones identified on plan with zone numbers. Final inspection will not be scheduled until the above is complete and returned to the Architect Compliance with the above does not insure final acceptance. Acceptance will be determined at final inspection. The list above represents a small portion of work that is too often overlooked prior to Contractor's request for final inspection. If the Architect observes any non - compliance with any of the items in the above list the final inspection will be terminated and the Contractor will be billed for the inspection at a rate of $125.00/hr. from portal to portal, plus expenses paid prior to any further inspection. Landscape Contractor Signature Date General Contractor Signature Date END OF SECTION IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02441 -5 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot -mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot -mix asphalt paving overlay. 4. Asphalt surface treatments. 5. Pavement- marking paint. 1.3 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02741 - HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. B. GADOT: Department of Transportation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job -Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer shall be a paving -mix manufacturer registered with and approved by au- thorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is located. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as do- cumented according to ASTM E 548. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement - marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement - marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range re- quired by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Pavement Sealer: Comply with manufactures recommendations. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1 B. Pavement - Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil -based materials, 50 deg F for water - based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. 2.4 MIXES B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured, crushed blast- furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: AASHTO M 29, sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, properly cured blast- furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot -mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. D. Mineral Filler: AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1, PG 64 -22. B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 946 for penetration - graded material. C. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with Georgia DOT requirements. D. Water: Potable. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wetable powder form. B. Sand: AASHTO M 29, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. C. Pavement Sealer: Polymer modified coal tar emulsion complying with ASTM D -3320 & D -490, Grade RT -12. Sealer shall be Polytar by Gem Seal, Inc. or approved equal. D. Pavement - Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT -P -1952, with drying time of less than 3 minutes. 1. Color: As indicated. E. Wheel Stops: Precast, air - entrained concrete, 2500 -psi minimum compressive strength, 4 -1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch diameter, 10 -inch minimum length. A. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by GADOT and com- plying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Surface Course: Type F 3. Pavement Sealer: Manufacturer's standard mix design for Medium Traffic Rating. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 2 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. B. Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that re- quire further compaction. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PATCHING A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound- aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly. 1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly. 2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut exca- vation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound- aggregate base course to form new subgrade. C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot -mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Re- move spillages and clean affected surfaces. D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot -mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. E. Patching. Partially fill excavated pavements with hot -mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot -mix surface layer finished flush with ad- jacent surfaces. 3.3 REPAIRS A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot -mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements. 1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick. B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch. 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot -mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified- asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot - applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 3 3.6 JOINTS 1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound- aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and writ- ten application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted - aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose. C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound- aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal. /sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Al- low prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Re- move spillages and clean affected surfaces. E. Pavement Sealer: Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and as in- dicated in section 3.9. 3.5 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot -mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place as- phalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot -mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot -mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one -way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt- paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to prevent se- gregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS -22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive dis- placement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 4 3.7 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without ex- cessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compac- tors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot - mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. 2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and re- place with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smooth- ness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following toler- ances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10 -foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS A. Pavement Sealer: Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated below. 1. Surface Preparation. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 5 a. Thoroughly inspect the pavement for minor cracks and other imperfections. Cracks approximately 1/4 " -3/4" inch wide should be cleared of debris and filled with a Manufacturer's approved crack sealant. b. Remove oil and grease spots by scrubbing with a detergent and flushing with water until a water -break -free surface is obtained. Oil and grease spots with deeper penetration shall be treated by burning with hand held propane torch, and then coating the spot with an approved oil spot primer such as Tar -Prime. c. Immediately before application of sealer, clean the surface of all loose dust, dirt, leaves, and any other foreign materials by sweeping or flushing with water. d. Asphalt surfaces shall be primed with a coat of Polytar diluted 1 to 1 with water. The prime coat shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before proceeding with addi- tional applications. Application rate shall be 0.08 -0.10 gallon per square yard of diluted Polytar. 2. Application: Apply in accordance with Manufactures instructions and as follow: a. Mix design and application rates shall be in accordance with Manufactures "Medium Traffic Design. b. When pavement temperatures are in excess of 120 degrees, pavement shall be fog sprayed. Fog spray shall dampen pavement without leaving puddles. 3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 3.11 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embed- ded at one - quarter to one -third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to per- form field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com- pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for com- pliance with smoothness tolerances. E. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and com- pacted pavement according to ASTM D 979. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot -mix asphalt - paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared accord- ing to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix specifications. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 6 3.13 DISPOSAL 2. In -place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples ac- cording to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pave- ment, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in -place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuc- lear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. c. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and le- gally dispose of them in an EPA - approved landfill. 1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on -site. END OF SECTION HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 7 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Driveways and roadways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Walkways. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast- furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances war- rant adjustments. C. Field quality - control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Techni- cian, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other con- struction activities. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 2.2 FORMS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in- corporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer- ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, man- ufacturers specified. A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less. B. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfac- es. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I,. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggre- gates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse - Aggregate Size: 1 -1/2 inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious reac- tivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap - graded coarse aggregate as follows: 1. Aggregate Sizes: 3/8 to 5/8 inch nominal. 2. Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color: Smooth Surface Pea Gravel, with contrasting color D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. E. Air- Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 -1/2 inches long. 1. Available Products: a. Monofilament Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol HP. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 2 2.6 CURING MATERIALS 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100. 3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co.-- Conn.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth. A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing ap- proximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. dry. B. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear Waterborne Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Available Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure. c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure Clear. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J- 11 -W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure - Clear. i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox -Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. 1. Symons Corporation; Resi -Chem Clear. m. Tamms Industries Inc.; Homcure WB 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Enviocure 100. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation- Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type 11, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement - Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, Lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT -P -1952, with drying time of less than 3 minutes. 1. Color: As indicated. 2.9 WHEEL STOPS A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air - entrained concrete, 2500 -psi minimum compressive strength, 4 -1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch diameter, 10 -inch minimum length. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of nor- mal- weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties: CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 3 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. C. Add air- entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal- weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 5 -1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1 -1/2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1 5 percent for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggre- gate size D. Limit water - soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of ce- ment. E. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb /cu. yd.. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1. For concrete mixes of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1 -1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For concrete mixes larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each ad- ditional 1 cu. yd.. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimen- sional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equip- ment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof -roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10 -wheel tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch re- quire correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been cor- rected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 4 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 3.5 JOINTS A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to re- quired lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form - release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. A. General: Comply with CRSFs "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and sup- porting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond - reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Zinc - Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc- coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material. F. Epoxy- Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy - coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy- coated rein- forcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch overlap of adjacent mats. A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to cen- terline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at loca- tions where pavement operations are stopped for more than one -half hour unless pavement termi- nates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway- section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side ofjoint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint - filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 5 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indi- cated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one -piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as in- dicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -fourth of the concrete thick- ness, as follows to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat grooving of contrac- tion joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abra- sive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8- inch - wide joints into concrete when cutting ac- tion will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes Elimi- nate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforce- ment, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an inter- nal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 6 Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the re- quired depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. 1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without be- ing covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform sur- face plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. M. Slip -Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement. 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations. N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on con- crete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength. O. Cold - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low tem- peratures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. P. Hot - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot - weather conditions ex- ist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water - soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish. Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float - finished concrete, per- pendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Medium -to- Fine - Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float - finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 7 3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES 3. Medium -to- Coarse - Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float - finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff - bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. A. Seeded Exposed Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of ag- gregate uniformly on pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete, and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch. 1. Spray -apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheet- ing when ready to continue finishing operations. 3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon - bristle broom. 4. Fine -spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temper- atures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy condi- tions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete sur- face. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture - retaining -cover curing, curing com- pound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10 -foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 8 3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 61b /gal.. 3.12 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embed- ded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one - quarter to one -third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to per- form field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive - strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five ran- domly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive - Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 spe- cimens at 28 days. a. A compressive - strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mix will -be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive - strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive - strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive - strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, lo- cation of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture pro- portions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 9 E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be per- mitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com- pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.14 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement con- crete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing sur- face stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion in- spections. END OF SECTION CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 10 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufac- turer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mix- ing instructions for multi- component materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their de- terioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 3. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. 4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint - sealant manufacturer for applica- tions indicated. 5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products Listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are com- patible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint - sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.3 COLD - APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single - component, low- modulus, neutral- curing, self - leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL. 1. Available Products: a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Coming Corporation; 890 -SL. B. Multicomponent Low- Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation con- sisting of reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, self - leveling sea- lant. 1. Available Products: a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sof -Seal. 2.4 JOINT - SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint - sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint - sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot - Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. C. Round Backer Rods for Cold- Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. 2.5 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sea- lant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant - substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with re- quirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas ofjoint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 2 B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position re- quired to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time back- ings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow op- timum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the origi- nal work. END OF SECTION PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 3 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK SECTION 02826 — ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS & FENCING (STEEL) WORK INCLUDED A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the welded ornamental steel fence system defined herein 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The manufacturer shall supply a total fence system of (specify Montage Plus® standard picket space or Montage Plus® Pool, Pet & Play® 3" air space) Welded and Rackable (ATF — All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel (for standard picket space, specify ClassicTM, MajesticTM, or GenesisTM; for 3" air space, specify Classic'M, MaiesticTM, or GenesisTM) design. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.4 REFERENCES ■ ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. • ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt -Spray (Fog) Apparatus. • ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss • ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint. • ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. • ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. • ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. ■ ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). • ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. ASTM F2408 — Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. The manufacturer's literature shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. PART 2 — MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. The fence system shall conform to (specify Montage Plus standard picket space or Montage Plus Pool, Pet & Play 3" air space) Welded and Rackable (ATF — All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel, (for standard picket space, specify Classic, Maiestic, or Genesis; for 3" air space, specify Classic, Majestic, or Genesis) design, (specify extended picket or flush) bottom rail treatment, (specify 2 -Rail, 3 -Rail or 3 -Rail with Double Rings) style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. Please contact Matt Bean with any questions. 1.888.333.3422. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot - dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft (184 g/m Coating Designation G -60. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS & FENCING (STEEL) 02826 -1 B. Material for pickets shall be 3/4" square x 18 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.5" x 1.4375" x 14 Ga. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced (specify 4.675" o.c. for standard picket space or 3.500" o.c. for 3" air space). Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre -cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre - punched to accept pickets. B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre - punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket -to -rail intersection by Ameristar's proprietary fusion welding process, thus completing the rigid panel assembly (Note: The process produces a virtually seamless, spatter - free good- neighbor appearance, equally attractive from either side of the panel). C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrode position coating (E- Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0 058 mm). The color shall be (specify Black or Bronze). The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating performance criteria of ASTM F2408). D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and infill performance requirements for Industrial weight fences under ASTM F2408. E. Gates shall be fabricated using fusion welded ornamental panel material and 1 -3/4" sq. x 14ga. gate ends. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus %2 ". For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36" (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The "Earthwork" and "Concrete" sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core - drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application. 3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE A. When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1. Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2. Apply zinc -rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3. Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1 -3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non - Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures' warranty. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers' gate drawings, dependent on standard out -to -out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers' gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS & FENCING (STEEL) 02826 -2 Table 3 — Montage Plus — Post Spacing By Bracket Type Span For CLASSIC, GENESIS, & MAJESTIC 8' Nominal (91.95" Rail) Post Size 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 1 3" 2 -1/2" 1 3" Bracket Type Montage Commercial Universal (BB112) Montage Commercial Line Blvd. (BB114) Montage Commercial Flat Mount (BB111) Montage Swivel (BB113)* *95 -1/2" Commercial *96" Post Settings ± /z" O.C. 95 -1/2" 95 -1/2" 95 -1/2" 96" *Note: When using BB113 swivel brackets on either or both ends of a panel installation, care must be taken to ensure the spacing between post and adjoining pickets meets applicable codes. This will require trimming one or both ends of the panel. Table 2 — Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 — Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8" coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625" ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60° Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta -E color units). Table 1— Minimum Sizes for Montage Plus Posts Fence Posts Panel Height 2 -1/2" x 16 Ga. Up to & Including 6' Height Gate Leaf Gate Height Up to & Including 4' Over 4' Up to & Including 6' Up to 4' 2 -1/2" x 14 Ga. 3" x 12 Ga. 4'1 "to6' 3 "x12Ga. 3 "x12Ga. 6'1" to 8' 3" x 12 Ga. 4" x 12 Ga. be provided by the manufacture of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post -hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. END OF SECTION ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS & FENCING (STEEL) 02826 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK SECTION 02827 — ENCLOSED TRACK GATE SYSTEM WORK INCLUDED A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and appurtenances necessary for installation of the industrial cantilever gate system defined herein. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The manufacturer shall supply a total industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gate system of the Ameristar® TransPort II design, (specify Classic, Majestic, Genesis, or Invincible) style. The system shall include all components (i.e., tracks, uprights, bracing, pickets, hardware, fittings and fasteners) required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.4 REFERENCES QASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt - Spray (Fog) Apparatus. QASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. QASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. QASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. QASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. QASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). QASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. QASTM F1184 — Industrial & Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. The manufacturer's submittal package consisting of gate elevations, hardware details, and installation details, shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism, and theft. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. All industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gates shall conform to the Ameristar® TransPort 11 gate system, (specify Classic, Majestic, Genesis, or Invincible) style, manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. The project gate schedule shall include the following additional information for each cantilever gate included in the project scope: (specify nominal opening size range in feet) opening, and (specify size and shape of posts) gate posts. Contact Matt Bean at Ameristar at 888.333.3422 for information. 2.2 MATERIAL A. The materials used for cantilever gate framing (i.e., uprights, diagonal braces and pickets or pales) shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063 -T -6) with a yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish. The TransPort® Fast - TrakTM rails shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063 -T -6) with minimum yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish. ENCLOSED TRACK GATE SYSTEM 02827 -1 Table 1— Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 — Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8" coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625" ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60° Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta -E color units). B. Material for diagonal bracing and uprights shall be 2" sq. x '/<" aluminum. The design of the top and bottom enclosed track shall conform to the manufacturers 5" x 2" Fast -Trak system. Material for pickets shall be 1" x 1/8" wall aluminum. C. Internal roller truck assembly shall be self - aligning swivel ball- and - socket type running on four bearing wheels. Internal roller truck assembly shall be affixed to the hanger bracket by means of a 5/8" diameter industrial-grade rod end/center bolt, with a minimum static load rating of 10,000 pounds. Attachment of the center bolt to the truck body shall be by means of a swivel joint to ensure equivalent and consistent loading on all bearing wheels and internal track surfaces throughout the travel of the gate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Pickets, enclosed track, uprights and diagonal bracing shall be pre - drilled and labeled for easy assembly. All components shall be precut to specified lengths. B. Top and bottom rail extrusions shall be mechanically fastened to vertical uprights and reinforced with diagonal braces, as required by drawing. C. The manufactured components shall be subjected to the Ameristar thermal sl►atification coating process (high - temperature, in -line, multi- stage, and multi- layer) including, as a minimum, a six- stage pretreatment/wash and an electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The topcoat shall be a "no -mar" TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (specify Black, Bronze, White, or Desert Sand). The stratification - coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. All new gate installations shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. B. All hardware shall be installed in accordance with the Transport installation instructions. Transport cantilever gates shall be installed so they comply with current ASTM F2200 & UL325 standards. C. Gate stops shall be installed on each track in a way that conforms to current ASTM F2200 standards. ENCLOSED TRACK GATE SYSTEM 02827 -2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.2 GATE INSTALLATION A. Gate post shall be spaced according to specified gate elevation. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 48" with a minimum diameter of 12" (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The "Earthwork" and "Concrete" sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core - drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application. 3.3 CLEANING A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post -hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED TRACK GATE SYSTEM 02827 -3 PART 1 - GENERAL DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK SECTION 02830 — LANDSCAPE PLANTING 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor for the following: 1. Installation of trees and shrubs. 2. Protection 3. Maintenance 4. Guarantee 5. Replacement of plants. B. Existing plant material that is to remain shall be thinned, pruned, and all weeds, vines, and trash removed. C. Fertilize all plants for new planting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The contractor shall submit results of pH test and if necessary, his plans for correcting the pH to the owner and the results of the percolation tests prior to beginning planting operations. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be tested for the pH and corrected, if necessary, before planting operations are started. B. Test results shall be submitted to the Architect prior to beginning planting operations. 2.2 TOPSOIL TO BE FURNISHED A. The contractor shall furnish, at his expense, additional topsoil to install all work as specified and as shown on the drawings. The contractor shall provide a soil analysis and report for topsoil to be used for this project. B. Topsoil shall have a "high" rating in each of the basic nutrients tested and a pH ranging from 6.0 to 6.5. C. Additives shall be incorporated in a quantity as recommended in the soil analysis to bring the soil supplied up to standards specified. D. Topsoil shall be from naturally well drained areas. It shall be classified as a loam, silt loam, clay loam or a combination thereof, as determined from the Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineering, USDA triangular soil texture chart. E. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be clean. 2.3 BASIC SLAG AND AGRICULTURE SULPHUR A. Basic slag and agriculture sulfur (for correcting soil pH) shall be standard grade. 2.4 COW MANURE OR SLUDGE A. Cow manure shall be heat treated, weed seed free, and commercially bagged. LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02830 -1 2.6 PEAT B. ALTERNATE: Sludge from the Municipal Sewer Treatment Plant may be used in lieu of cow manure if properly processed and marketed for this specific purpose. 2.5 COMMERICAL FERTILIZER A. Commercial fertilizer shall be 15 -15 -15 (50% organic) formula with trace elements and shall conform to the applicable State Fertilizer Laws. It shall be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing and shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Fertilizer shall not be caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use. A. Peat shall be a domestic product consisting of partially decomposed vegetable matter of natural occurrence. It shall be brown, clean, low in content of mineral and woody material, mildly acidic and granulated or shredded. 2.7 MULCH A. Red Oak mulch shall be clean with consistent chip size, double milled. 2.8. WATER A. The contractor may use the owner's water available on site. B. The contractor shall insure that an adequate supply of water is available for planting. C. The contractor shall furnish all necessary hoses, equipment, attachments, and accessories for irrigation of planted areas. 2.9 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plants — Plants are shown on the drawings with sizes and spacing. B. Nomenclature — The names of plants required under this contract conform to those given in "Standard Plant Names ", latest edition, prepared by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not included therein conform generally with the names accepted in the nursery trade. C. Quantities — Quantities are shown for information only. The contractor is responsible for calculating his own quantities. If there is a conflict between quantities and spacing, spacing shall prevail. D. Quality and Size — Plants shall exhibit growth that is normal for the species and shall be sound, healthy, and free from insect pests, plant diseases, and injuries. Plants shall equal or exceed the measurements specified in the plant list, which are minimum acceptable size. They shall be measured before pruning, with branches in normal position. Any necessary pruning shall be done at time of planting; however, no plants supplied under this contract shall be pruned back to an extent that no longer meets specifications. Requirements for the measurement, branching, grading, quality, balling, and burlapping of plants in the plant list generally follow the code of standard currently recommended by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. in the latest edition of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock ". E. Substitution — Substitution will be permitted only upon submission of proof that any plant is not obtainable within four hundred (400) miles of the site and authorized by the owner of a changed order providing the use of the nearest equivalent obtainable size or variety of plant having the same essential characteristics with prior approval. 2.10 PROTECTION OF ROOTS LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02830 -2 A. Balled and Burlapped Plants — Plants designated `B &B" in the plant list shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary over all be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Secure ball to a platform to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball if required during the process of planting. B. Container Plants — Container grown plants in cans or pots of equal quality as balled and burlapped plants may be substituted. The plants in the containers shall be delivered to the site and remain in the containers until planted. Plants in containers that are severely root bound shall not be acceptable. All plants shall be carefully removed from their containers in such a manner not to injure the roots. 2.11 SAMPLES, TESTS, AND INSPECTIONS A. Notice of Sources — Within ten (10) days following acceptance of the bid, the Architect shall be notified of the sources of the materials. B. Topsoil — The Architect reserves the right to inspect the topsoil to be furnished, to determine if it meets the requirements specified. The contractor shall be required to take representative soil samples from several locations in the area under consideration. Tests will be made by a State or Commercial Soil Testing Laboratory using methods approved by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists or the State Agricultural Experimental Station. Delivery of topsoil may begin after approval of the sample. Soil test results shall be submitted to the Architect prior to beginning planting operations. C. Plants — The contractor shall be responsible for all certificates of inspection of plant materials required by Federal, State or other authorities to accompany shipments of plants. Inspection of plants to be balled and burlapped may be made at the place of growth. All plants must be inspected and approved before they are planted. Inspection and approval by the Architect of plants upon delivery shall be for quality, size, general condition, and variety. PART 3- EXECUTI�N 3.1 PLANTING A. It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate all phases of planting Planting operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the next season or seasons which are normal for such work. At the option and on the full responsibility of the contractor, planting operations may be conducted under unseasonable conditions without additional compensation. 3.2 SPRAYING A. Planting material shall be sprayed as may be necessary, to control diseases and insects and to prevent their spread to other plantings. Materials and methods employed shall be as are commonly used to control the diseases and pests found present and shall not be injurious to persons or structures. 3.3 PRUNING AND REPAIR, A. Upon completion of the work under this contract, all trees and shrubs shall be pruned and any injuries repaired. B. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of transplanting operations. C. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of the plant, however, no plants applied under this contract shall be pruned back to such extent that it no longer meets specifications. LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02830 -3 D. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over three -fourth inch (3/4 ") in diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed; wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water and the treated area shall be coated with an acceptable tree wound paint. 3.4 OBSTRUCTION BELOW GROUND OR OVERHEAD A. It is not contemplated that planting shall be done where the depth of soil over underground construction and obstructions is insufficient to accommodate the roots or where pockets of impervious soil will require drainage. Where such conditions are encountered other locations for the plant material may be designated by the Architect. B. If changes in the location of the work, or if the removal of obstructions involves additional work, the contractor shall not proceed until authorized in writing by the owner. 3.5 PLANTING A. Layout —New planting shall be located where shown on the plans except where obstructions below ground or overhead are encountered or where changes have been made in the construction. Necessary adjustments shall be made only after approval by the owner. No planting shall be placed closer than two feet (2') to pavement or structures except where indicated. B. Planting Pits — Care shall be exercised to have pits dug and soil prepared prior to moving plants to their respective locations for planting to ensure that they will not be unnecessarily exposed to drying elements or physical damage. Square pits with vertical sides shall be excavated for all plants, except for hedge and plant specifically designated on the plans to be planted in beds. Diameter of pits for plant material, trees, and shrubs shall be at least twice the width of the diameter of the ball or spread roots. The depth of pits for trees and shrubs shall be enough to accommodate the ball or roots when the plant is set to finished grade allowing for compacted, prepared soil in the bottom of the pit. C. Planting Mixture. 1. Soil used in planting shall be topsoil, as herein specified, or suitable existing soil, either of which shall be thoroughly mixed with one (1) part peat and one (1) part manure to five (5) parts soil. 2. Poor soils, hardpan, or other soil injurious to plants shall not be used. 3. Except for ericaceous plants, very acidic or sour soil (having a pH of less than 6) shall be thoroughly mixed with sufficient slag to produce a slightly acid reaction (a pH of 6.0 to 6.5). 4. Soil used in planting shall be thoroughly mixed with five pounds (5 lbs.) of 16 -4 -12 (50% organic) formula commercial fertilizer per cubic yard. D. Excess Soil — Excess excavated soil from planting operations shall be disposed on -site as directed by the owner to backfill depressed lawn areas. E. Setting Plants — Plants shall be planted in pits, centered, and set on compacted planting mixture to such a depth that the finished grade level at the plant after settlement will be the same as that at which the plant was grown. Plant upright and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to adjacent structures. Burlap shall not be pulled from under the balls. Platform wire and surplus bindings from top and sides of the balls shall be removed. Roots shall be spread in their normal position. Broken or frayed roots shall be cut off evenly. Planting mixture shall be placed and compacted carefully to avoid injury to roots and to fill all voids. When the hole is nearly filled, add water as necessary and allow it to soak away. Fill the holes to finished grade and form a shallow saucer around each plant, additional soil shall be filled in to the level of the finished grade. F. Mulching — Plants shall be mulched with a three inch (3 ") layer of mulch within two (2) days after planting. This mulch shall entirely cover the area of the planing pit, bed areas and saucer around each plant. LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02830 -4 3.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately upon acceptance following the last operation of installation. B. New planting shall be protected and maintained until installation of all planting is completed plus a minimum of ninety (90) days. C. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, mulching, removal of dead material, re- inserting plants to proper grades or upright position and restoration of the planting saucer. D. Proper protection of lawn areas shall be provided and any damage resulting from planting operations repaired promptly. 3.7 INSPECTION FOR ACCEPTANCE A. Substantial Completion — Substantial completion is determined when installed material is alive and in a healthy condition, approved by the Architect. B. Inspection — Inspection of the work of planting to determine completion of contract work will be made by the Architect at the conclusion of the maintenance period upon written notice. C. Acceptance — After inspection, the contractor will be notified by the Architect of acceptance of all work of this section. Maintenance or other work remaining to be done shall be subject to re- inspection before acceptance. Maintenance of al work will be required by the contractor until the entire planting have been accepted by the Architect. 3.8 PLANT GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee — Work shall be bonded for the entire Contract Price for a period of twelve (12) months from acceptance to ensure replacement of plant material not meeting the guarantee. Plants shall be guaranteed for one (1) year and shall be alive and in satisfactory growth at the end of the guarantee period. B. The contractor shall provide the owner with a written detailed outline for maintenance for the first year. This shall cover all plant requirements needs to assure healthy material at the conclusion of the guarantee period. C. Replacement — At the end of the guarantee period, inspection will be made by the Architect upon written notice requesting such inspection submitted by the contractor at least ten (10) days before the requested date. Any plant required under this contract that is dead or not in satisfactory growth, as determined by the owner, shall be removed from the site. Replace plants as soon as conditions permit, during the normal planting season. D. Materials and Operations — All replacement shall be planted of the same kind and size as specified in the plant list. They shall be furnished and planted as specified under "New Planting ". The cost of such replacements shall be borne by the contractor. E. The contractor shall visit the site on his own schedule during the one (1) year guarantee period to determine if proper maintenance is being conducted. If the contractor determines that the owner is not performing proper maintenance, then he shall outline in writing, in detail, his concerns. END OF SECTION LANDSCAPE PLANTING 02830 -5 DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following site and street furnishings: 1. Benches. 2. Trash receptacles. 3. Picnic Tables. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation for installation of concrete footings. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installation of pipe sleeves, anchor bolts in concrete footings & sidewalks. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descrip- tions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field - assembly requirements, and installation details. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory- applied color finishes. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Size: Not less than 6" (150mm) long linear components & 4" (100mm) square sheet components. D. Product Schedule: For site and street furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Material Certificates: For site furnishings, signed by manufacturers. 1. Recycled plastic. F. Maintenance Data: For site and street furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. G. Submit a per unit price including shipping and all other costs to famish additional units to the fa- cility. Price shall be valid for 12- months after substantial completion (donation items, benches). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain site furnishings through one source from a single manufacturer. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. BRP Enterprises 2. Canterbury International 3. Victor Stanley Inc. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Benches: a. Victor Stanley Inc: "second site systems ". 6' model -8, bench with steel post supports. Slats shall be recycled plastic in wood color and form, with galva- nized steel spline reinforced slates. (800) 368 -2573. 2. Trash Receptacles: SITE FURNISHINGS 02870 - 1 NOTE: Other manufacturers will be considered based on submittal & approval prior to bid. 2.2 MATERIALS a. Victor Stanley Inc: Model RS12, 32 gallon with S -2 lid. Provide 2 -trash recep- tacles with ash urn insert trays on lid, 1 -unit at each shelter A. Steel: Free from surface blemishes and complying with the following: 1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Pipe: Standard - weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53, or electric - resistance- welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135. 3. Tubing: Cold- formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold- rolled, electric- resistance - welded carbon or alloy steel tubing complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500; zinc coated intemally and externally. 5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M. B. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV -light stabilized, and mold resistant. 1. Recycled Polyethylene: Fabricated from not less than 90 percent recycled post - consumer waste by weight content HDPE. C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Stainless steel or Manufacturer's standard, corrosion - resistant- coated or non - corrodible materials; commercial quality; tamperproof, vandal and theft re- sistant; concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged. Provide as required for site and street fur- nishings' assembly, mounting, and secure attachment. 1. Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to below -grade sub- strate; one per leg. 2. Antitheft Hold -Down Brackets: For securing site furnishings to substrate; two per unit. D. Non - shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory- packaged, non - staining, non - corrosive, nonga- seous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufac- turer, for exterior applications. E. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV -light stabilized, mold - resistant, slip - resistant, matte - textured, dipped or sprayed -on, PVC - plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. 2.3 STAINLESS -STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site and street furnishings, where required. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been com- pleted. SI'I E FURNISHINGS 02870 - 2 C. Install site and street furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored and positioned at loca- tions indicated on Drawings. D. Post Setting: Set cast -in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core -drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site and street furnishings and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larg- er than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring ma- terial manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water. F. Pipe Sleeves: Where steel pipe sleeves are used, preset and anchor into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed & placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing site and street furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component. END OF SECTION SITE FURNISHINGS 02870 - 3 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Seeding. 2. Sodding. 3. Lawn renovation. 13 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to be- come topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and per- centage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packag- ing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful lawn establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -time su- pervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil - testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious ma- terial; pH; and mineral and plant - nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfac- tory topsoil. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 1 2.1 SEED B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." 1.7 LAWN MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is es- tablished, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion. a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting sea- son. 2. Sodded Lawns: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion. B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a un- iformly smooth lawn. 1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch. Anchor as required to prevent displacement. C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn- watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water lawn to maintain proper soil moisture for seed germination. Continue water sche- dule for 30 days. After this time provide a minimum of ' /Z" of water twice per week . D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth reaches a 3" height. Mow to 2" in height and repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings as required to maintain specified height. E. Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Apply Lawn Builder Fertilizer (Type 2 — 2.6A) if lawn is installed during growing season 30 days after seeding. Apply at a rate of l lb of nitrogen per 1,000 sf. PART 2 — PRODUCTS A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technol- ogy; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: State - certified seed of grass species, as follows: C. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 1. Princess 77 Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon). 2. Annual Ryegrass (temporary grassing) 3. Reseed to match existing turfgrass type 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, dis- eases, nematodes, and insects, complying with TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 2 B. Turfgrass Sod Species: Tif 419 Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon) 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well - drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land bogs or marshes. 2.4 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2. Class: Class 0, with a minimum 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 3. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone. 2.5 PLANTING ACCESSORIES A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application. 2.6 FERTILIZER A. Slow - Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water - insoluble ni- trogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Starter Fertilizer: 20% nitrogen, 10% phosphorous, and 10% potassium, by weight. 2. Lawn Builder: 30% nitrogen, 3% phosphorous, and 10% potassiumb 2.7 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air -dry, clean, mildew- and seed -free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. 2.8 EROSION - CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion - Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut -fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. B. Erosion - Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable twisted jute or spun -coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb /sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding overspray. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 3 B. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 LAWN PREPARATION A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and le- gally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off -site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 3. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or sub - grade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and ferti- lizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. 3.4 SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. B. Sow seed at the rate of 3 to 4 lb /1000 sq. ft.. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion - control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons /acre to form a continuous blanket 1 -1/2 inches in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil with suitable mechanical equipment. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 4 3.5 HYDROSEEDING 3.6 SODDING 2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at the rate of 10 to 13 gal. /1000 sq. ft.. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adja- cent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas. A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifi- cally designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homoge- neous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one -step process. Apply mulch at a minimum rate of 1500 -1b /acre dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain spe- cified seed - sowing rate. 3. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two -step process. Apply first slurry application at a minimum rate of 500-1b/acre dry weight but not less than the rate re- quired to obtain specified seed - sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch at a rate of 10001b /acre. A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between piec- es of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recom- mended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1 -1/2 inches below sod. 3.7 LAWN RENOVATION A. Renovate existing lawn damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish lawn where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is re- quired. B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil. C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil. D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing lawn. E. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre- emergence herbicides. F. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. G. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. H. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix tho- roughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 5 I. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch or sod as required for new lawns. J. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established. 3.8 SATISFACTORY LAWNS A. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches. B. Satisfactory Sodded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well- rooted, even- colored, viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. C. Satisfactory Plugged Lawn: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been established as well - rooted, viable patches of grass; and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. D. Satisfactory Sprigged Lawn: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs has been established as well - rooted, viable plants; and areas between sprigs are free of weeds and oth- er undesirable vegetation. E. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of ve- hicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Main- tain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. C. Remove erosion - control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 6 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE SECTION 03300 — CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete mate- rials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Slabs -on- grade. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on- grade. A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the follow- ing: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteris- tics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjust- ments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar dia- grams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency. E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified toler- ances. F. Field quality- control test and inspection reports. G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI- certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI- certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete prod- ucts and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equip- ment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdic- tion, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Techni- cian, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI - certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency la- boratory supervisor shall be an ACI - certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine proce- dures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast - in - place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot - weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint -filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor - retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and con- crete protection. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and dam- age. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products speci- fied. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FORM - FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth - Formed Finished Concrete: Form- facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: B. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass- fiber - reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. C. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfac- es. 1. Formulate form - release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form- facing materials. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSrs "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic- protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I,. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse- Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. D. Compressive Strength/Mix Design: Not less than 4,000 PSI at twenty -eight (28) days when tested according to ASTM C39/ C39M 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Air- Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water- soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2.7 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 -1/2 inches long. 1. Products: a. Monofilament Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol IIP. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono. 4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, non- dissipating. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation- Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two- component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two - component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit re- quirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to har- dened concrete. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement - based, polymer - modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic ce- ment as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer- modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic ce- ment as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of labor- atory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than port- land cement in concrete as follows: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 1. Fly Ash: 15 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water - reducing high -range water- reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water- reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water - reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water - cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSFs "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lat- eral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust- stained steel form- facing material. D. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. E. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. G. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. H. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form - release agent, according to manufacturer's written in- structions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, in- structions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with toler- ances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning con- crete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abra- sive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8- inch - wide joints into concrete when cutting ac- tion will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops ran- dom contraction cracks. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sea- lants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limita- tions of ACI 301. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weak- ness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time neces- sary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other em- bedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured sur- face plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. E. Cold - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low tem- peratures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three suc- cessive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F. Hot - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing wa- ter or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough- Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed - surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth - Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and de- fects. Remove fms and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed - surface irregulari- ties. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be cov- ered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull - floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in 1 di- rection. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would tele- graph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin- film -finish coating system. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unle- veled, freestanding, 10 -foot- long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed any- where on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and else- where as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber - bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 2. Coordinate selection of curing compounds for compatibility with dry-shake floor harden- er and revise lists of 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, comply- ing with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temper- atures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection and ACI 301 for hot - weather protec- tion during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.21b /sq. ft. x h before and during finishing op- CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 erations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture - Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cov- er for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture - retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to re- ceive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture - retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to re- ceive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not in- terfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufactur- er unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Architect will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and in- specting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not Less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform addition- al tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal- weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sam- ple. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31M. 7. Compressive - Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive - strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indi- cated. 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contrac- tor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive - strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. 9. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other re- quirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of fi- nishing. END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) A. This Section includes the following: 1. Brick Masonry. 2. Mortar & Accessories. 3. Masonry cleaning Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints. C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal." 3. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to Section 01300 Submittals. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. D. Samples for verification of the following: 3. Full -size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. 4. Masonry mortar samples required showing the full range of color expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on the Project. Label samples to indicate type and amount of materials used. 5. Weep holes /vents in color to match mortar color. E. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material complies with requirements. 1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -1 3. Masonry units. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single - Source Responsibility for Masonry Units and Mortar: Obtain exposed masonry units and mortar of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample walk panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of materials and execution. Build mockups comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the locations as directed by Architect. 2. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and accessories. Include a sealant - filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup. a. Each type of exposed unit masonry brick construction. 3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 5. Retain, protect, and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. c. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air -dried condition. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -2 2.2 BRICK ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Cold- Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold- Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). b.. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. c. 25 deg F ( -7 deg C) and Below: Work not permitted. 2. Cold- Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather - resistant membrane for 48 hours after construction. b. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h (25 km/h). c. 20 deg F ( -7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temp above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction. 3. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. E. Hot - Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime. a. Holnam. b. Giant Cement. c. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. d. Blue Circle A. General: Provide shapes indicated as follows for each form of brick required. 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. 2. Match historic brick size & general color. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 and as follows: 1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -3 net -area compressive strength indicated below: a. Grade: SW., 4400 psi (30.3 MPa). 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sp. in. (g/194 sp. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand- finished brick, shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m). 4. Type: FBS. 5. Size: Bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified inASTMC216: a. Modular: 3 -1/2 to 3 -5/8 inches thick by 2 -1/4 inches high by 7 -1/2 to 7 -5/8 inches long. b. Sand molded surface texture. 6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Color and Texture: Match existing adjacent brick on site (Reese Library, Level 2) a. Boral Brick, 'Woodward Blend ", Modular. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold - weather construction. Provide natural color cement to produce mortar color indicated. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. For pigmented mortars, use premixed, colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black. a. Cement Color: "Natural Gray" C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve: Triple washed masonry sand - Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand from a single sole source supplier for the entire project. 1. Color: Natural off - white. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Ready -Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this Article; combined with set - controlling admixtures to produce a ready -mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. Colors shall be based on Lehigh Cement standard colors. F. Water: Potable. G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Water - Repellent Admixture: a. Dry-Block Mortar Admixture; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co., or Non fatty acid product, only liquid polymer water repellent material with certified performance testing. 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M): Grade 60 (Grade 400). B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 zinc coating. C. Welded -Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon -steel wire, coating class as follows: UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -4 B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated: Wire Diameter for Side Rods and Cross Rods: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). a. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B -2, for exterior walls. b. ASTM A 153, Class B -2, for both interior and exterior walls. C. For single -wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. Provide integral drip for double -wythe installations. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: 1. Galvanized Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 coating for wire ties and anchors in exterior walls. C. Masonry tie to steel stud walls: 1. Dur -O -Wall, DAl23, 16" o.c. horizontal, within 8" of corners & jamb of openings. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. B. Post - installed Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Chemical anchors. 2. Type: Expansion anchors. 3. Corrosion Protection: Stainless -steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors. 4. For Post - installed Anchors in Grouted Concrete Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the loads imposed by masonry. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below: 1. Copper -Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet of weight indicated below, bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass -fiber cloth. a. Weight: 5 ounce per square foot (1.5 kg/sq. m). 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -5 B. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1 -1/2 by 3 -1/2 inches. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, weep hole /ventilators that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: 1) Cell Vent; Dur -O -Wal, Inc. b. Vinyl Weep Hole/Vent: 1) Williams - Goodco Brick Vent; Williams Products, Inc. 2.10 CLEANER Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene. 2. Urethane. A. Non -Acid Sensitive Masonry Cleaner shall be liquid blend of inhibited acidic ingredients and wetting agents formulated as a "carbon solubilizer" for brick. Maximum 5% muriatic acid shall be used. It shall be designed for use with high pressure water rinse, and shall remove atmospheric dirt, carbon, algae, and mold formation from masonry surfaces without harmful abrasives, and shall not "etch" or otherwise harm surface. B. All Acid Sensitive Masonry Cleaner shall be cleaned using a low and medium pressure water washing system, which may be supplemented with a non -ionic detergent if found to be necessary. C. Manufacturers: 1. Acceptable products include but are not limited to the following: (Reference E -03 of General Conditions for substitutions.) a. b. c. 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES Chemprobe/TNEMEC 1. Masonry Cleaners 2. Masonry Clear Sealers — Siloxanne Concentrate. Prosoco 1. Masonry Cleaners 2. Masonry Clear Sealers — Siloxanne Concentrate. Diedrich Technologies 1. Masonry Cleaners 2. Masonry Clear Sealers — Siloxanne Concentrate. A. General: Do not use admixtures, air- entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, use type indicated: Type: S. 3. For reinforced masonry use type indicated: Type: S. 4. For exterior, above - grade, load - bearing and nonload- bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load - bearing walls; for interior nonload- bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated: Type: S. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches (50 mm) in horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches (50 mm) or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough -in and built -in construction to verify actual locations of connections prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build single -wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. C. Cut masonry units with motor - driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full -size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water - cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Cross - Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/4 inch (12 mm). E. Variation in Mortar -Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary bed joint thickness from bed joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary head joint thickness from adjacent head joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less - than- half -size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -7 coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 -unit length for one -half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built -in Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. G. Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: (See drawings for pattern, stacked stone.) 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) joints. B. Tool exposed joints "V" jointed when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Rake CMU stone pattern joints to an even score depth to match width of joint. 3.6 HORIZONTAL -JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond opening. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 04200 -8 3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants. C. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 -2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property and shall be removed from the Project site for his use. B. Disposal: Dispose of masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil - contaminated sand, by removal from site. Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. UNIT MASONRY (BRICK) 1. At composite masonry walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe. END OF SECTION 04200 -9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cast stone and masonry trim shapes. 2. Window sills and watertable 3. Column and masonry wall cast stone wall caps. 4. Anchors and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4, "Unit Masonry". 2. Division 7, "Joint Sealants & Gasketing ". 1.2 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete Institute. B. ASTM A 615/A 615M — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plan Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM C 33 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. D. ASTM C 150 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement. E. ASTM C 270 — Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. F. ASTM C 494 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. G. ASTM C 642 — Standard Test method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete. H. ASTM C 979 — Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. I. ASTM C 1194 — Standard Test Method for Compression Strength of Architectural Cast Stone. J. ASTM C 1195 — Standard Test Method for Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone. K. ASTM D 2244 — Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. L. Technical Manual — Cast Stone Institute. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions; details of reinforcement and anchorages, if any; and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples: For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches (250 mm) square in size. CAST STONE 04720 -1 D. Full-Size Samples: For each type of cast stone unit required. Make available for Architect's review at Project site before installing cast stone. 1. Approved Samples may be installed in the Work. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364. 2. Include licensed State of Georgia professional Structural Engineers' qualifications. 3. Provide stamped & professional Structural Engineered drawings for cast stone lintels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of cast stone with requirements indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single manu- facturer. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source/producer for each aggregate. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable protected packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide -belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets w /nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to pre- vent condensation. B. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing 913 -422 -7575 2. Cut Art Stone Company 912- 235 -4680 3. Architectural Cast Stone Corp. 4. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc. 5. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Cut Art Castings Co. 7. Stonco. 8. United Cast Stone. 2.2 CAST STONE MATERIALS CAST STONE 04720 -2 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as needed to produce required texture and color. D. Fine Aggregates: Manufactured or natural sands complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as needed to produce required texture and color. E. Air- Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible w /other admixtures used. 1. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 5 to 7 percent. F. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M. 1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M. G. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. 2.3 CAST STONE UNITS A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. B. Reinforce units as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy- coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) of material. C. Fabricate units w /sharp details accurately reproduced w /indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cure and finish units as follows: 1. Cure units in totally enclosed curing room under dense fog and water spray at 95 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. 2. Yard cure units until the sum of mean daily temperatures for each day equals /exceeds 350 deg F. 3. Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces indicated to be finished. E. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect; conforming with approved Architect's sample. "Off White" Provide samples of manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. F. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine - grained texture and color resembling Indiana limestone to match Georgia Veterans Cemetery, Milledgeville. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Reference Section 04810 B. Color to match cast store. 23 ACCESSORIES CAST STONE 04720 -3 A. Reference Section 04810 B. Provide galvanized or epoxy coated steel concealed anchors. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. B. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type S. 1. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment -to- cement ratio of 1:10, by weight. 2. Packaged Portland Cement -Lime Mix Mortar: Use portland cement -lime mix of selected color to match approved sample. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing stone units. B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments necessary to secure units in place. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. C. Drench units with clear water just before setting as recommended by cast stone manufacturer. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 2. Fill collar joint solid as units are set. E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Brush and scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. CAST STONE 04720 -4 B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean cast stone by bucket and brush hand - cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20 Revised II, using job -mixed detergent solution. 5. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protection: Provide protection of installed work to prevent damage to cast stone. Remove and replace all damaged units. END OF SECTION CAST STONE 04720 -5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY (CMU) A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Specialty faced colored masonry units: a) Split -faced concrete masonry unit — colored b) Beveled -faced concrete masonry unit — colored 3. Mortar & Accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4 "Cast Stone" for cast lintels, sills and trim. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints. 3. Division 7 Section 04500 "Masonry Restoration and Cleaning ". C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal." 3. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area: fm = 2000 psi (13.8 MPa), unless noted otherwise. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to Section 01330 Submittals. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. D. Samples for verification of the following: 1. Full -size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. 2. Masonry mortar samples required showing the full range of color expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on the Project. Label samples to indicate type and amount of materials used. 3. Weep holes /vents in color to match mortar color. E. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material complies with requirements. 1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -1 F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 3. Masonry units. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single - Source Responsibility for Masonry Units and Mortar: Obtain exposed masonry units and mortar of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. B. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample walk panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of materials and execution. Build mockups comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the locations as directed by Architect. 2. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and accessories. Include a sealant - filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup. a. Each type of exposed unit masonry brick construction. 3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 5. Retain, protect, and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. c. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air -dried condition. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -2 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Cold - Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold- Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). b. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. c. 25 deg F ( -7 deg C) and Below: Work not permitted. 2. Cold- Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather - resistant membrane for 48 hours after construction. b. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 milk (25 km/h). c. 20 deg F ( -7 deg C) and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temp above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction. 3. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. E. Hot - Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime: a. Holnam. b. Giant Cement. c. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 2. Masonry Units a. Augusta Concrete Block b. Metromont c. Dixie Concrete Company d. Dillon & Company 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged veneer units for outside corners with 8" return face, except exposed UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -3 interior partition comers. 3. Provide integral colored masonry units for smooth and split faced units exposed to view. Color to be selected by Architects from Manufacturer's complete catalog. 4. Textures: a. Split -faced b. Smooth -faced c. Smooth scored -face B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 -94a and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength indicated: 2000 psi (13.8 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff. 4. Size Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: a. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3 -5/8 inch (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inch (150 mm) nominal: 5 -5/8 inch (144 mm) actual. c. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7 -5/8 inch (194 mm) actual. d. 16 inch (400 mm) nominal: 15 -5/8 inch (397 mm) actual. 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's color and texture selected by the Architect, unless otherwise indicated. C. Split -faced Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength indicated: 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions indicated for non - decorative units. 4. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description matching color, pattern, and texture of Architect's sample. a. Normal- weight aggregate, split -face finish 8 "H x 16 "L. b. Normal- weight aggregate, so units laid in stone bond appear as units laid in stacked bond, split -faced finish and smooth as indicated on drawings. 5. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units produced w/liquid polymeric, integral water - repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made w /integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made w /mortar containing integral water - repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, w /test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide units made with: water repellant admixture. 1) No fatty acid products, only liquid polymer water repellent material. 2) Manufacturer of masonry units shall certify that units meet water repellent manufacturer's prequalification test for performance w /written confirmation from the products manufacture. 3) Manufacturers: a) W.R. Grace: "Dry- Block" b) Addiment Inc.: Mortar tite c) Master Builder's: Color core 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold - weather construction. Provide natural color cement to produce mortar color indicated. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. For pigmented mortars, use premixed, colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -4 (1.18 mm) sieve: Triple washed masonry sand - Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand from a single sole source supplier for the entire project. 1. Color: White sand for colored mortar. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Ready -Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this Article; combined with set - controlling admixtures to produce a ready -mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. Colors shall be based on Lehigh Cement standard colors. F. Water: Potable. G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Liquid type Water - Repellent Admixture: 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M): Grade 60 (Grade 400). B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 zinc coating. C. Welded -Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon -steel wire, coating class as follows: a. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B -2, for exterior walls. b. ASTM A 153, Class B -2, for both interior and exterior walls. B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated comer and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated: Wire Diameter for Side Rods and Cross Rods: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). C. For single -wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. Provide integral drip for double -wythe installations. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: 1. Galvanized Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B -2 coating for wire ties and anchors in exterior walls. C. Masonry tie to stud walls: 1. One anchor / 35F veneer area, 16" o.c. horizontal, within 8" of corners & jamb of openings. 2. Type: 3/16" Galvanized wire, with .067" Galvanized strap, adjustable anchors. Attaced with 2 galvanized wood screw fasteners each. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Dayton Superior / Dur — O — Wall. b. Holmann and Bernard c. Wirebond 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -5 A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. B. Post - installed Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Chemical anchors. 2. Type: Expansion anchors. 3. Corrosion Protection: Stainless -steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors. 4. For Post - installed Anchors in Grouted Concrete Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the loads imposed by masonry. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Laminated Flashing Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below: 1. Copper -Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet of weight indicated below, bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass -fiber cloth. a. Weight: 5 ounce per square foot (1.5 kg/sq. m). 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: a. Perm -A- Barrier Wall Flashing; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. b. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. c. Advanced Building Products; Peel -n -seal. 2. Carrier sheet: a. Stainless steel, .020" 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene. 2. Urethane. B. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1 -1/2 by 3 -1/2 inches. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, weep hole /ventilators that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Weep Hole/Vent: 1) Cell Vent; Dur- O -Wal, Inc. (plastic). 2) Williams - Goodco Brick Vent; Williams Products, Inc. (vinyl). 3) Advanced Building products (mortar maze). 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, air - entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -6 B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Lunt cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, use type indicated: Type: S. 3. For reinforced masonry use type indicated: Type: S. 4. For exterior, above - grade, load - bearing and nonload- bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load - bearing walls; for interior nonload- bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated: Type: S. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches (50 mm) in horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches (50 mm) or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough -in and built -in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build single -wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. C. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full -size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water - cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external comers, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -7 D. Variation in Cross - Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/4 inch (12 mm). E. Variation in Mortar -Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary bed joint thickness from bed joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary head joint thickness from adjacent head joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than- half -size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. 1. Running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below (wainscott and columns) 2. Stone pattern; double stack bond above wainscott. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 -unit length for one -half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built -in Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of pre - grouted frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. H. Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: (See drawings for pattern, stacked stone.) 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) joints. B. Tool exposed joints, jointed when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -8 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concave to led CMU stone pattern joints to an even score depth to match width of joint. 2. Tool concave joint shape on concrete masonry unit, wainscot and ground -faced concrete masonry unit. 3.6 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond opening. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 LINTELS A. Provide masonry or cast stone lintels where shown and where openings are of more than 24 inches (610 mm) for block units shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide built -in -place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built -in -place lintels until cured. 2. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide 3/8" thick galvanized steel angle lintels to support masonry 3.8 FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At composite masonry walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe. 3.9 FOAM CORES A. Drill masonry joint and inject foam in cavity of all 8" CMU Exterior wall masonry cores, from finish floor to roof/top of wall. Fill all non - reinforced cores. Fill and repair holes to match adjacent mortar joint color & texture. Clean mortar joint after repair has achieved initial cure. B. Reference Division 7 for injected foam insulation. C. Install injected foam in ALL 8" thick concrete block partition walls. 3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -9 fill with mortar. Point -up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants. C. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 -2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Final Completion and acceptance. 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property and shall be removed from the Project site for his use. B. Disposal: Dispose of masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil - contaminated sand, by removal from site. Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY (CMU) 04810 -10 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 5 — METALS SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS A. This Section includes the following: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles. 5. Loose steel lintels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Templates: For anchors and bolts. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold - formed steel tubing. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Re- move sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distor- tion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. 2. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. D. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bear- ing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 2.4 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 2. Shop Priming Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fire- proofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exte- rior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fas- tened to in -place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into con- crete, masonry, or similar construction. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, or shims. After bearing mem- bers have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood framing, furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed. 13 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for the following products: 1. Pressure Treated wood products. 2. Engineered wood products. C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. D. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative - treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne - treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. E. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. F. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence the following products' compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Engineered wood products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single - Source Responsibility for engineered wood products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from one source and by a single producer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterbome chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wood- Preservative - Treated Materials: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corp. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc. 2. Laminated- Veneer Lumber: a. Boise Cascade Corporation b. Georgia Pacific Corporation c. Louisiana - Pacific Corporation d. Pacific Woodtech Corp. e. Trus Joist MacMillan. f. Union Camp Corp.: Building Products Division g. Willamette Industries, Inc. 3. Parallel- Strand Lumber: a. Trus Joist MacMillan 4. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metals Products, Inc. e. Silver Metal Products, Inc. f. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. United Steel Products Company, Inc. A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Grade of lumber: Structural Select. 2. Species: White fir or southern yellow pine. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.3 WOOD - PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor bathers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including equipment curbs ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -2 and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board -size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species. 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated- Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi for 12 -inch nominal depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi. B. Parallel -Strand Lumber: A composite of wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12 -inch nominal depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000.000 psi. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272. C. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M) D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, which meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc - coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. C. Joist Hangers: U- shaped joist hangers with 2- inch- (50 -mm -) long seat and 1 -1/4- inch- (32 -mm -) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: [0.050 inch (1.3 mm)] D. Rafter Tie -Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3 wall studs below 2 -1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER -272 for power - driven staples, P- nails, and allied fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. "Table 1705.1 -- Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building Code. E. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; pre -drill as required. F. Use hot -dip galvanized or stainless -steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. 3.2 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.3 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Triangular- pitched roof trusses. 2. Scissor roof trusses. 3. Girder trusses. 4. Truss accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5, Section "Metal Fabrications" for rough hardware anchoring trusses to con- crete or masonry structures. 2. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof and floor sheathing of structural -use pa- nels and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06176 — METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES A. Metal- plate - connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal- plate- connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect metal- plate - connected wood trusses to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on drawings. 2. Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span due to total load. b. Roof Trusses: Horizontal deflection at reactions of 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) due to total maximum load. 3. Design structural systems according to professionally recognized methods and standards. 4. Design under supervision of professional engineer licensed in the State of Georgia with all engineering submittals stamped, sealed, and signed. 5. Design Loads: a. Applicable Building Code: Georgia Adopted Standard Building Code, IBC 2000 with GA Amendments. b. Roof Live Load: In accordance with IBC, non - reducible. c. Roof Snow Load: In accordance with IBC. d. Roof Wind Load: Calculate in accordance with applicable code, using 105mph Basic Wind Speed, Exposure, Category per IBC, and Importance Factor of 1.0. e. Collateral Loads: 5 psf minimum. Include not less than the following: 1) Suspended ceiling. 2) Suspended equipment and lighting. 3) Gypsum Ceiling. f. Roof system shall have UL 580 Class 105 wind uplift rating. g. Seismic Loads: Calculate in accordance with applicable code, for State of Georgia, Occupancy Group Business. 1) Seismic Hazard Exposure Group: 1. 2) Seismic Performance Category: C. 3) SdS = 0.35; Sdl = 0.17 h. Dead loads, including the weight of all indicated permanent construction. i. Design roof system to withstand specified loads with deflection in accordance with IBC. j. Anchor Bolts: Furnish design criteria for anchor bolts furnished by others, to resist the loads induced by the design loads on the structure. METAL- PLATE - CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 1 k. Provide galvanized metal hurricane hold -down clips on all truss and framing bearing connections. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who uses a qualified professional engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural and installation data for metal- plate- connected wood trusses. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification Section 01330. B. Product Data for lumber, metal -plate connectors, metal framing connectors, bolts, and fasteners. C. Shop Drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, and orientation and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. 1. Truss design is fabricator's responsibility, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, licensed in Georgia. 2. Include truss Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. Conform to design configurations shown on drawings. D. Product certificates signed by officer of truss fabricating firm certifying that metal- plate - connected wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified requirements and Shop Drawings. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire- retardant- treated wood products with requirements indicated. G. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. H. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) Board of Review. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative- treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne- treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to truss fabricator. J. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to Architect that evidence the following products' compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Metal -plate connectors. 2. Metal framing connectors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed wood truss installation similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. METAL- PLATE - CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 2 B. Fabricator's Qualifications: Engage a firm that complies with the following requirements for quality control and is experienced in fabricating metal- plate - connected wood trusses similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance: 1. Fabricator participates in a recognized quality- assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute (TPI); or other independent inspecting and testing agency acceptable to Architect and Owner. C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. ANSI/TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal- Plate- Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI HIB "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI DSB "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." D. Metal-Plate Connector Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality - control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in ANSI/TPI 1. E. Single - Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from one source and by a single manufacturer. F. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of AFPA's "National Design Specification for Wood Construction" and it's "Supplement." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's written instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. C. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Connector Plates: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Computrus, Inc. c. Mitek Industries, Inc. d. Robbins Manufacturing Company. e. Tee -Lok Corporation. f. Truswal Systems Corporation. 2. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. b. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. c. Silver Metal Products, Inc. d. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. f. United Steel Products Co. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER METAL - PLATE- CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 3 A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified, to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. D. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National Design Specification for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." Products produced in Georgia are preferred where applicable. 2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with requirements indicated below. B. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural- quality steel sheet, zinc coated by hot -dip process complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; Grade 33 and not less than 0.0359 inch (0.91 mm) thick. C. Electrolytic Zinc - Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591M), structural- (physical) quality steel sheet, zinc coated by electrodeposition; 33,000 -psi (230 -MPa) minimum yield strength, coating class C, and not less than 0 0474 inch (1.20 mm) thick. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified be- low for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts and Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of structural capacity, type, size, metal, and finish indi- cated that comply with requirements specified, including the following: 1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evi- dence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for this Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall METAL- PLATE - CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 4 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2.7 FABRICATION be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc - coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock - forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 or DOD -P- 21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. B. Protective Coatings: Provide one of the following coating systems: 1. SSPC -Paint 22, epoxy - polyamide primer. 2. SSPC -Paint 16, coal-tar epoxy- polyamide black or dark red paint. 3. SSPC -Paint 27 and SSPC -Paint 12, basic zinc chromate -vinyl butyral wash primer and cold - applied asphalt mastic. A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close - fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure un- iformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously into both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of -plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to recommendations of TPI and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Space, adjust, and align trusses in location before permanently fastening and as follows: 1. Truss Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. G. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening sche- dules and written instructions. H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built -up girder trusses. 1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are ap- plied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. METAL-PLATE-CONNECIED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 5 1. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel -chord floor trusses at centers indicated. 2. Brace all gable end trusses. J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1. K. Do not cut or remove truss members. L. Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator and replace with trusses that do meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in the field. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of embedded -metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer of coating system. END OF SECTION METAL- PLATE - CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 6 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.3 SUBMITTALS DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Exterior structural columns and support brackets. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view and for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 5. SCMA - Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 6. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 7. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 8. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. A. Product Data: Each type of process and factory fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and colors. 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for trim and moulding type of material indicated. C. Samples for verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non - factory applied finish; with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (203 by 250mm) for panels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy level during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plywood: a. Champion International Corp. b. Georgia Pacific Corp. c. Hardel Mutual Plywood Corp. d. K Ply Inc. e. Louisiana Pacific Corp. f. McKenzie Forest Products g. Pacific Wood Laminates, Inc. h. Plum Creek Timber Company, L.P. i. S.D.S. Lumber Co., Bingen Plywood Division 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.3 WOOD PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS A. Water - Repellant Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: AWPA Nl. 1. Preservative Chemicals: 3- iodo -2- propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) combined with insecticide containing chloropyrifos. 2. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. 3. Application: Exterior trim. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Semitransparent - Stained Applications: Kiln -dried lumber with surfaced (smooth) face and of the following species and grade: 1. Clear All Heart redwood; RIS. 2. Clear Heart VG (Vertical Grain) westem red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WM:MPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln -dried stock and graded under WMIvIPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for Semitransparent Finish (Stained Finish): N -grade redwood or westem red cedar. 2. Fascia and flat trim: clear redwood 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails /screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum 1 -1/2" into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -2 B. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic -resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. 2.6 FABRICATION 1. Stainless steel. 2. Hot -dip galvanized steel. 3. Aluminum. A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm). C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16 -inch (1.5 -mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) radius. 2.7 STRUCTURAL COLUMNS AND SUPPORT BRACKETS A. Custom fabricated columns and support brackets. B. Milled from clear laminated redwood to shapes shown on drawings. C. Standard shapes will be considered pending approval by Architect. 2.8 SIDING AND TRIM A. Flat Trim: 5/4 x various width solid clear pine boards to match existing dimensions. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Seal lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and seal ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -3 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32 -inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 -inch maximum offset for reveal installation. Subparagraph below, based on NFPA 101 requirements, is an example only. Revise if more stringent tolerances are required. Coordinate with framing requirements for stairs in Division 6 "Rough Carpentry" Section. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full- length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight -fitting joints with full- surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi- exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -4 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation, ceilings, stud walls and cavity walls. a. Rigid Vented roof insulation. b. Injected foam — masonry. c. Unfaced attic insulation — blown or batt. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4, Unit Masonry Section for cavity wall installations. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for insulation installed as part of wood - framed wall and partition assemblies. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire- test - response characteristics, water -vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. A. Single- Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test- response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface - Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire - Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -1 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Extruded Board Insulation (wall cavity and roof): a. Amoco Foam Products Company. b. DiversiFoam Products. c. Dow Chemical Co. d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens- Corning Co. e. CertainTeed Corporation. f. Owens - Coming Fiberglas Corporation. g. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Unfaced Mineral Batt Insulation (sound batts 3 'h "): a. Owens Corning Fiberglass. b. Certainteed. c. Guardian. 3. Composite Roof Insulation Board (R -19) 7/16" OSB Nail board faced.: a. Apache: Vented Nail Line. b. Atlas Roofing Corp.: AC Foam Nail Base "Vented -R ". c. Cellotex Corp: "Celo- vent ", Vented Nail Line. d. Cornell Corp: "Vent -Top Therma Col 1 ". e. R -Max Inc: "Vented Nailable Base ". f. Johns - Manville: Nail board. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated below: 1. Type V, 3- lb /cu. ft. (48- kg/cu. m) minimum density. 2. Surface - Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. 3. Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered polystyrene resins. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core formed by using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent and faced on both sides with aluminum foil to comply with referenced standards and with other requirements indicated below: 1. Federal Standard: FS HH -I- 1972/1, Class 1 (nonreinforced core) or 2 (reinforced core). 2. ASTM Standard: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2. 3. Surface - Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm). 4. Thermal Resistivity: 7.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (50 K x m/W at 24 deg C). D. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2. Surface - Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. E. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor - retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less); with foil- scrim -kraft, foil - scrim, or foil - scrim - polyethylene vapor - retarder membrane on 1 face. 1. Mineral -Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -2 2. Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5 -inch- (127 -mm -) wide flanges along edges for attachment to framing members. F. Reinforced Vinyl Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: See Section 13125 for pre - engineered buildings (Maintenance Bldg.) G. Composite Vented Nailable Roof Insulation: 1. Federal Standard: FS 1{H -I- 1972/1, Class 1 (nonreinforced core) or 2 (reinforced core). 2. ASTM Standard: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2. 3. Surface- Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm). 4. Thermal Resistivity: 7.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (50 K x m/W at 24 deg C) 5. 7/16" OSB nail -base laminated to insulation. 6. 1/2" vented core with vapor barrier. 7. Comply with all accessories for maximum uplift protection for 105 mph wind resistance. 8. LTTR value: 3 'A" = 19.4 H. Foamed -in -Place Core Insulation: Injected Foam cellular thermal insulation, two components amino- plast resin and catalyst foaming agent surfactant, propelled by compressed air into masonry core. Material shall have Class A fire rating, free of CFC's formaldehyde, and petrochemical compounds. Minimum R -Value of 4.8 /in. Inject in all non - reinforced cores of masonry units. Provide material from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. — "Core -Fill 500 Foam Insulation ". 2. C.P. Chemical Co., Inc. — "Tripolymer Foam Insulation ". 3. Foam Products, Inc.; Fomo Foam. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Galvanized anchors applied with stainless steel screws and galvanized mounting plates. PART - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates /conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in substrates and related work are specified/determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment. B. Examine waterproof membrane and make repairs prior to installing insulation board. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -3 D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive & use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Conform to wind loading and uplift resistance per IBC2000 for 105 mph wind speed. B. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. a. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. b. Form a vaportight barrier on inside face of exterior stud walls. D. Permanently anchor insulation to substrates or cavity to prevent displacement. Provide and coordinate installation to form a complete thermal envelope. E. Inject all exterior block wall un- reinforced cells with foam insulation from finish floor to top of wall/roof. 3.5 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from water or damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. B. Sequence the work with vapor barrier and waterproof membrane installation. END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 7 — THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07311 - COMPOSITE SHINGLE ROOFING A. This section includes, but is not limited to, the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment for installing fiberglass shingle roofs. The work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Setting roof deck nails where found projecting above finish surface of existing roof sheathing to provide a smooth surface for application of the new underlayment and fiberglass shingles. 2. Installing ice and watershield membrane over entire roof deck. 3. Installing 30 pounds asphalt fiberglass felt underlayment over the entire roof. 4. Installing composite fiberglass shingles. 5. Installing roof vents, edge drip and metal flashing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood Roof Sheathing. B. Section 07620 — Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM D 224 - Standard Specification for Smooth - Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt). C ASTM D 225 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (organic felt) surfaced/mineral granules. D. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self- Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. E. STM D 3018 - Standard Specification for Class A Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules. F. STM D 3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind - Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan- Induced Method). G. STM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules. H. TM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. I. STM D 4869 - Standard Specification for Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt Shingle Underlayment Used in Roofing. J. STM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers printed product information indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. 1. Submit manufacturer's 25 -year roof shingle warranty. COMPOSITE SHINGLE ROOFING 07311 -1 C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide published instructions that indicate preparation required and installation procedures. D. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance from an independent laboratory indicating that the asphalt fiberglass shingles made in normal production meet or exceed the requirements of the following: 1. ASTM E 108/UL 790 Class A Fire Resistance. 2. ASTM D 3161/UL 997 Type I Wind Resistance. (80 mph wind speed) 3. ASTM D 3462. E. Shop Drawings: Indicate specially configured metal flashing, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods and locations, and installation details, as required by project conditions indicated. F. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of full line of available colors for selection by Architect. 1. Roof shingle. 2. Submit colors samples of pre- finished aluminum for Architects' color selection. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of manufacturer's application instructions on project site. B. Verify that manufacturer's label contains reference to specified ASTM standards. C. Staples will NOT be permitted for installing shingles. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Take special care when applying WinterGuard Shingle Underlayment and shingles when ambient and wind chill temperatures are below 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Tack WinterGuard in place. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 33 square feet (1- bundle) of extra shingles of each specified color. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish shingle manufacturer's warranty for products of this section as follows: 1. Minimum. 25 -year warranty. B. Warranty Supplement: Provide manufacturer's supplemental warranty to cover all labor and materials in the event of a material or installation defect for the first five years following period after completion of shingle installation: PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products conforming to this specification manufactured by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation, Architectural Support Group; P.O. Box 860, Valley Forge PA 19482; ASD. Tel. (800) 233 -8990, Fax. (610) 341 -7940. Landmark 30 Series "Architectural Style Shingles" 2. GAF: "Timber Line 25" 3. Owens Corning: "Oakridge II FR" 4. Elk Corp.: "Prestique 11— Raised Profile" COMPOSITE SHINGLE ROOFING 07311 -2 2.2 COMPOSITE FIBERGLASS SHINGLES A. Square, 25 -year Architectural shingles: Conforming to ASTM D 3018 Type I - Self - Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, UL 997, ASTM D3161 Wind Resistance, and UL Class A Fire Resistance; glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/UV resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; one -piece tab shingle. 1. Shingles: Rectangular algae resistant strip shingles conforming to Federal Specification SS -S -00 1534, (GSA -FSS) UL Wind Resistand and Class "A" fire rating. Contractor shall furnish the Roofing Manufacturers Standard Roofing Warranty for a period of not less than twenty -five (25) years from the date of acceptance. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors: Certainteed "Heather Blend" 3. Algae resistance: minimum of 5- years. 23 SHEET MATERIALS A. Self Adhering Polymer- Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 mils thick (SBS). Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Eave Protection: ASTM D 1970 sheet barrier of self - adhering rubberized asphalt membrane shingle underlayment having high traction surface, internal reinforcement, and "split" back plastic release film; provide material with warranty equal in duration to that of shingles being applied. Acceptable manufacturers: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. WinterGuard: Certain Teed Corporation 2. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield: W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Nordshield Ice and Watergard: Nord Bitumi US, Inc. 4. Moisture Guard: Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. 5. Weather Watch: GAF Building Materials Corporation. 6. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard: Protecto Wrap Co. 7. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108 -AG: Royston Laboratories, Inc. C. Glass -felt Underlayment: ASTM D 2178 Type IV, asphalt impregnated glass felts. 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet Flashing: ASTM B 209; 0.025 inch (0.63 mm) thick aluminum, prefinished kynar coating finish or 16 oz. copper. B. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. C. Tinners Paint: Color as selected by Architect to coordinate with shingle color. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire type roofing nails, corrosion resistant; hot dipped zinc coated steel, aluminum, or chromated steel; minimum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) head diameter; minimum 11 or 12 gage (2.5 mm) shank diameter; barbed shank to be of sufficient length to penetrate 1/8" through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood, plywood, or non - veneer wood decking Nails should be approved by roof manufacturer. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, asphalt roof cement. C. Ridge vents: Nail on shingle cap preformed ridge vent. D. Drip: 16 oz. Copper, 2" hemmed drip with 6" leg extension under shingles. E. Screws, bolts, expansion shields, etc. shall be non - corrosive type match flashing materials. COMPOSITE SHINGLE ROOFING 07311 -3 F. Sealant: One -part gun grade, non -sag polyurethane sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT- S- 00230c equal to Vulkem 116 by Mamico International. Color to match metal. 2.6 FLASHING FABRICATION A. Form flashing to profiles indicated on Drawings, and to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 2.8 METAL FLASHING AND EDGE DRIP STRIP A. Form flashing and edge drip strip from 16 oz copper pre - finished and cut from sheets in maximum lengths. Joints and /or seams shall be not less than 12' apart. End of each length shall be jointed by a 3 ", sealant sealed, lapped seam. "Natural Color." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions on site. B. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.2 ROOF DECK PREPARATION A. Follow shingle manufacturer's recommendations for acceptable roof deck materials. B. Broom clean deck surfaces and underlayment prior to their application. 3.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Installation shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Applicable requirements contained in latest edition of the publication entitled "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" issued by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association, 6288 Montrose Road, Rockville, MD 20852. A copy of this manual must be kept on file in Contractors jobsite office during the entire construction. 2. The manufacturers written installation instructions. 3. This Specification. 4. In case of conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. 3.4 INSTALLATION — EAVE AND VALLEY PROTECTION A. Place eave edge and gable edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 3 inches. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches (200 mm) on center. B. Apply elastic membrane underlayment as eave protection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Extend eave protection membrane minimum 12 inches up slope and over entire roof deck. 3.5 INSTALLATION - PROTECTIVE UNDERLAYMENT A. Apply one layer of self - adhered membrane (SBS), shingle fashion over all roof areas with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 6" (152 mm). Stagger end laps each consecutive layer. Nail in place with plastic cap, ring shank nails. COMPOSITE SHINGLE ROOFING 07311 -4 B. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement items projecting through or mounted on roof. Do not allow solvent based cements to contact underlayment. C. Underlayment: Over roof sheathing apply a single thickness of underlayment by lapping each course over the preceding one 19 ", starting with a 3" Strip, end laps not less than 6 ". Nailing of felt shall be as recommended by the shingle manufacturer. Install underlayment over the metal drip edge along eaves and under the metal drip edge on the rakes. Lap the felt 6" from both sides over all hips and ridges. 3.6 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING A. Weather lap joints minimum of 3 inches. B. Seal work projecting through or mounted on roofing with plastic cement and make weathertight. 3.7 INSTALLATION - ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for product type and application specified. 1. Use nails with spacing conforming to manufacturer's installation instructions and tested assemblies. 2. All roofing shall be installed water and weather - tight, and free of leaks. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed by Contractor to ensure compliance with installation instructions. B. Visual inspection of the Work will be provided by Architect. Correct unacceptable work. 3.9 ACCESSORIES A. Coordinate work with other roof items and flashing to be furnished and installed on the roof. B. Where sheet metal or sheet metal accessories are to be installed in other work, the materials shall be furnished with accessories for installation. C. Lines and angles shall be sharp and true. All surfaces shall be free from waves and buckles. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work. B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION COMPOSITE SHINGLE ROOFING 07311 -5 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07411 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS A. This Section includes the following: 1. Standing -seam roof panels. 2. Flashing and trim closures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural -steel framing. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing not part of roofing and other sheet metal work. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field - applied sealants. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies complying with performance requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into the building interior. B. Air Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with permanent resistance to air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 L/s/sq. m) of fixed roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a static -air- pressure difference of 4.0 lbf/sq. ft. (192 Pa). C. Water Penetration: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting, wind -load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lb/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12.0 lb/sq. ft. (575 Pa). D. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies that meet requirements of 105 mph wind -uplift resistance per IBC2000. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel assemblies. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, underlayment, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field- assembled work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts or chips showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for roof panels with factory- applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: Provide sample panels 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps, battens, fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of manufactured roof panel assemblies and materials with MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1 performance and other requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed metal roof panel projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated roof panel assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire- Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package panels for protection against damage during transportation or handling. B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify location of structural members and openings in substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating roof panels without field measurements or allow for trimming panel units. Coordinate roof construction to ensure actual locations of structural members and to ensure opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Finish Warranty: Submit a written warranty, signed by manufacturer, covering failure of the factory- applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the specified warranty period and agreeing to repair finish or replace roof panels that show evidence of finish deterioration. Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film integrity. C. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Architect's Final Certification. D. Special Weathertight Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace metal roof panel assembly that fails to remain weathertight within the specified warranty period. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 2 E. Weathertight Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Architect's Final Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panels by one of the following: 1. Steel Roof Panels: Length of panel shall be full length of roof. Standing locked seam. a. Atlanta Metal Products: locked seam b. Berridge Manufacturing Co.: locked seam c. IMETCO, Inovative Metals Company, Inc., locked seam d. Merchant & Evans, Inc., Interlock Roof System. e. CENTRIA, (H.H. Robertson Company /Smith Steelite): SRS -3 2.2 METALS AND FINISHES A. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M) and the following requirements: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275); structural quality. 2. Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Finish: Apply the following organic coating in thickness indicated. Furnish appropriate air - drying spray finish in matching color for touchup. a. Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's (Kynar 500 Coating System) standard 2 -coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight with a total minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 523. 1) Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214; and without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units. 2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Standing -Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory- formed, standing -seam roof panel assembly designed for concealed mechanical attachment of panels to deck. 1. Clips: Provide minimum 0 0625 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick, stainless -steel or hot - dipped galvanized panel clips designed to meet negative -load requirements locate per wind -uplift requirements. 2.4 THERMAL INSULATION A. See Section 07210 for composite rigid insulation and nail base 2.5 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self- Adhering, Polymer- Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 mils (1 mm) thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation. b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. c. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Nord Bitumi US, Inc. d. Moisture Guard; Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. e. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation. f. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard; Protecto Wrap Co. g. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108 -AG; Royston Laboratories, Inc. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 3 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and accessories required for a complete roof panel assembly and as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Self- tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self - locking rivets and bolts, end - welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Use stainless -steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized steel fasteners for interior applications. 2. Provide metal- backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. Use concealed fastening methods. 3. Where exposed fasteners are necessary, locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. C. Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, coping, fascia, mullions, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashing, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels. 1. Sealing Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. 2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in panel roofing and remain weathertight. Provide sealant recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 7 -mil (0.2 -mm) dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. E. Ridge Vent: Screened and flashed continuous prefinished metal ridge vent with cap, flashing and counter flashing Provide integral water dam. Minimum 22 gauge cap. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to -metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel roofing. 1. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examine roof decking and insulation to verify that other secondary structural panel support members have been installed according to written instructions of panel manufacturer. 2. Do not proceed with roof panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work; flashing; trim; and construction of decks, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal panels. Strip with care to avoid damage to finish. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 4 3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Install panels with concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install panels over solid substrate with minimum 312 (1:4) slope. Install 1 ply of self adhering underlayment from lower edge up, with at least 3 -inch (75 -mm) side laps and 4 -inch (100 -mm) end laps. B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. C. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating, by applying rubberized - asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. D. Install felt underlayment and building -paper slip sheet on roof deck under metal panels, unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal panels. Apply from eave to ridge in shingle fashion and lap joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm). E. Coat back side of metal panels with bituminous coating where it will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. F. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Install weatherseal under entire metal roof area. Flash and seal panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. 2. Seal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Standing -Seam Roof Panel Assembly: Fasten panels to supports with concealed clip according to panel manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install clips with self - drilling/self- tapping fasteners thru insulation to metal deck. 2. At end laps of panels, install tape calk between panels. 3. Install factory-seals at standing -seam joints. Locking panel to provide a weathertight joint. 4. Seaming Complete seaming of panel joints by operating portable power -driven equipment of type recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint. H. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07411 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL SECTION 07530 - SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING A. This Section specifies single -ply membrane roofing systems, including related insulation and auxiliary materials. B. Type of roofing systems specified in this Section using single -ply membrane roofing include the following: 1. Fully adhered membrane. C. Single -ply membrane roofing includes the following: 1. Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer (EPDT) FR. D. Roof insulation related to single -ply membrane roofing is specified in this Section: Mechanically attached rigid insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary single -ply membrane roofing from a single manufacturer. Manufacturer of roofing system shall own facilities capable of producing membrane. Secondary materials shall be provided by a single -ply manufacturer (including insulation) wherever possible. All other secondary materials recommended by the single -ply manufacturer but cannot be provided by the single -ply manufacturer shall be approved and recommended by the single -ply manufacturer. B. Installer: A firm with successful experience installing roof systems similar to those required for this project and acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials for five years, installing a minimum of four labor and materials warranted projects per year similar to those required. Installed projects shall have been inspected by membrane manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations from manufacturers of single -ply membrane roofing system materials for types of roofing required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. Samples of finished roofing sheets, including T shaped side/end - lap seam, and as follows: 1. Pre - roofing Conference: Before installing roofing and associated work, meet at Project site, or other mutually agreed location, with Installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, including (where applicable) Owner's insurer, test agencies, governing authorities, Architect, and Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours' advanced notice to participants prior to convening pre - roofing conference. 2. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory" for application indicated, with Class A rated materials/system for roof slopes shown. Installed system shall have a class A rating. 3. Special Project Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by Manufacturer of primary roofing materials and its authorized Installer, agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship as required to maintain roofing system in watertight condition. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents C. Warranty period is 15 years after date of substantial completion, for Labor and Material and a 20 year warranty against premature deterioration of the membrane itself. Warranty shall include all materials supplied by the primary membrane manufacture including insulation. SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 -1 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. EPDT Membrane: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer formed into uniform flexible sheets complying with ASTM D -4637, Type 1. 1. Class- Reinforced 2. Thickness:.06" (1.5 mm). 3. Exposed Face Color: Black B. Fully Adhered EPDT Membrane: Manufacturer's standard installation, except where details show otherwise. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carlisle Syntec Systems. 2. Firestone Building Products Co. 3. Verisico D. Auxiliary Materials: Tape Seams. Adhesive field seams are acceptable. Manufacturer's standard tape materials minimum thickness of 37 mils for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended by manufacturer of single -ply membrane system. When completed, all field seams shall be also stripped using 5" tape flashing E. Flashing Material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with single -ply membrane. F. Walkway Protection: Prefabricated concrete pavers are not acceptable. Pre - formed EPDT walkway shall be used in all walkway areas and surrounding all mechanical equipment, which might require maintenance. All access doors shall have a minimum of two pads running perpendicular to the opening. Walkway pads shall surround all equipment on the roof which requires periodic maintenance; access door sides of equipment requiring maintenance shall have two rows of walkway pads running the length of the unit. G. Insulating Materials: Provide materials as follows:(manufactured by membrane manufacture and included in warranty). H. Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, cellular, thermal insulation with polyisocyanurate closed -cell foam core and manufacturer's standard facing laminated to both sides; complying with FS HH -I- 1972/2, Class 1. I. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids. J. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion - resistant type as provided by membrane manufacturer for deck type, and complying with fire and insurance wind -uplift rating requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Preparation of Substrate: Comply with manufacturers' instructions to prepare substrate to receive single -ply membrane system. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to single -ply membrane system work. Remove sharp projections. C. Install cant strips, flashings, and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer even though not shown. SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 -2 D. Prime substrate where recommended by manufacturer of materials being installed. E. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors, and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other work. F. Insulation Installation: Minimum thickness 1". Extend insulation full thickness in two layers or in multiple layers over entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Form cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. G. Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger joints in both directions between courses with no gaps to form a complete thermal envelope. H. Do not install more insulation in a day than can be covered with membrane before end of day and before start of inclement weather. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 sq. ft. of surface area. I. Membrane Installation: Start installation only in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. J. Fully Adhered, Single -ply Membrane: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. Apply tape to surfaces to be bonded and roll single -ply membrane into place. Install additional tape in exposed seam as shown on detail sheet. Install mechanical fasteners, flashings and counterflashings, and accessories at locations and as recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The applicator shall have the sole responsibility for the accuracy of all measurements, and for the estimate of all material quantities required and necessary to satisfy the requirements of these specifications. B. Wood Nailers: Wood Nailers shall be installed as specified by the project designer as noted in membrane manufacturer's details. Wood Nailers must be pressure treated (i.e. "Wohnanized" or "Osmose K -33 "). 1. Position Wood Nailers: Total wood nailer height shall match the total thickness of insulation being used and shall be installed with 1/8" gap between each length and at each change of direction. 2. Secure Wood Nailers: Wood Nailers shall be firmly fastened to the deck. Mechanically fasten Wood Nailers to resist a force of 200 lbs. per lineal foot. Refer to attachment requirement as specified by the project designer. END OF SECTION SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 -3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 13 SUBMITTAL 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Drip and trim. 2. Scuppers, Downspouts & Copings B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. 3. Division 7 Section "Asphalt Shingle" 4. Division 7 Section "EPDM Single -Ply Roofing A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand 95 mph wind speed, wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to Specification Section 01330, "Submittals ". B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product conforming to performance requirements paragraph 1.2,A. C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 8 -inch square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has complete sheet metal flashing and trim work in similar material, design for a minimum of five years and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Warranty: Provide warranty in which installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal flashing and trim that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Architect's Final Certificate. A. Prefinished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Type 3003 or 3004 H14; minimum 0.032" (0.5 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. Dark Bronze, Kynar 500. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -1 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder for use with copper, use solder as recommended by the sheet metal manufacturer. B. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, used with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless -steel sheet manufacturer; use a noncorrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces. C. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or noncorrosive stainless steel as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather - resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5- pound/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B -790, Type 1, Style lb. H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. (Latest edition 2012.) B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather- resistant performance once installed. Sheet metal fabricator is responsible for details and dimensions controlled by the drawings; and shall make filed measurements for verification of these dimensions. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate non - moving seams in sheet metal with flat - double -lock seams. Tin edges of copper to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. F. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact w /asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -2 B. Exposed Trim, Drip Trim: 1. Fabricate from the following material: .032 in. aluminum Kynar 500 finish — Dark Bronze. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather - resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inch, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. F. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red -rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of sealant where required for waterproof performance. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Final Completion and acceptance. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Joints between different materials. b. Perimeter joints between materials and frames of doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non - traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and windows. d. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for through - penetration firestopping systems. 2. Division 8 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing. 1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration ofjoint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 Section. B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. D. Certificates from manufacturers ofjoint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING 07901 -1 manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi- component materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS. A. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. B. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL. A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS. A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Schedule at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated. 2.3 SOLVENT- RELEASE -CURING JOINT SEALANTS. A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, non -sag, solvent- release- curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT -S -00230 or both, with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 1. 12 -1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 25 percent. B. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, non -sag, solvent - release- curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be non- staining, paintable, and have a tack -free time of 24 hours or less. C. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent - release - curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acrylic Sealant: a. "60 +Unicrylic," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc. JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING 07901 -2 2.5 SILICONE SEALANT c. "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc. d. "Mono," Tremco, Inc. 2. Butyl Sealant: a. "BC- 158," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 757," Protective Treatments, Inc. c. "Sonnebom Multi- Purpose Sealant," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. d. "Tremco Butyl Sealant," Tremco, Inc. 3. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: a. "PTI 200," Protective Treatments, Inc. 2.4 LATEX ACRYLIC JOINT SEALANTS. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one -part, non -sag, mildew- resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. B. Acrylic - Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acrylic - Emulsion Sealant: a. "AC -20," Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. 2. Silicone- Emulsion Sealant: a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. A. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 1. Silicone sealant Manufacturer's: (Exterior, integral color, grade NS Type S) a. Dow Coming 795. b. Pecora; 865. c. G.E. Silicone; SilPruf NB SCS 9000. d. Tremco; Spectrem 1. 2. Conform to selected sealant manufacturer's recommended system in each application. 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING. A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non - staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non - staining, non - waxing, non- extruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Open -cell polyurethane foam. 2. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non- outgassing in un- ruptured state. JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING 07901 -3 3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed -cell polymeric foam, non- outgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms /cc per ASTM C 1083. 4. Any material indicated above. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F ( -32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS. A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non - staining, non - absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Pre - molded joint fillers: Williams Products, Inc. 1. Backer Rod. 2. Gasket. 3. Ceramic filler. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION. A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION. A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING 07901 -4 B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant - substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS. A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. F. Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides ofjoint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of j oints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING. A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers ofjoint sealants and of products in which joints occur. JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING 07901 -5 Type S Single Type M Multi- Component Grade NS Class 50 "M" Mortar Glass Aluminum Other Preformed Foam Sealant 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.5 PROTECTION. A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 CAULKING & SEALANTS SCHEDULE. A. Sealants: 1. Exterior: Integral Color Exterior Silicone, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50: a. Windows, frames & door frames. b. Precast Stone joints: Use "M." c. Color match adjacent material. d. Roof flashing: Use "A." e. Glazing: Use "G." f. Other: Use "0." 2. Interior: Caulking, Type S, Silicone, Grade NS, Class 50: a. Wet areas: 1. Mildew resistant, Use "0." 2. Color match grout color & adjacent fixture colors. b. Painted joints: Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use "M, G, A & 0." c. Caulk all open joints & dissimilar materials. d. Caulk all plumbing fixtures to floor, wall & counters. B. Reference: END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS & GASKETING 07901 -6 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors, frames and hollow metal window frames, materials installation and accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to Section 01330 Section. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire - test - response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to State Fire Marshal. 1. Temperature -Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard - wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) high wood blocking. Avoid using non - vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames. a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products. (Basis of design) c. Curries Co. d. Fenestra Corp. e. Kewanee Corp. f. Mesker Door, Inc. g. Pioneer Industries. h. Republic Builders Products. i. Steelcraft. j. D & D Specialties, Inc. k. Rediframe products, Rediflex (Basis of design) 2.2 MATERIALS 2.3 DOORS A. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial - quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M). B. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc - coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M), commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0598 -inch- (16 gage) thick steel sheet; 0.0598 - inch- (16 gage) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames. Wire anchors are not acceptable. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. A. Steel Doors: Provide 1 -3/4" thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models specified below: 1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy -duty, Model 1, 4 -panel design, minimum 0 042 -inch- (18) minimum thickness, cold - rolled steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy -duty, seamless design, minimum 0.042 -inch- (18 gage) thick galvanized steel sheet faces, with insulated core. Embossed four panel door design. Insulated core, galvanized & shop -primed door and frame. 3. Vertical edges: Continuous weld. 4. Top closure: Flush closing channel, spot welded & fully sealed joints. 5. Reinforcing: Provide minimum 12 gage steel lock, hinge and closer reinforcement. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules, minimum 16 gage with concealed fastenings, fully welded with integral stops. Fabricate frames of minimum 16 gage thick cold - rolled steel sheet. 1. 16 gage kerfed adjustable throat frame galvanized steel for exterior door frames. 2. 16 gage non -kerf adjustable throat frame cold rolled steel for interior door frame. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -2 3. Floor anchors: Provide minimum 16 gage floor anchors punched for bolting to floor. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single - door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double - door frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179 -inch- (0.45 -mm -) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D. Grout: Required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." Grout frames in interior gypsum partitions as detailed and in conformance with tested fire rated assembly. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards: a. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591, Exterior doors. b. Mineral Core for rated and tested door assemblies. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between non - fire -rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non -flush units, from only cold - rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold - or hot - rolled steel sheet. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0 0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 1. At exterior locations. F. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal- insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Provide thermal-rated assemblies with U -value rating of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.33 W /sq. m x K) or better. G. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For door closers, provide space, reinforcing, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface - applied hardware may be done at Project site. I. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHl) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -3 J. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0 0359 -inch- (0.9 -mm -) thick steel. 1. Provide non - removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw - applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc -dust- content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD -P -21035 or SSPC -Paint 20. B. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air -dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT -P -641, Type II. 2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC -SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC -SP 8 (Pickling). B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field - Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field - applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In all partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel - stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -4 C. Door Installation: Fit metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke - Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air- drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -5 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges. 2. Lock cylinders and keys. 3. Lock and latch sets. 4. Exit devices. 5. Closers. 6. Overhead holders and Door Control Devices. 7. Protection plates. 8. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. 9. Thresholds. 10. Door stops and bumpers 11. Panic devices. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Div 8 Section "Metal Doors and Frames" for factory pre -fitting and factory pre - machining of doors for door hardware and for silencers integral with frames. 2. Div 8 Section "Panel Wood Doors" for factory pre -fitting and factory pre - machining of doors for door hardware. D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Hardware suppliers locksmith 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes, materials, and fire rating. h. Keying information. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential product data in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit final schedule after samples, product data, coordination with shop drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted. 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in- service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. 2. Hardware supplier on this project must make an on -site inspection to be certain new hardware has been properly adjusted and installed. 3. Suppliers must be authorized by hardware manufacturer. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. D. Service duty is "Detention Grade" — abusive environment 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. All hardware shall have the screws, bolts, and fastenings for its installation, packed in the same package with the hardware. All packages shall be legible and adequately labeled indicating the location for which they are needed. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Provide 4 -hours of training for maintenance and adjustment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Any substitution for products must be approved in writing by the Architects ten (10) days prior to bid opening. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -2 following: See Hardware Schedule. B. Approved manufacturer's of locksets hardware: 1. Schlage. 2. Sargent. 3. Best. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying w /these standards & requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1. b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2. c. Exit Devices: ANSBBHMA A156.3. d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6. g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7. h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8. i. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13. j. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16. k. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self- tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. F. Use through -bolts for installation of door closers on wood doors. Provide sleeves for each through -bolt or use sex screw fasteners. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -3 2.4 HINGES & BUTTS A. Templates: Provide only template - produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors, install wood screws #12 x 1 -1/4 -inch. 3. For fire -rated mineral core wood doors install half - surface hinges with through bolts. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Non - removable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Non -rising pins. 3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 2. For fire -rated mineral core wood doors install half - surface hinges with through bolts. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Establish new keying system. B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master). C. Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable -core Maximum Security Keying System tumbler inserts, Grade 1 cylinders as listed in ANSIBHMA A156.5 and that have been tested for pick and drill resistance requirements of UL 437 and are UL listed. 1. Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period. 2. Manufacturer shall furnish final cores and keys to project site for installation by contractor's locksmith. 3. The Contractor shall have the hardware supplier visit the site when the permanent lock cores are installed to remedy any installation problems that may arise. 4. The Contractor shall have the hardware supplier visit the job site when the installation of hardware is complete to inspect for installation and operation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. E. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying. F. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. G. Key Distribution: 1. Deliver keys to Owner with key control system. 2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3- piece, antifriction latch bolts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide dust -proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides non - recessed strike for bolt. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8 -inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -4 requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2" minimum throw of latch for other bored & preassembled types of locks. Provide 1" minimum throw for all dead bolts. 2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. B. Access -Free Closers: Where closers are indicated for doors, all are required to be accessible to the physically handicapped. Provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 and ADAAG provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. C. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. 2.8 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self - tapping screws. B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1 -1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. 1. Metal Plates: Stainless Steel, 0.062 inch (U.S. 16 gage). D. Provide latch guards to protect strike from vandalism. 2.9 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Jambs, Head & Sill/Bottoms: Provide with door for weathertight assembly. 1. Door bottom drip & brush sweeps. 2.10 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and ADA Handicap profile. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws of the proper type for permanent anchorage and/or bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal. Cut and fit thresholds to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hairline joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts, and similar items. B. Exterior Hinged Doors: Provide units not less than 4" -wide, fabricated to accommodate door hardware & fit door frames, as scheduled. 2.11 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets: 1. Locksets & Latchsets: US 26D. B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA and adopted by the Owner. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -5 C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix " -NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. F. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry- recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. 1. Rust - Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required for exterior work and in areas shown as "High Humidity" areas (and also when designed with the suffix -RR), provide 0.2 -mil -thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass, bronze, nickel, or chromium plated finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and ADA Handicap provisions. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 3. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl - rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy & make final check, adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. 2. All locks to be Masterkeyed to new keying system. 3. Locks must be furnished with 2 change keys each & all locks must have wrought strike boxes. B. List of Manufacturers: 1. LCN 4040/4041 - Closers 2. Schlage (SG) Recreation Department Master Keying System. 3. Stanley McKinney (SM) - Hinges, Spring hinges 4. Rockwood (RW) Glynn- Johnson (GJ) Baldwin - Push/Pull/Kick plates, Flush bolts, Door stops and Silencers 5. Pemko, National Guard (PK) - Thresholds, Weatherstrip, Sweeps C. Hardware Schedule: Hardware Set No. [1]: Exterior 3' 0 "x7' - 0" Mechanical/Storage Room Function [3] Ball Bearing Butts (ST) FBB179 -US26D 4 '/2 x 4'h, N.R.P. [1] Mortise Storeroom Lever Locksets (SG) 84 -8204 LNL -US26D x MK, knurled lever handle [1] Closer w/ stop/holder (SG) EN1431 -UO x TB [3] Silencers (RW) 608 [1] Thresholds (PK) 171A -36" [1] Sweeps (PK) 315CN -36" [1] Weatherstrip (PK) 303AV- 36x84" [1] Bottom Drip (PK) 345 Hardware Set No. [2]: Exterior 3' -0' [3] Ball Bearing Butts [1] Closer w/ stop [1] Push Plates [1] Pull Plates [2] Kick Plates [1] Floor stops [3] Silencers [1] Deadbolt [1] Power Supply [1] Magnetic Lock Hardware Set No. 131: Gate Exterio [2] Sets [2] Keeper Pin [2] Keyed Lockset DOOR HARDWARE 'x7' -0" Toilet Function (ST) (SG) (RW) (RW) (RW) (RW) (RW) (SG) (SG) (SEC) FBB179-US26D 4 'A x 4 ' /z, N.R.P. EN1431 -UO x TB (w/ limit arm stop) 70C -US32D 4x16 132x70C -US32D 4x16 8x34 -US32D .050ga 440 US26D 608 Keyed Cylinder, thumb -turn deadbolt, US32D BPS24 -1 M62 (frame mounted) & push -out release button r — Double Gate Gate Door Hardware Security Spring Hinges S.S. Keeper Pin with padlock for fixed leaf, reciever & guides. Double keyed lockset; remains locked (2) Keyed Cylinders. END OF SECTION 08710 -7 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 9 — FINISHES SECTION 09255 — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonload- bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel or wood framing. 3. Fire rated walls and ceiling systems. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping systems and fire - resistance -rated joint sealants. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.3 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire - resistance ratings indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility for Steel Framing Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single- Source Responsibility for Panel Products and Finishing Materials: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Fire -Test- Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire- Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner provided in fire - resistance -rated assemblies GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -1 indicated is labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing, Inc. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Dale Industries, Inc. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. Marino/Ware (formerly Marino Industries Corp.). f. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. g. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia - Pacific Corp. c. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. d. United States Gypsum Co. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated: 1. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board; Domtar Gypsum. 2. Firestop Type C; Georgia- Pacific Corp. 3. Fire - Shield G; National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. 4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core; United States Gypsum Co. 5. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core; United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR NON -LOAD BEARING PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch- (5 -mm -) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -2 requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0359 inch (20gauge) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3 -5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Depth: 1 1/2 & 2 '/z inch furring studs where indicated. 4. Conform to proprietary fire rated framing systems, ie: USG shaftwall and horizontal shaft fire rated enclosure systems. Provide UL tested system components for a complete tested fire rated assembly. C. Furring Brackets: Serrated -arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion - resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. D. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold - rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch (1.5 -mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 -inch- (11.1 -mm -) wide flanges, 1 -1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb /1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M), length and width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) where indicated. F. Fasteners for Metal Framing Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. G. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 'A-inch- (12.7 -mm -) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web). 23 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end -to -end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm). B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies. 3. Type: Proprietary type as required for specific fire- resistance -rated assemblies. 4. Edges: Tapered. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch, minimum (15.9 mm). 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated. c. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -3 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use pressure- sensitive or staple- attached, open- weave, glass -fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged, job - mixed, chemical- hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water - resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 3. For topping compound, use sandable formulation. D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. c. All- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot- grouting hollow metal door frames. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. D. Sound- Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in to the Work include, but are not limited to the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic - rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC -170 Rubber Base Sound b. Pecora Corp.; BA -98 c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. d. Saint Gobain, V730 (Basis of design) C. Isolation Strip at Interior Walls: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive - backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/4 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLES 09255 -4 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of above ceiling wall bracing at all interior partitions. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at non -load bearing walls to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. a. Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire - resistance -rated assemblies where indicated. 1) Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud clip. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural framing or deck. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For STC -rated and fire - resistance -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor /roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. 1. Single -Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA -219, and with applicable published recommendations of GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -5 gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch (12.7 -mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. B. Install sound - attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Install wall panels vertically to minimize and eliminate end butt joints. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings where possible. E. Attach gypsum panels to studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Grout hollow metal door frames for solid -core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply grout at each jamb and head and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. H. Cover both faces of stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to 9.5 -mm -) wide joints to install sealant. I. Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound - flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. B. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: Fasten with screws. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -6 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install comerbead at external comers. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install U -bead where edge of drywall is exposed.. D. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. C. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA -214. 1. Level 1 - for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. (embed tape in joint compound) and seal joints. 2 Level 4 - for gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. (embed tape in joint compound and apply first and second coat of joint compound sanded smooth for paint finish) D. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or taping compound. 2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or topping compound. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -7 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE A. Work under this Section includes materials & labor: 1. Ceramic wall tile and base. 2. Porcelain floor tile 3. Setting materials. 4. Grout materials. 5. Waterproof membrane. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03540 — Self- leveling Concrete topping. B. Section 07950 — Caulking and Sealants. C. Section 09255 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. D. Section 10800 - Toilet, Bath Accessories. E. Division 22 — Plumbing Fixtures. 13 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar. B. ANSI A108.1B - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. D. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry- Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex- Portland Cement Mortar. E. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile- Setting and - Grouting Epoxy. F. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar /Grout. G. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tile work. H. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. I. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. J. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. K. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex- Portland Cement Mortar. L. M. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts. M. ANSI A118.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar Grout. N. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. CERAMIC TILE 09300 -1 O. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes For Thin -Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installations. P. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. Q. ASTM C 242 - Standard Terminology of Ceramic Whitewares and Related Products. R. TCA (HB) - Handbook For Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Tile and Dimension Stone: a. Manufacturer's product data indicating compliance with specified requirements. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Setting Materials and Grout Materials: a. Manufacturer's product data indicating compliance with specified requirements. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (M.S.D.S.) 3. Tile Backerboard: a. Manufacturer's product data indicating compliance with specified requirements. 4. Waterproof Membrane: a. Manufacturer's product data indicating compliance with specified requirements. C. Selection Samples: 1. Tile and Dimension Stone: For each tile type specified, minimum 4 inch by 4 inch samples indicating manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. 2. Grout Materials: For each grout type specified, minimum 2 inch long samples indicating manufacturer's full range of available colors. D. Verification Samples: 1. Ceramic and Porcelain tile: For each tile type and color, or tile color pattern, submit two (2) 12 in. by 12 in. panels on tempered hardboard substrates, grouted with specified grout type and color. 2. If more than one grout color specified for individual tile type and color, or tile color pattern, submit two (2) additional tile sample panels for each grout color specified. E. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Contractor's certification that: 1) Products of this section, as provided, meet or exceed specified requirements. 2) Manufacturers of products of this section meet specified qualifications. 3) Installers of products of this section meet specified qualifications. b. Manufacturers' certifications that materials are suitable for intended use. c. TCA Master Grade Certificates; ceramic and porcelain tile. d. Certified results of water testing of shower waterproof membrane. 2. Manufacturer's instructions: a. Tile: Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. b. Setting Materials and Grout Materials: 1) Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2) Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (M.S.D.S.) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Tile and Dimension Stone Manufacturers Minimum five (5) years documented experience producing respective products specified in this section. 2. Setting Materials and Grout Materials Manufacturer: Tile Council of America, Inc. Licensee CERAMIC TILE, 09300 -2 2.2 TILE MATERIALS for Dry-Set Mortar and Grouts, with minimum five (5) years documented experience producing respective products specified in this section. 3. Installer: Minimum five (5) years documented experience installing respective products specified in this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials on site a minimum of 24 hours before use. B. Acceptance at site: Accept only materials in original containers, with seals unbroken and labels intact. C. Store materials in dry, heated area on site in original containers, with seals unbroken and labels intact, until time of use; prevent damage to materials such as chipping, breakage, freezing, or excessive heat; prevent contamination by water, moisture, foreign matter, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures at minimum 60 degrees F during installation of cementitious materials and for 72 hours after installation. B. Vent temporary heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tile work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ceramic / Porcelain Stone Tile: a. American Ocean. b. Dal-Tile. c. Crossville Ceramics. (Basis of Design) d. Summitville Tile e. Florida Tile 2. Setting Materials and Grout: a. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. b. Bonsal. c. Holnam. d. Custom Building Products. B. Supply each specified product from a single manufacturer; supply all setting materials and grout materials from a single manufacturer. A. Porcelain Tile: 1. Acceptable Product: Porcelain floor tile. 2. Characteristics: a. Nominal Size: 1. Floors: 8 "x8" non -slip, "slate textured ", through color porcelain, selected by Architect from manufacturers full line. 2. Wall Tile: Nominal 8 "x8" glazed ceramic wall tile. (up to 3 -color random pattern) b. Nominal Thickness: 3/8" to 1/2" based on size of tile. c. Grade: TCA Master Grade. d. Color and Finish: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors and textures. e. Matching coved base for walls. 2.3 MEMBRANES AND UNDERLAYMENTS A. Membrane Underlayment: CERAMIC TILE 09300 -3 1. Acceptable Product, but not limited to: Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete No.1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing Kit. 2. Characteristics: Anti- fracture, load- bearing, bondable membrane material for bridging minor shrinkage cracks in substrate; conforming to ANSI A118.10. B. Self - Leveling Cementitious Underlayment: 1. Acceptable Product, but not limited to: Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Self - leveling Underlayment (Cementitious). 2. Characteristics: Portland cement, modified with acrylic admixtures for improved self - leveling and curing performance. C. Waterproof Membrane: 1. Acceptable Product, but not limited to: Southem Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Deck Seal 1000 Membrane. 2. Characteristics: Anti- fracture, load - bearing, bondable membrane material; conforming to ANSI A118.10. 2.4 MORTARS AND ADHESIVES A. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: 1. Acceptable Product: (but not limited to) Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; TCA -759 (Premium) Thinset Mortar, gauged with Southcrete 25 Acrylic Mortar Admixture. 2. Characteristics: Dry-set mortar with latex to be used as replacement for all or part of gauging water; conforming to ANSI A118.4. 2.5 GROUTS A. Latex- Portland Cement Grout: 1. Acceptable Product: (but not limited to) Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Security Polymer Grout. 2. Characteristics: Dry-set grout with dry polymers added in re- emulsifiable powder form, factory- mixed; conforming to ANSI A118.6 H -2.4. 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Spacers for Porcelain Paver Tile: Plastic; size specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions for tile thicknesses and joint widths indicated. B. Threshold: Aluminum tapered transition edge strip; full door frame width, full depth of frame, thickness equal to depth of tile and bed, transition edge beveled 45 degrees. Clear anodized aluminum or stainless steel with non -slip textured finish. C. Miscellaneous Accessories: Supply additional components specified in ANSI and TCA specifications for indicated installations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that moisture content of substrates are within tolerances recommended by setting materials manufacturer. 2. Verify that horizontal substrates are formed to required slopes. 3. Verify that substrates meet requirements specified in referenced TCA details. 4. Verify that locations and widths of required expansion joints are indicated on drawings. B. Installer's Examination: 1. Have installer examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed, including but not limited to conditions specified in paragraph above, and submit written notification if substrates or conditions are unacceptable. CERAMIC TILE 09300 -4 3.2 PREPARATION 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt of report. 3. Proceeding with construction activities of this section before unacceptable substrates and conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of substrates and conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed. A. Horizontal Cementitious Substrates: 1. Grind high spots of concrete slabs to achieve specified tolerances. 2. Install specified underlayment to bring horizontal substrates to specified tolerances. 3. Clean surfaces free of dust and debris; acid -etch concrete slabs. B. Vertical Cementitious Substrates: 1. Grind high spots of concrete surfaces to achieve specified tolerances. 2. Apply skim coat of specified latex - portland cement mortar to bring vertical cementitious substrates; including concrete, concrete unit masonry, plaster, and cementitious backer units; to specified tolerances. 3. Clean surfaces free of dust and debris; acid -etch concrete surfaces. 4. Turn -up waterproof membrane to form "pan." C. Cementitious Backer Units: (Floor and Walls) 1. Fill gaps between panels with specified latex - portland cement mortar; embed 2 inch wide fiberglass mesh tape in skim coat of the same mortar over joints and in corners. 2. Apply skim coat of same mortar to bring wall to acceptable tolerances; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended thickness of materials. 3. Allow material to cure in accordance with mortar manufacturer's instructions before application of additional materials. D. Protect surface of adjacent products and materials before beginning construction activities of this section. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install in accordance with the TCA Methods recommended for substrates. B. Install waterproof membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install waterproof membrane over all floor surfaces and flash up walls 6" min. 2. Install 10 mil. vapor barrier below wall tile backerboard and ships lap seal to floor membrane. 3. Flash and seal all membrane penetrations. 4. Water test membrane for watertight seal. C. Mix and install proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Expansion control: 1. Form expansion control joints in accordance with TCA EJ171 -95. 2. Except where saw -cut cold expansion joints are indicated on drawings or otherwise indicated, provide expansion control joints where tile abuts vertical surfaces, where file abuts dissimilar surfaces, where structural joints or changes of materials occur in tile substrate, as indicated on drawings, and as follows: a. Tile expansion joints over structural joints: Provide joint in tile same width as structural joint. b. For thickset tile . installation, provide tile edge each side of file expansion joint. c. Provide removable joint filler strips in expansion joints; allowing mortar or grout to migrate into joint cavities is prohibited. d. After grout has cured, and after cleaning of tile surfaces, remove filler strips and install joint backing materials and sealers in accordance with Section 07900. E. Install tile in accordance with referenced TCA details, including specifications and references contained therein. CERAMIC TILE 09300 -5 1. Extend into recesses, and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Cut tiles only with powered cut -off blade and drill holes in tiles, where required, using powered carbide-tip drill bit; cut or drilled tiles having chipped or broken edges are prohibited. 3. Cut tiles less than '/ full tile dimension each way are prohibited. 4. Maintain joint widths between tiles as specified in tile manufacturer's installation instructions; use spacers at corners of tile units or factory- assembled sheets of tile units. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS A. General: 1. Provide tile edge where floor tile abuts dissimilar floorcovering materials. 2. Provide thresholds at doors and openings, except where tile is continuous between spaces; field -cut notches for door stops. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, install ceramic tile border of no less than '/ tile perpendicular and parallel to adjacent vertical surfaces. Installed field tile centered in space at 45 degree angle or custom pattern as indicated. B. Threshold: Aluminum Transition strips per handicap accessibility requirements. 3.5 GROUTING A. Cure set tile in accordance with the following: 1. Cure tile 72 hours before grouting when temperature is low or humidity is high. 2. Cure tile 48 hours before grouting when hot, dry conditions exist. 3. Check bond strength of tile before grouting. B. Grout tile in accordance with the following, using grout materials specified: 1. Latex Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.1/2 2. Remove grout from tile surfaces while still plastic, as grouting progresses. 3.6 CLEANING A. After completion of setting and grouting, clean tile surfaces using cleaning methods and materials recommended by tile manufacturer and grout materials manufacturer. B. Except as specifically recommended by both tile manufacturer and grout materials manufacturer, acid cleaning of file and grout surfaces is prohibited; in such instance, clean tile and grout surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturers' instructions for acid cleaning, including protection of adjacent products and materials. C. Seal grout after cleaning and curing (3 to 6 weeks). 3.7 PROTECTION A. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective work. B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Protect installed tile in accordance with ANSI specifications and manufacturer's instructions; use Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. D. Remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces not more than 24 hours before final inspection. END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILE 09300 -6 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09900 - PAINTING A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory- finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valves, damper operators and linkages. b. Sensing devices. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 4. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Semi -gloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when PAINTING 09900 -1 1.3 SUBMITTALS measured at a 60- degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis /instructions for handling, storing & applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certifications by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish -coat material indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide two 12 -inch- square samples for each color and finish b. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) square samples of flat metal and two 8 -inch- (200 -mm -) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. b. Final approval of colors will be from job - applied samples. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers PAINTING 09900 -2 bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory- sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance w/ requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Sherwin - Williams Co. (SW). (Basis for Design) 2. ICI (Glidden/Devoe). 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and fmish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint - material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match Architect's selected samples. D. Architect may select up to six (6) paint colors. E. Contractor shall include the cost to provide one (1) accent wall per room. PAINTING 09900 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime. 2. Ferrous Metals: Clean un- galvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC -SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire - brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - petroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide PAINTING 09900 -4 3.3 APPLICATION sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non - specular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field - finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque PAINTING 09900 -5 surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass- smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke testing of applied materials at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint - spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE (Colors to be selected by Architect.) A. Interior Ferrous Metal (Shop Primed): 1. One Coat — Primer SW Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer 2. Two Coats — Finish SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi - Gloss B. Interior Ferrous Metal (Not Shop Primed): 1. One Coat — Primer SW Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer 2. Two Coats — Finish SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi - Gloss C. Interior Galvanized Metal: 1. One Coat — Primer SW Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer 2. Two Coats — Finish SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi - Gloss D. Interior Exposed Piping (except chrome- plate, conduit, etc.): 1. One Coat — Primer SW Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer 2. Two Coats — Finish SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi - Gloss E. Interior Wood Trim (Natural Finish): 1. One Coat — Primer SW Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain 2. Two Coats — Finish SW Wood Classics Polyurethane Varnish PAINTING 09900 -6 F. Interior Wood Trim (Painted): 1. One Coat — Primer G. H. PAINTING 2. Two Coats — Finish Interior Gypsum Wall Board (Eggshell): 1. One Coat — Primer SW 2. Two Coats — Finish SW Interior Gypsum Wall Board (Semi - Gloss): 1. One Coat — Primer SW 2. Two Coats — Finish SW I. Masonry & Existing Concrete Floor: 1. One Coat — Primer 2. Two Coats — Finish END OF SECTION SW PrepRite ProBlock Interior/Exterior Latex Primer Sealer SW Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi - Gloss Harmony Wall Primer ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg -Shel Harmony Wall Primer ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi - Gloss SW Loxon Acrylic Primer SW Resilience Exterior Latex Satin 09900 -7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2, Sitework for site directional signs. 2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10425 - SIGNS A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. ADA toilet signs & symbols 2. Exterior Post Mounted Signs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large -scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large -scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 3. Templates: Furnish full -size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in- service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. B. Single - Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. C. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Interior Sign Manufacturers: a. Advance Process Supply Company. b. Andco Industries Corp. c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. SIGNS 10425 - 1 Qty Sign Type Text Location Size 2 Panel To be defined by Owner (T.B.D.) See drawings 2'H x 4'L, 6'L posts (2) 4 Panel "PARK GATES — Open Dusk to Dawn" See drawings 1'H x 2'L 2 Al. Panel "HANDICAP PARKING" With Handicap Wheelchair Symbol Handicap Stalls 12 "W x 18 "H 6" x 12" "Van" 10 'L, 2 "diameter posts Qty, Sign Type Text Location Size 1 Panel "Men's" w/ H/C symbol & Braille See drawings - 1 Panel "Women's" w/ H/C symbol & Braille See drawings - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.2 MATERIALS PART 3 - EXECUTION SIGNS A. d. e. f. 3.1 INSTALLATION Intelligent Signage, Inc. Signmark Graphics. Rohm and Haas. A. Aluminum Sheet: Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005 -H15. B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T5. C. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. D. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot - dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. A. General: Locate sign units and accessories as scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.3 EXTERIOR SIGN SCHEDULE: A. Provide the following exterior post or gate mounted signs: (See drawings for locations) B Provide the following ADA toilet signs: (See drawings for locations) END OF SECTION 10425 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Semi - recessed Fire extinguishers with cabinets. (1-EC) 2. Surface mounted fire extinguishers with mounting brackets. (1~E) 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Specification 01300 Submittals. B. Product data for cabinets include rough -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single - Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract. C. UL- Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. D. FM- Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher with FM marking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Elkart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 2. General Fire Extinguisher Corp. 3. Larsen's Mfg. Co. 4. W. C. Allen Mfg. Co. 5. Lyon Metal Products. 6. J.L. Industries. 7. Larsen's Mfg. Co. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, which comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL -rated 2 -A:10: B: C, MP 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 23 CABINETS A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all exposed joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 -1 B. Fire -Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire - resistance rating of wall where it is installed. C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing Fire extinguisher. Semi- recessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. Fully welded corners and ground with matching brushed stainless steel finish D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Exposed Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Rolled -edge trim with 2 -1/2 -inch backbend depth. Trim Metal: Stainless steel, ASTM A 167, AISI Type 302/304 alloy. E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Stainless Steel: Manufacturer's standard door construction, fabricated from austenitic stainless steel complying with ASTM A 167, for AISI Type 302/304 alloy. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows: Class 1 (clear). F. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide lettering to comply w /authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design: Full -Glass Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick, FT. H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide exposed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous -type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. 2.4 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping. 2.5 STAINLESS STEEL CABINET FINISHES A. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform- directional, textured polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. (Exposed joints not permitted.) 1. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No. 4 finish. C. Passivate and rinse surfaces after polishing. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 -2 B. Install in locations and at mounting heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Comply with protected recess in fire rated walls. 3. Provide height for Handicap access to fire extinguishers in accordance with ADAAG as adapted by the State of Georgia. 4. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 -3 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES SECTION 10800 — TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet room accessories. B. Reference Accessory Schedule on Drawings for Model No.5 & Descriptions: 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Finishes: Accessory Items. 2. Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating materials of construction, fasteners proposed for use for each type of wall construction, mounting instructions, and operation instructions. A. Each accessory item shall be complete with necessary mounting plates, anchors, and fasteners. Concealed mounting plates shall be of sturdy construction with corrosion - resistant surface. B. Anchors and Fasteners: Anchors and fasteners shall be capable of developing a restraining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and shall be well suited for use with the supporting construction. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, they shall have oval heads and finish to match the accessory, except exposed fasteners shall be of tamperproof design. A. Manufacturers 1. Model numbers are for toilet accessories manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. They are listed as a standard of quality. Equivalent equipment of other manufacturers may be acceptable, if in the judgment of the Architect, they meet the specifications in terms of design, function, materials, and quality of workmanship. Other manufacturers shall be proposed in accordance with General Conditions Section E. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original packaging until installed. C. Handle to prevent damage to finish surfaced. D. Maintain protective coverings until installation is complete and ready for final cleaning. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Provide materials and accessories, conforming to requirements specified, from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. Bay West. 5. Wisconsin Tissue Mills. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 -1 2.2 FINISHES A. Finishes on metal shall be provided as follows: 1. Metal: Stainless Steel. Finish: US32D finish. 2. Concealed: Stainless Steel. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 6. Royce Rolls Ringer Co. A. Check openings and coordinate with wall construction. Verify dimensions for plumbing, frames, and other work related to installation of accessories. Install concealed blocking F.T. wood or galvanized steel plate in walls for accessories. B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and parties that affect installation of accessories per ADA Handicap installation requirements. C. Do not begin work on toilet accessory installation until surfaces are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Toilet accessories shall be securely fastened to the supporting construction in accordance with the approved submittals. Accessories shall be protected from damage from the time of installation until acceptance. All exposed fasteners shall be tamper - proof. B. Install manufacturer's recommended anchor system for all grab bars and other accessories. C. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting on adjacent finishes. D. Fit flanges of accessories snugly over wall surfaces and tighten to waterproof joint. E. Install all accessories per ADA Handicap requirements, Per GA 120 -3 -20. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean and polish all exposed Toilet accessories. B. Adjust operating parts for proper operation. C. Deliver accessory schedules, keys and parts manuals as part of project close -out documents. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish the following items, 2- copies: 1. Technical data sheets of each item. 2. Complete service and parts manuals. 3. Name of local representative to be contacted in the event of need for field service or consultation. 4. Manufacturer's guarantee forms for all items. 3.4 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE (See Drawings) END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13125 — PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDINGS A. Structural steel frame. 1. Rigid frame with portal frames. 2. Endwalls and bracing. 3. Roof structures. B. Complete roof covering system consisting of standing locked seam exterior roof panels siding panels, panel attachments, sealants, mastics, trim and flashings and complete accessories. C. Wall accessories, including: 1. Louvers. 2. Pre - finished aluminum drips. D. Roof Accessories, including: 1. Reinforced vinyl faced thermal insulation. 2. Ridge vents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 3, - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Foundations and anchor bolts. B. Division 9 — "Painting" Finish painting of structural members. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA 101 - Voluntary Specification for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Prime Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. B. ASTM A 36 /ASTM A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. C. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. D. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. E. ASTM A 529/A 529M - Standard Specification for High - Strength Carbon - Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. F. ASTM A 570/A 570M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot - Rolled, Structural Quality. G. ASTM A 572/A 572M - Standard Specification for High- Strength Low -Alloy Columbium - Vanadium Steel. H. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. I. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. J. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING 13125 - 1 K. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. L. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. M. SDI 100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door Institute. N. UL 580 - Tests For Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Building Width: Measured from outside wall to outside wall. B. Building Length: Measured from outside wall to outside wall. C. Building Line: Outside face of structural steel. D. Building Eave Height: Measured from the top of the eave member at the outside of the sidewall girt line to the bottom of the sidewall column base plate. E. Bay Spacing: Measured from centerline to centerline of primary frames for interior bays and from centerline of the first interior frame to centerline of end bays. F. Roof Pitch: The ratio of the vertical rise to the horizontal run. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design structural systems according to professionally recognized methods and standards. B. Design under supervision of professional engineer licensed in the State of Georgia with all engineering submittals stamped, sealed and signed. C. Design Loads: 1. Applicable Building Code: Georgia Adopted Standard Building Code, IBC 2000. 2. Roof Live Load: In accordance with IBC, non - reducible. 3. Roof Snow Load: In accordance with IBC. 4. Roof Wind Load: Calculate in accordance with applicable code, using 105mph Basic Wind Speed, Exposure Category per IBC, and Importance Factor of 1.0. 5. Collateral Loads: 5 psf minimum. (Include not less than the following): a. Suspended acoustical ceiling. b. Suspended HVAC equipment and lighting. c. Masonry wall loading braced by rigid frame as shown on drawings. d. Light gage Metal framed walls braced to Rigid Frame. 6. Provide roof panel systems that have 95mph wind uplift rating. 7. Seismic Loads: Calculate in accordance w /applicable code, for State of Georgia, Occupancy Group Business. a. Seismic Hazard Exposure Group: I. b. Seismic Performance Category: C. c. Class SD; Sd5 =0.35; Sd1 =0.17. 8. Dead Loads, including the weight of all indicated permanent construction. D. Design roof system to withstand specified loads with deflection in accordance with IBC 2006. E. Anchor Bolts: Furnish design criteria and anchor bolts, to resist the loads induced by the design loads on the structure. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01300. PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING 13125 - 2 B. Design Data: Provide detailed design criteria and calculations. C. Certification: 1. Manufacturer certification that the building conforms to the contract documents and manufacturer's standard design procedures. 2. AISC Fabricator Certification; Metal Buildings Systems (MB). D. Shop Drawings: Show building layout, primary and secondary framing member sizes and locations, cross - sections, and product and connection details. E. Product Data: Information on manufactured products to be incorporated into the project. F. Color Charts: For selection of colors. G. Anchor Bolt Installation Drawings: Layouts with minimum bolt diameters and designed lengths and shapes. H. Specimen Warranty. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for: 1. Materials and workmanship: 1 year. 2. Panel finish: 20 years. 3. Weather tightness: 20 years. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products in compliance with the specified requirements and Contract Documents manufactured by on of the following: 1. Butler Manufacturing Co. 2. Varco - Pruden Buildings. 3. Ceco Building Systems. 4. Steelox Building Systems. 5. Centria. 2.2 METAL MATERIALS A. Select materials and material yield strengths based on building design requirements; use the following unless required otherwise. 1. Structural Steel Plate, Bar, Sheet, & Strip for Use in Bolted & Welded Constructions: ASTM A 572/A 572M, A 529/A 529M or A 36/A 36M Modified 50, w /minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa). 2. Structural Steel Material for Use in Roll Formed or Press Broken Secondary Structural Members: ASTM A 570/A 570M, with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi (380 MPa). 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet for Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof Covering, Trim and Flashing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa). 4. Galvalume Steel Sheet Used in Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof Covering: Aluminum - zinc alloy- coated steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa); nominal coating weight of 0.5 oz per sq ft (152 kg/sq m) both sides, equivalent to an approximate coating thickness of 0.0018 inch (0.05 mm) both sides. 5. Hot Rolled Steel Shapes: W, M and S shapes, angles, rods, channels and other shapes; ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 36/A 36M as applicable; with minimum yield strengths required for the design. 6. Structural Bolts and Nuts Used with Primary Framing: High strength, ASTM A 325. 7. Bolts and Nuts Used with Secondary Framing Members: ASTM A 307. PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING 13125 - 3 8. Shop Coat: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer paint; manufacturer's standard color. 9. Pre - Painted Finish: .75 to .9 mil Kynar 500 coating on exterior surface. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full line. Match Architect's Sample. b. Interior Finish Off white 0.5 mil (0.01 mm) washcoat. 2.3 FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Primary Framing: Rigid Frame (RF Series) solid web framing consisting of tapered or uniform depth rafters rigidly connected to tappered or uniform depth cohimns. Provide a clear span that supports the loads at bay spacings indicated. B. Endwall Framing: Full frames with end posts, for future expansion. C. Purlins: Zee - shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi (345 MPa); simple span or continuous span as required for design. D. Wind Bracing: Portal wall bracing, diagonal bracing in roof in accordance w /manufacturer's standard design practices; utilizing rods, angles, & other members, w /minimum yield strengths as required for design. E. Primary Frame Flange Bracing: Attached from puffins to the primary framing, minimum yield strength as required for design. F. Sag Angles and Bridging: Steel angles, with minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi (250 MPa). G. Fabrication: Fabricate according to manufacturer's standard practice. 1. Fabricate structural members made of welded plate sections by jointing the flanges and webs by continuous automatic submerged arc welding process. 2. Use certified welders for shop welding. 3. Weld shop connections. Prepare members for bolted field connections by making punched, drilled, or reamed holes in the shop. 4. Design connections and fabricate hoist beam support integral to structural frame (Pre - engineered). H. Component Identification: Mark all fabricated parts, either individually or by lot or group, using an identification marking corresponding to the marking shown on the shop drawings, using a method that remains visible after shop painting. I. Shop Coating: Finish all structural steel members using one coat of manufacturer's standard shop coat, after cleaning of oil, dirt, loose scale and foreign matter. J. Package building components for shipping by common carrier. 2.4 ROOF PANEL COMPONENTS A. Roof Panels: Standing Locked Seam; 16 inch wide net coverage, w/ nominal 2 inch high interlocking ribs and 2 mid rolled ribs. 1. Material: Galvanized steel with kynar finish. 2. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 3. Length: Continuous from eave to ridge up to 41 feet (12.5 m) in length. 4. Finish: Pre - painted kynar colored finish, KXL. B. Ridge Assembly for High End of Slopes: SSR Ridge; draw - formed aluminum seam caps factory- attached to SSR ridge panels that are seamed together along the center of the ridge, utilizing only one weathersealed joint and providing a true expansion joint for panel movement. C. Panel Fasteners: PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING 13125 - 4 D. Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent components. Provide trim at rakes, including peak and corner assemblies, high and low eaves, corners, bases, framed openings and as required or specified to provide weathertightness and a finished appearance. E. Sealants, Mastics and Closures: Manufacturer's standard type. 1. Provide at roof panel end laps, side laps, rake, eave, transitions & accessories as required to provide a weather resistant roof system; use tape mastic or gunnable sealant at side laps & end laps. 2. Provide at eaves, transitions and accessories. 3. Closures: Formed to match panel profiles; closed cell elastic material, manufacturer's standard color. 4. Tape Mastic: Pre - formed butyl rubber- based, non - hardening, non - corrosive to metal; white or light gray. 5. Gunnable Sealant: Non - skinning synthetic elastomer based material; gray or bronze. F. Blanket Insulation: Glass fiber, with factory laminated facing material 1. Glass fiber: Odorless, neutral colored, long filament, flexible resilient, 0.8 pcf (12.8 kg/cu m) density material. 2. Conductivity (k): 0.29 at 40 degF (0.50 at 4 degC) mean temperature and 0.31 at 70 degF (0.54 at 21 degC) mean temperature. 3. Flame spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 5. UL Classified. 6. Facing: Heavy duty white vinyl reinforced scrim foil; 0.0008 inch (0.02 mm) thick vinyl film, glass fiber scrim reinforcing, 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm) aluminum foil; permeance 0.02 perms (1.1 ng/Pa s sq m). 7. Use blanket insulation at roof. 8. Thickness: 6 inches (150 mm); R- value: 21.83. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1. KXL finished roof panels: Stainless steel- capped carbon steel fasteners with integral sealing washer. 2. Concealed Fasteners: Self - drilling type, of size as required. 3. Provide fasteners in quantities and location as required by the manufacturer. A. Verify that foundations are installed correctly. B. Verify that anchor bolts are installed as indicated on anchor bolt shop drawings. 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect pre - engineered building in accordance manufacturer's instructions, erection drawings, and other erection documents. B. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, blocking, bridging and securing of components as required during the erection process. C. Clean all work and replace any damaged materials or finishes. D. Provide a watertight roof, gutter and fascia system. END OF SECTION PRE - ENGINEERED BUILDING 13125 - 5 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Work Included DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING A. The provisions of the Instructions to Bidders and of the Special Conditions, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications shall govern the work under this Division or Section the same as if incorporated herein. B. The work covered by Division 22 Plumbing specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, piping, appliances, and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the complete installation of the mechanical systems, complete subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. Work to be performed under this division shall include the systems as further described elsewhere in this division. C. Provide a complete plumbing system that is purchased, installed, cleaned, tested and ready for use in accordance with these specifications and referenced drawings. 1.2 Definitions A. "Contractor" shall mean the contractor, his subcontractors, suppliers visiting the job site, and all assigns engaged by the contractor, either directly or indirectly, to engage the work described herein. B. "Provide" shall mean Furnish, install and connect. C. "Piping" shall mean pipe installed with all specified fittings, valves and accessories, and forming a complete system. 1.3 References A. Laws 1. The following are known laws pertaining directly to the work Federal Law OSHA Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926 OSHA General Industry Standards, 29 CFR 1910 State Law State of Georgia Laws and Regulations Local Laws, Regulations and Ordinances Local Laws, Regulations and Ordinances of City of Augusta, Georgia Local Laws, Regulations and Ordinances of County of Richmond, Georgia 2. Contractor shall pay all charges required by Permits and Inspection Fees. Deliver to the Architect all Certificates of Inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Codes 1. The codes as shown in Section 01090 with dates as shown, shall form a part of this section of the specifications. The latest amendments in effect on day of bid shall apply. 2. The above code requirements are minimum. Where the contract drawings and specifications exceed the above codes and ordinance requirements then the contract drawings and specifications shall govern. C. Drawings 1. The following drawings are hereby made a part of this specification: PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 1 ■ P1.1 Plumbing Notes, Details & Schedules P2.1 Plumbing Plan P3.1 Plumbing Site Plan 2. Arrangement of plumbing work shall be as shown on the above drawings. 3. Engineering drawings show the engineer's intent as to attributes of the systems to be provided. These attributes include a. Protection of life, safety & health of the public b. Desired performance of the system and compliance with appropriate codes c. Provisions for maintenance of the system d. Establish minimum levels of quality e. Arrangement as to client's wishes and functionality 4. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide complete, finished plumbing systems. a. Drawings are not intended to indicate all offsets and fittings. Examine drawings, investigate conditions to be encountered, and arrange work accordingly; furnish all fittings and offsets. b. Drawings are not intended to show in detail exact locations and connections for fixtures, equipment and accessories. Final connections shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. c. Measurement of drawings by scale shall not be used as dimensions for fabrication. Measurements for locating fixtures, equipment, ductwork, piping and accessories shall be made on the site and shall be based on actual job conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements. d. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and any work or material shown in one and omitted in the other, or described in the one and not shown in the other, or which may be implied by both or either, shall be furnished as though shown on both, in order to give a complete and first class installation. 1.4 Performance Criteria A. The complete finished plumbing system work shall meet the following performance criteria. The Contractor shall provide remedy should the installation fail to meet the criteria listed below 1. Acceptable Safe & Sanitary Operation: 2. Tested in accordance with the referenced laws, codes & drawings and these specifications. 3. Free of leaks 4. Free of objectionable noise 5. Free of odor 6. Low maintenance 7. Pleasing and Professional Appearance 8. Ease of maintenance 9. Well supported and braced 10. Meets Building and Fire Codes 1.5 Environmental Safety and Health PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 2 A. The contractor shall conduct all operations in a safe, clean, organized, responsible and legal manner at all times. B. The contractor shall conduct all work in strict accordance with the OSHA construction safety standard. 29 CFR 1926. C. The contractor shall obtain, read, and maintain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemical, products and compounds used on the project. The contractor shall satisfy the environmental, safety and health requirements of the MSDS for use and disposal. D. The contractor shall maintain a dedicated fire watch with an appropriate fire extinguisher on all hot work operations involving open flame, welding, soldering, brazing or any operation which could produce a fire. An additional fire watch shall be provided to the floor(s) below for work involving multiple floors. The fire watch shall last one hour past the end of the hot work. E. The finished work shall comply with the general OSHA industry standard 29 CFR 1910 and be shall be safe to the occupants. F. The contractor shall obtain and follow all additional Environmental , Safety and Health requirements of the facility owner and/or tenants. G. The contractor shall notify the owner in advance of any impairment to an operating safety or environmental system and follow applicable laws and the owner's procedure as to that impairment. This provisions includes fire suppression sprinklers, fire alarm, security alarms. 1.6 Remedy A. Where the installation fails applicable law, regulation, code, manufacturer's warranty, manufacturer's installation instructions, these specifications, referenced engineering drawings, or architectural drawings, the contractor agrees to provide remedy. 1.7 Quality Control A. The contractor shall provide formal and documented measures to provide quality control on the work in accordance with applicable codes and standards, manufacturer's installation instructions, UL listings, and these specifications. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. The contractor shall provide formal and documented measures to provide quality assurance on the work in accordance with applicable codes and standards, manufacturer's installation instructions and UL listings. B. The contractor shall keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities and the engineer. C. The contractor shall self inspect the work prior to the invitation of any code official or extemal agency. A listing of deficiencies found shall be provided to the engineer. Any deficiencies noted in the self inspection shall be corrected prior to invitation of the code official. 1.9 Warranty A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Unless otherwise specified the work shall be warranted against defect in material or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance. C. The contractor shall make installations in a way that does not violate codes & manufacturer's warranties. Should the installation fail these, the contractor shall provide remedy. 1.10 Installer Qualifications A. The contractor shall possess licenses and permits in the state where the work is being performed in accordance with the state requirements as to type work being performed. The plumbing contractor shall possess PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 3 a State of Georgia Master's Plumbing license. The field supervisor shall possess a State of Georgia Journeyman's Plumbing license. B. The contractor shall additional licenses and permits in the legal jurisdiction(s) where the work is being performed in accordance with the legal jurisdiction(s)' requirements as to type work being performed. C. The contractor shall satisfy insurance and bonding requirements of the general conditions to include Property Damage, Vehicle, Workman's compensation, and Umbrella coverage. D. The contractor shall acquire and posses additional licenses and permits as may be required by the county or municipality where the work occurs. E. The contractor shall meet qualifications,and acquire and possess certificates as required by applicable State and local laws, regulations and ordinances, applicable codes and standards, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), product UL listings, and/or material manufacturer's installation instructions. See Medical Gas for additional requirements. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 Substitutions & Submittals A. Submittals 1. Electrical data shall accompany equipment submittals and shall be provided in tabular form for each piece of equipment requiring electrical power. Form shall include all equipment listed on one or more pages as follows: Drawing, Symbol, Equipment, HP or KW, Volts of Ckts, Phase Ampacity Reqd., Number Fuse Reqd., Minimum Size, Maximum Size. 2. Equipment listed on the drawings has been used for the physical arrangement. When equipment listed as acceptable, equal or equipment which has received "prior approval" is used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide structural, ductwork, electrical, service clearances or other changes required. Submit list of changes required along with Shop Drawings. B. Substitutions 1. Ten Day Prior Approval - Bidders proposing to substitute materials other than specified shall submit data on said equipment 10 business days prior to bid due date. The contractor shall provide supporting information to show that the proposed substitution is equal to that specified. The proposed substitution shall be identified by manufacturer and model number. The contractor shall note differences in supporting information. 2. Changes Arising From the Substitution a. The contractor is responsible for performing additional engineering required of the substitution at no additional cost to the owner. Example engineering includes structural and electrical modifications of connections necessary to properly effect the substitution. The contractor shall provide drawings for approval showing changes arising changes. b. The contractor is responsible for performing additional engineering required of the substitution at no additional cost to the owner. Example engineering includes structural and electrical modifications of connections necessary to properly effect the substitution. The contractor shall provide drawings for approval showing changes arising changes. C. Equal Performance - Where substitutions are made, and the substitution prove non equal, deficient or defective., the contractor agrees to provide remedy to make the installation equal to that specified at no additional cost to the owner. Said remedy may include removal of the substitution and replacement with equipment as specified. 2.2 Operating and Maintenance Manuals A. Furnish and deliver to the Architect for approval, three manuals in hardback binders covering details of operation and maintenance for all apparatus requiring service. Items shall include but shall not be limited to the following PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 4 1. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals, including parts lists, for each piece of equipment and accessory requiring service or maintenance, and the name, address and phone number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item. 2. Step -by -step procedure for starting and stopping each system. 2.3 Manufacturer's Certificates A. The following equipment and systems shall require certificates stating that each is installed and operating properly. Certificates shall be issued by and typed on manufacturer's letterhead 1. Medical Gas System PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The contractor shall visit the job site prior to submitting bid and examine conditions to satisfy himself as to existing conditions. B. The contractor shall obtain manufacturer's installation instructions for all items provided under this contract. Unless otherwise specified, all items shall be be installed in strict accordance with the codes, manufacturer's installation instructions, and applicable Underwriter's Laboratory listing. 3.2 Coordination A. The mechanical work shall be coordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflict. B. The Contractor shall study all plans and specifications for this project and shall notify the Architect of any conflict between work under this Division and work under other Divisions of the specifications. Particular attention shall be noted to interferences, clearances between piping, electrical, structural work, building openings, and ductwork. 3.3 Protection of Work During Construction A. Provide protective covers, skids, plugs, caps and coating to protect equipment and materials from damage or deterioration during construction. Covers will not be required for coated cast iron pipe and fittings. B. Store equipment and material under cover and off the ground. C. For outdoor storage, protective covers of sheet plastic shall be fitted and ventilated. Covers shall be reinforced to withstand wind and precipitation. Set equipment and material on skids or platforms to avoid deterioration from splattering and ground water. D. Plug end of pipes where work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes. E. Close open ends of ductwork with temporary closures using sheet plastic taped in placed on horizontal ducts and 26 gauge sheet metal on vertical ducts. F. No air handling system shall be operated during construction period without filters in place to filter air entering the fan. G. Protect rotating parts of rotating equipment by sheet plastic taped in place. After installation is completed, dust and debris shall be brushed, swept, or vacuumed clean, then the protective covers shall be removed. Should the protection be broken and bearings of shaft seals be contaminated with foreign particles, such bearings and shafts shall be removed for cleaning. The apparatus shall not be started until the rotating parts are free of particles. 3.4 Excavation, Trenching and Backfill A. Excavation, trenching and backfill shall be in accordance with the specification division so entitled. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 5 3.5 Cleaning and Painting A. General: Surfaces of metal, pipe, insulation and other materials and equipment furnished and installed under this section, where exposed, shall be cleaned of all grease, loose scale, dirt, rust, and other foreign matter in preparation for painting. Painting of such surfaces in mechanical equipment room and equipment and piping located outside the building, and all steel supports and hangers, shall be included in this section of the specifications. B. Materials and Application: All nameplates and controls shall be covered and protected during painting. Provide one (1) brushed applied primer coat and two (2) brushed applied finish coats of enamel paint as follows: Exterior Armaflex Insulation Exposed Steel Supports & Hangers (Interior) Equipment & Supports (exposed to weather) Steel Piping (Exterior) 3.6 Safety Requirements D. Other safety devices shall be as specified with equipment. Armaflex Gray Machinery Gray Color selected by Architect Machinery Gray A. Provide guards shielding the perimeter and face of all belt drives, shafts, and couplings. The guards shall be furnished as part of the equipment and shall be removable. Provide openings in guards opposite drive and driven shafts to permit use of revolution counter. B. All rough and jagged edges of equipment, ductwork, and piping shall be ground smooth. All sharp or knife edges shall be rounded. Where sharp or knife edges cannot be rounded, a U channel constructed of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel shall be secured over the edge. C. Each pressure vessel shall be provided with an ASME stamped relief valve rated for the working pressure of the vessel except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the drawings. Each relief valve shall be located in openings provided on the vessel, or, where openings are not provided, in the pipe line immediately adjacent to the vessel and between the vessel and any shut off valve. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking all safety controls on each water heater before placing the equipment in operation. All relief valves and relief lines shall be installed, checked for specified operation, and determined to be free and clear of any obstructions. F. During performance tests, all safety devices for each system (including alarms and devices which are for the safety protection of equipment) shall be checked for specified performance. The set point and operating point for each device shall be recorded and approved by the Architect. G. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect five (5) copies of performance data on all safety devices. The data shall include the final setting of each device and the setting at which the device operates. The safety devices shall be identified as to system, equipment and function. 3.7 Sleeves A. Pipes and ducts passing through masonry and concrete construction (except concrete floor slabs on grade) shall be fitted with sleeves. Sleeves shall extend through the construction and shall be cut flush with each surface of the construction. Insulation, unless noted, shall be continuous through sleeves. Sleeves shall be concentric with the pipes or ducts and shall be large enough to provide clearance (1/4 inch minimum, 3/4 inch maximum) between the insulation (or bare metal if not insulated) and the inside of the sleeve, except as otherwise noted on drawings. Sleeves through fire or smoke walls or partitions shall be sealed fire and smoke tight by a UL approved sealing system. B. Sleeves shall be installed no later than the time of installation of the pipe or duct. C. Sleeves for masonry construction other than poured concrete shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel with longitudinal seam overlapped 1/2" (min.) and secured with pop rivets or spot welded. D. Duct sleeves shall be 16 gauge (min) galvanized steel welded with clips for securing to form. The inside of the sleeves for poured concrete shall be filled with compacted sand to retain the shape of the sleeve. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 6 E. Sleeves shall be installed with 3" (min) clearance between adjacent sleeves. F. The space between the inside of each sleeve and the pipe or duct shall be sealed as detailed on the drawings. G. Refer to drawings for other details of sleeves. 3.8 Final Cleaning A. Remove all unused equipment tools, and materials. Clean all surfaces. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 7 PART 1- GENERAL DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 1.1 Contractor shall install piping, fixtures, and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner as approved by the Architect. Equipment shall be so arranged and fitted into available spaces that working parts are accessible for service without damage to building structure or finishes. Where building openings are provided, equipment shall be arranged for coil and/or tube removal through the openings. Provide service clearance around equipment as recommended by the manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.2 Before construction starts check locations of proposed equipment, pipe and ducts and existing piping . Review drawings, verify grades, elevations, locations of structural elements, locations and sizes of chases and walls, methods and type of construction of floors, walls and partitions. Before start of construction report any unsatisfactory condition, error in drawings or specifications or conflict between mechanical and other trades. 1.3 Establish location and elevation of foundations, walls and chases affecting location and layout of mechanical work. Locate sleeves, inserts and supports for mechanical installations. Plan and coordinate work in advance of installation by other trades to avoid cutting and patching of walls, floors and ceilings. 1.4 Check space limitations and verify electric current before ordering any equipment; set large pieces of equipment inside building before walls are erected where equipment is too large to enter finished building. 1.5 Equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's templates and printed instructions, except in cases of conflict with these specifications or contract drawings, confer with the Architect for decision. 1.6 Contractor's Attention is directed to invert elevations of existing sewers. Invert elevations of new sewers are based on invert elevations of existing sewers. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying invert elevations prior to installing any piping to assure minimum grades as specified hereinafter. If invert elevations shown are incorrect the Contractor shall not install any new piping but shall transmit written notice of the discrepancy to the Architect for correction. Costs incurred for changes in the work in place as a result of failure to notify the Architect before any piping is installed shall be borne solely by the Contractor. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 1 DIVISION 22 - PT,TTMRING SECTION 22 05_23 - GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 1.1 All valves shall be of one manufacturer where possible. Valves shall be same size as line unless noted. 1.2 Stops shall be provided for all fixtures . All gate valves shall be of the solid wedge type, designed and manufactured so that seating surfaces are prevented from contacting until near the point of closure. Commercial Lavatory Angle stops are specified under 22 42 39 Commercial Faucets, Supplies, and Trim . 1.3 Gate Valves - 3" and smaller above ground - Nibco S/T 134, 1501b. union bonnet rising stem - below ground S/T 136, 1501b. union bonnet non -rising stem. 1.4 Check Valves Water - 2" and smaller - Nibco S/T -433, 1501b. 1.5 Ball Valves - Nibco Valves - Nibco S/T 580, 1501b. 1.6 Joints for copper tubing in water piping shall be tube and socket sweat joints soldered with 95 -5 solder. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 1 PIVISION 22 - PLUMBING ,SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND FOTJIPMENT PART1- GENERAL 1.1 The provisions of the Instructions to Bidders and of the Special Conditions, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications shall govern the work under this Division or Section the same as if incorporated herein. 1.2 Provide supports for all piping and equipment provided under Division 22 as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Refer to section 22 00 00 for additional requirements. 1.3 Piping and equipment supports furnished under this Section shall include hangers, inserts, clamps, brackets, gang type hangers, hanger rod, and supplemental structural steel associated with the pipe or equipment support system; all as specified herein or shown on the drawings. 1.4 Provide Insulation Protection Shield at each support where pipe support fits over outside of insulation. PART 2 - SUBMITTALS 2.1 Refer to general conditions for procedure on shop drawing submittals. 2.2 The contractor shall submit shop drawings for prior approval on the following items under this section: A. Hangers & Supports PART 3 - MATERIALS LIST 3.1 Mechanical supporting devices shall be as specified below. Sizes on insulated pipe refer to outside diameter of insulation. 3.2 Copper Pipe (uninsulated) or where hanger is in direct contact with pipe: A. Horizontal: Grinnell Fig. CT -99C. B. Riser Clamps: Grinnell Fig. CT -121C. 3.3 Insulated Pipe (4" and smaller): Grinnell Fig. 104. 3.4 Insulated Pipe (Larger than 4 "): Grinnell Fig. 260. 3.5 Ferrous Pipe (uninsulated or where hanger is in direct contact with pipe) A. Horizontal 3" and smaller: Grinnell Fig. 104. B. Horizontal 4" and larger: Grinnell Fig. 260. C. Riser Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 261. 3.6 C- Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 88. 3.7 Insulation Protection Shield: Grinnell Fig. 167. 3.8 Structural Steel: Provide steel angles or channels attached to building structural members to provide maximum support spacing specified and elsewhere as noted on drawings. Midpoint deflection shall not exceed 1 /360th of span. 3.9 Gang Type Hangers: Fee & Mason Fig. 521. 3.10 Wall Brackets: Grinnell Fig. 139 with short nipple. 3.11 Hanger Rod: Carbon steel, machine threaded. Size of hanger rod shall be same size as connection on hanger. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 1 PART 4 - INSTALLATION 4.1 Sizes shown in this Section of the Specifications refer to outside diameter of insulation on insulated pipe and to nominal pipe diameter on bare pipe. 4.2 Pipe supports shall support the pipe in all conditions of operation. Supports shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping. The Contractor shall check hangers under operating and non - operating conditions and shall make adjustments in each hanger so that the hanger provides full support of the pipe. 4.3 Where structural shapes so not have horizontal leg for upper attachment of hanger a Grinnell Fig. 202 side beam bracket shall be used. Hanger hole in bracket shall be same size as hanger rod. Attach to steel member by drilling at neutral axis of beam and using bolt same size as upper drilling of bracket. PART 5 - SUPPORT SPACING (where not covered by NFPA or IPC.) 5.1 Pipe Size (1" and smaller): 6' -0" o.c. (max.) 5.2 Pipe Size (1 -1/4" - 1- 1/2 "): 8' -0" o.c. (max.) 5.3 Pipe Size (2" - 3 "): 10' -0" o.c. (max.) 5.4 Pipe Size (4" - 5 "): 12' -0" o.c. (max.) 5.5 Pipe Size (6" and larger): 15' -0" o.c. (max.) 5.6 Cast Iron: Shall not exceed 5' -0" for 5 ft. lengths of pipe and 10' -0" o.c. for 10 ft. lengths of pipe. 5.7 Provide support within 2' -6" of each No -Hub or compression type fitting. Provide support on lower fitting where pipe run changes from horizontal to vertical. 5.8 Risers: With base support or on horizontal run within 1' -0" of rigid fitting at base of riser. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 2 PART 1- LABELS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EOUIPMENT 1.1 Label all equipment, switches, and controls furnished under this section with engraved bakelite labels indicating the name or function of each. Labels shall be secured with a minimum of 2 brass screws. Where screws cannot be secured to equipment, contact cement shall be used to secure labels to equipment. Surfaces shall be cleaned of oil and grease before cement is applied. 1.2 Letters for equipment labels shall be '/" minimum height. Where two or more pieces are furnished, each piece shall be identified as No. 1 or No. 2 in addition to the name of the equipment. Bakelite labels for equipment shall be a minimum of 3 /4" high. PART 2 - VALVE TAGS AND SCHEDULE 2.1 Provide, below each above ceiling valve, an engraved bakelite identifying nameplate. Affix nameplate to ceiling "Tee" with contact cement. 2.2 Specify labeling of equipment, switches and controls (except space wall mounted thermostats) with engraved Bakelite (black background with white letters) or stamped metal labels indicating the name or function of each. Attach labels with rivets or epoxy glue. 2.3 All piping exposed in main boiler /mechanical rooms shall be fully painted with one (1) prime coat and two (2) finish coats in accordance with the following schedule: SYSTEM Domestic Cold Water *Paint colors selected from Glidden Alkyd Industrial Enamels. * *Black lettering with directional arrows indicating flow, minimum heights in accordance with the following: 2.4 All piping exposed in walk in chases, mechanical rooms, utility rooms, closets, or storage rooms, shall be identified with semi rigid plastic identification markers and flow arrows complying with ASME A13.1 "Scheme for identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. SYSTEM LEGEND Domestic Cold Water CW IDENTIFICATION ** COLOR CW Safety Blue (Dark Blue) IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1 PART 1- GENERAL DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSU!.ATION 1.1 "The provisions of the Instructions to Bidders and of the Special Conditions, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications shall govern the work under this Division or Section the same as if incorporated herein." 1.2 Provide all insulation materials and accessories for complete systems as specified. All insulation work shall be done by experienced workers regularly employed for this type work. 1.3 The following systems shall be insulated: A. Domestic Cold Water. PART 2 - MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES 2.1 Insulation materials shall have a composite (insulation, jacket, adhesive) fire and smoke hazard rating not exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50, as tested by ASTM E -8, and shall be UL Listed. (Exception: Flexible foamed elastomeric plastic.) 2.2 Fiberglass products as manufactured by Owens - Corning are used as a guide for insulation materials. A. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Owens Corning. 2. Manville 3. Certain -Teed 4. Knauf 5. Armstrong 6. Baldwin -Ehret -Hill 7. Eagle Pitcher 8. Bimasco 2.3 The following shall be insulated with the listed materials: A. Domestic hot and cold water piping and recirculating water piping: 1" thick fiberglass 3 lb. minimum density sectioned pipe insulation with FRJ jacket. Exception: Insulate aboveground exterior piping with 3/41b. foamed plastic pipe insulation. B. Fitting and valves shall be insulated with factory preformed fiberglass fittings. Fittings shall be machine formed using bulk fiberglass of density to match the adjacent insulation as manufactured by Speedline Manufacturing Company, Greensboro, N.C. Outer surface, unless noted, shall be flush with adjacent insulation and shall be finished with glass fabric and Foster 30 -35 white vapor barrier coating. Fittings shall be covered with Zeston or equal PVC fitting covers. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise specified. Clean and dry all pipe, ductwork, and equipment before installing insulation or adhesives. All vapor barriers shall be sealed in systems operating at 65 F or below to prevent condensation. 3.2 Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1 A. Joints in jackets shall be lapped 1" minimum and shall be secured with self - sealing jacket or white vapor barrier adhesive. Ends of insulation on cold lines shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic 20 feet on center (maximum) before sections are butted together. All joints in vapor barrier shall be sealed vapor tight on cold lines. All elements of the system shall be insulated to prevent sweating. B. Pipe fitting (elbows and tees) shall be insulated with pre - molded fiberglass fitting insulation as manufactured by Speedline Manufacturing Company, Greensboro, N.C. Thickness shall be such that the fitting surface is flush with the adjoining insulation. Finish with formed PVC fitting cover. Valves and irregular shaped shall be insulated with bulk fiberglass wrapped with twine to thickness described above. Apply coat of insulating cement for a smooth surface and finish with 8 oz. canvas. 3.3 Flexible closed cell plastic pipe insulation: Insulation shall be installed under compression so that joints will not separate when piping expands and contracts. Insulation shall be installed without splitting. Whole sections shall be slipped onto piping before joints are made. Pull insulation back from joint to prevent burning during soldering or brazing operations. Seal joints with 520 adhesive. Paint insulation exposed to weather two coats of gray exterior latex paint. 3.4 Hangers and Supports: Sections of rigid closed cell pipe insulation shall be installed at pipe saddles where pipe hangers fit around pipe and insulation. Sections shall consist of rigid heavy density pipe insulation of same thickness and having same jacket as adjoining insulation. Sections shall be Armstrong, Foamglas, or Owens Corning Urethane and shall extend 1" beyond on each end of the insulating protection saddle. 3.5 Rated Fire Walls & Partitions: When a line insulated under 1.3 passes through a rated fire wall or partition, the insulation shall be discontinued for the length of the wall sleeve. (The rated fire protection stuffing material shall serve as insulation.) PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 2 PART 1 - TESTING J)IVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 1.1 All domestic water supply piping shall be tested before fixtures or faucets are connected by capping or plugging the openings and applying a hydrostatic test pressure of 150 psig which must hold without evidence of leakage for a period of 4 hours. 1.2 Laboratory Water Test: The entire water system, including hot water lines, shall be filled with a solution containing 50 ppm of available chlorine and allowed to stand 24 hours before flushing. At the end of the 24 -hour retention period, the treated water shall contain no less than 24 mg/1 chlorine throughout the system. After the chlorine has been completely flushed from the system, a testing laboratory approved by the engineer shall take two samples of water on consecutive days and make analysis to determine efficiency of the disinfection process. Test results shall be sent to the engineer, architect, and plumbing contractor. Should any reports be unfavorable, the entire treatment and sampling process shall be repeated. COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 22 08 00 - 1 PART 1- CODES AND STANDARDS DIVISION 22 - PI,ITMRINC SECTION 2211 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 1.1 The following specifications and codes shall form a part of these specifications: A. International Plumbing Code 2006 by International Code Council, Inc. with 2007 & 2008 State of Georgia amendments. B. ASTM Spec. B88 -66: Copper Water Tube. C. ANSI Spec. B16.22-73: Wrought Copper Fittings PART 2 - PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.1 Interior domestic water piping to a point five (5) feet beyond the building, unless noted shall be copper tubing; type K hard drawing underground and Type L hard drawn above ground. Fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper sweat fittings. Where two or more reductions in pipe size occur, cast brass fittings with solder joints pipe size occur, cast brass fittings with solder lints shall be used. 125 lb. copper sweat pattern unions shall be provided in the piping as indicated on the drawings. Provide dielectric insulating unions where copper connects to ferrous piping. Provide 1501b. bronze flanges for flange valves. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 Changes in direction and sizes shall be made with standard fittings. 3.2 Unions: Install 125 lb. sweat pattern unions where shown; install dielectric unions where copper connects to ferrous piping. 3.3 Install gate valve at each piece of equipment requiring water service. 3.4 Joints: Ends of pipe shall be reamed; pipe and fittings shall be cleaned. Sweat joints shall be made using 95/5 Tin/antimony solder. Use non - corrosive flux. 3.5 Where pipe penetrates floor slab on grade, install 1/2" thick foam plastic insulation extending 3 inches beyond concrete, top and bottom. 3.6 Runouts to wall hydrants, hose bibs, gate valves, and fixture stops, shall be securely anchored in place at the fixture stop to prevent pipe movement at this point. 3.7 All underground piping shall have a minimum of 30 inches of cover unless otherwise noted. 3.8 Clearance between sewer and water lines shall be in accordance with recommended standards for sewage (ten State Standards). 3.9 Where only cold water supply is shown for a faucet, provide cold water to both hot and cold sides. 3.10 Floor, wall and ceiling plates: Pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings, except in chases or above ceilings shall be provided with chrome plated or stainless steel plates fastened in place by integral spring latch. Plates for insulated pipe shall fit over insulation. 3.11 Fire wall, smoke barrier & fire rated floors: Pipes passing through fire or smoke rated floors, walls or ceilings, except in chases or above ceilings shall be provided with UL approved sleeve and fire safing commensurate with the wall penetrated. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Sanitary Waste and vent system shall be PVC Schedule 40 Solid Wall DWV Pipe per part 2. Part 2 - PVC Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe and PVC DWV Fitting System 2.1 This specification covers PVC Schedule 40 solid wall pipe and PVC DWV fittings used in sanitary drain, waste, and vent (DWV), sewer, and storm drainage applications. This system is intended for use in non - pressure applications where the operating temperature will not exceed 140 °F. 2.2 Referenced Standards A. ASTM D 1784 Rigid Vinyl Compounds B. ASTM D 1785 PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 C. ASTM D 2665 PVC Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe & Fittings D. ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cements for PVC Pipe and Fittings E. NSF Standard 14 Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials Note: Latest revision of all standards apply. 2.3 Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin rigid PVC (polyvinyl chloride) vinyl compounds with a Cell Class of 12454 -B as identified in ASTM D 1784. 23.4 PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured as a system and be the product of one manufacturer. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. All systems shall utilize a separate waste and vent system. Pipe and fittings shall conform to National Sanitation Foundation Standard 14. 2.5 Installation shall comply with the latest installation instructions published by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry and shall conform to all local plumbing, building, and fire code requirements. Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two step process with primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564. The system shall be protected from chemical agents, fire stopping materials, thread sealant, plasticized vinyl products, or other aggressive chemical agents not compatible with PVC compounds. Systems shall be hydrostatically tested after installation. Testing with compressed air or gas is not recommended. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 Soil, waste and drain piping: 3.3 Pipe Joints DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING ,SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Horizontal soil, waste, and drain piping 4" and larger shall be given a minimum grade of 1/8" per foot unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Piping 3" and smaller shall have minimum grade 1/4" per foot. Main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to the roof line and 9" above as vents, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Locate plumbing vent terminals so they are a minimum of 10 feet horizontally from air intakes. Changes in pipe size or direction shall be made with standard fittings. Fittings shall be service weight when used on service weight pipe and extra heavy when used on extra heavy weight pipe. Reduction of flow is prohibited. Vent or tap fees will not be permitted on waste lines. 3.2 Exterior: Connection from interior piping to exterior piping will be provided under this section. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 1 A. Joints between cast iron soil pipe and clay pipe or PVC pipe shall be made with Femco flexible couplings. 3.4 Pipe Testing and Cleaning: All new soil, waste and drain lines and drainage and vent piping shall be tested before fixtures are installed by capping or plugging the openings and filling the entire system with water to a maximum height of 10 feet above the highest fixture opening of the section being tested, and allowing it to stand thus filled for a period of four hours without evidence of leakage. Contractor shall provide test tees if he desires to test the system in sections. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 2 Penal Gracie Water Closet; DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 46 13 - SECURITY WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS Provide and install Acorn Penal -Ware Blowout Jet Toilet 1675- W- 1- ULF- FVL- ADA -HS. Toilet bowl shall be fabricated from 14 gage, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded and exposed surfaces shall have a satin finish. Toilet shall be concealed blowout jet type with an elongated bowl, a self - draining flushing rim, and an integral contoured seat. Toilet shall meet ASME A112.19.3 -2008 and CSA B45.4 -2008 requirements and will flush with a minimum of 25 PSI flow pressure when used in conjunction with a minimum of 1.6 GPF. Toilet trap shall have a minimum 3 -1/2" seal that shall pass a 2 -1/8" diameter ball and be fully enclosed. Fixture shall withstand loadings of 3,000 pounds without permanent damage. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary fasteners for proper installation. Above fixture shall be furnished & mounted per ADA requirements. Furnish Flush Valve to ADA standards. Furnish Hinged Seat. SECURITY WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS 22 46 13 - 1 Penal (',fade T .avatory: J)IVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 4616 - SECURITY LAVATORIES AND SINKS Provide and install an Acorn Penal -Ware, 18" wide ADA 2010 Compliant Lavatory with Oval Bowl (Acorn 1652- 1- LF -3). Unit shall conform with ANSI, UFAS and ADA requirements for accessibility. Fixture shall be fabricated from 14 gage, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded and exposed surfaces shall have a satin finish. Countertop shall have an air - circulating, self - draining soap dish. Provide Air - Control pneumatically operated, metering, non -hold open valve with ADA compliant pushbutton. Valve and Bubbler conform with lead free requirements of NSF61, Section 9, 1997 and CHSC 116875. Cabinet interior shall be sound deadened with fire - resistant material. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary fasteners to complete installation. SECURITY LAVATORIES AND SINKS 22 46 16 - 1 Stainless Steel Drinking Fountains Provide and install Acorn Dura -Ware, ADA 2010 Compliant Drinking Fountain (2012- BC- 3 -FP). Fixture shall be fabricated from 14 gage, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded and exposed surfaces shall have a satin finish. Fixture shallbe furnished with an Air - Control self - closing valve, a bubbler with mouthguard, grid strainer with close elbow, and a mounting bracket. Valve and bubbler conform with lead -free requirements for NSF61, Section 9, 1997 and CHSC 116875. The pushbutton for the air control valve shall be ADA compliant. Installer shall furnish mounting screws, anchor shields and required reinforcement. Units to conform with ANSI, UFAS and ADA requirements for accessibility. Furnish Freeze Resistant Box. DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 4713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS DRINKING FOUNTAINS 22 47 13 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Work Included 1.2 Definitions DIVISION 23 - HEATING. VENTILATING. AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION 23 00 00 - HEATING. VFNTWLATING. AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) A. "The provisions of the Instructions to Bidders and of the Special Conditions, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications shall govern the work under this Division or Section the same as if incorporated herein." B. The work covered by Division 23 HVAC specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, piping, appliances, and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the complete installation of the mechanical systems, complete subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. Work to be performed under this division shall include the systems as further described elsewhere in this division. A. "Contractor" shall mean the contractor, his subcontractors, suppliers visiting the job site, and all assigns engaged by the contractor, either directly or indirectly, to engage the work described herein. B. "Provide" shall mean "Furnish, install, connect, test and commission ". C. "HVAC" shall mean "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning ". D. "Architect" shall mean "2KM Architects, Inc." E. "Engineer" shall mean "Facilities Engineering, LLC." 1.3 References A. Laws B. Codes 1. The following are known laws pertaining directly to the work: Federal Law: OSHA Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926 OSHA General Industry Standards, 29 CFR 1910 State Law: State of Georgia Laws and Regulations 2. Contractor shall pay all charges required by Permits and Inspection Fees. Deliver to the Architect all Certificates of Inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. The codes as shown in Section 01090 with dates as shown, shall form a part of this section of the specifications. The latest amendments in effect on day of bid shall apply. 2. The above code requirements are minimum. Where the contract drawings and specifications exceed the above codes and ordinance requirements then the contract drawings and specifications shall govern. C. Drawings 1. The following drawings are hereby made a part of this specification: M1.1 Mechanical Notes, Details & Schedules HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 1 1.4 Performance Criteria 2. Arrangement of mechanical work shall be as shown on the above drawings. 3. Engineering drawings show the engineer's intent as to attributes of the systems to be provided. These attributes include: a. Protection of life, safety & health of the public b. Desired performance of the system and compliance with appropriate codes c. Provisions for maintenance of the system d. Establish minimum levels of quality e. Arrangement as to client's wishes and functionality 4. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide complete, finished mechanical systems. Accordingly: a. Drawings are not intended to indicate all offsets and fittings. Examine drawings, investigate conditions to be encountered, and arrange work accordingly; furnish all fittings and offsets. b. Drawings are not intended to show in detail exact locations and connections for fixtures, equipment and accessories. Final connections shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. c. Measurement of drawings by scale shall not be used as dimensions for fabrication. Measurements for locating fixtures, equipment, ductwork, piping and accessories shall be made on the site and shall be based on actual job conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements. d. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and any work or material shown in one and omitted in the other, or described in the one and not shown in the other, or which may be implied by both or either, shall be furnished as though shown on both, in order to give a complete and first class installation. A. The complete finished HVAC system shall meet the following performance criteria. The Contractor shall provide remedy should the installation fail to meet the criteria listed below: 1. Acceptable Operation - System heats, ventilates and cools occupants of building to comfort year round 2. Tested in accordance with the specifications & drawings 3. Free of leaks 4. Free of objectionable noise 5. Free of odor 6. Low maintenance 7. Pleasing and Professional Appearance 8. Ease of maintenance 9. Well supported and braced 10. Meets Building and Fire Codes 1.5 Environmental Safety and Health HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 2 1.6 Remedy 1.9 Warranty A. The contractor shall conduct all operations in a safe, clean, organized, responsible and legal manner at all times. B. The contractor shall conduct all work in strict accordance with the OSHA construction safety standard 29 CFR 1926. C. The contractor shall obtain, read, and maintain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemical, products and compounds used on the project. The contractor shall satisfy the environmental, safety and health requirements of the MSDS for use and disposal. D. The contractor shall maintain a dedicated fire watch with an appropriate fire extinguisher on all hot work operations involving open flame, welding, soldering, brazing or any operation which could produce a fire. An additional fire watch shall be provided to the floor(s) below for work involving multiple floors. The fire watch shall last one hour past the end of the hot work. E. The finished work shall comply with the general OSHA industry standard 29 CFR 1910 and be shall be safe to the occupants. F. The contractor shall obtain and follow all additional Environmental , Safety and Health requirements of the facility owner and/or tenants. G. The contractor shall notify the owner in advance of any impairment to an operating safety or environmental system and follow applicable laws and the owner's procedure as to that impairment. This provisions includes fire suppression sprinlders, fire alarm, security alarms. A. Where the installation fails applicable law, regulation, code, manufacturer's warranty, manufacturer's installation instructions, these specifications, referenced engineering drawings, or architectural drawings, the contractor agrees to provide remedy. 1.7 Quality Control A. The contractor shall provide formal and documented measures to provide quality control on the work in accordance with applicable codes and standards, manufacturer's installation instructions, UL listings, 1.8 Quality Assurance A. The contractor shall provide formal and documented measures to provide quality control on the work in accordance with applicable codes and standards, manufacturer's installation instructions and UL listings. B. The contractor shall keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities and the engineer. C. The contractor shall self inspect the work prior to the invitation of any code official or external agency. A listing of deficiencies found shall be provided to the engineer. Any deficiencies noted in the self inspection shall be corrected prior to invitation of the code official. A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Unless otherwise specified the work shall be warranted against defect in material or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance. C. The contractor shall make installations in a way that does not violate codes & manufacturer's warranties. Should the installation fail these, the contractor shall provide remedy. 1.10 Installer Qualifications A. The contractor shall possess licenses and permits in the state where the work is being performed in accordance with the state requirements as to type work being performed. The job site supervisor on this HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 3 project must hold a valid Georgia Conditioned Air Contractor license (unrestricted) and certifications for installation work under this project. Submit copies of licenses and applicable certifications to the owner's representative. B. The contractor shall additional licenses and permits in the legal jurisdiction(s) where the work is being performed in accordance with the legal jurisdiction(s)' requirements as to type work being performed. C. The contractor shall satisfy insurance and bonding requirements of the general conditions to include Property Damage, Vehicle, Workman's compensation, and Umbrella coverage. D. The contractor shall acquire and posses additional licenses and permits as may be required by the county or municipality where the work occurs. E. The contractor shall meet qualifications,and acquire and possess certificates as required by applicable State and local laws, regulations and ordinances, applicable codes and standards, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), product UL listings, and/or material manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 Substitutions & Submittals A. Submittals B. Substitutions 1. Electrical data shall accompany equipment submittals and shall be provided in tabular form for each piece of equipment requiring electrical power. Form shall include all equipment listed on one or more pages as follows: Drawing, Symbol, Equipment, HP or KW, Volts of Ckts, Phase Ampacity Reqd., Number Fuse Reqd., Minimum Size, Maximum Size. 2. Equipment listed on the drawings has been used for the physical arrangement. When equipment listed as acceptable, equal or equipment which has received "prior approval" is used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide structural, ductwork, electrical, service clearances or other changes required. Submit list of changes required along with Shop Drawings. 1. Ten Day Prior Approval - Bidders proposing to substitute materials other than specified shall submit data on said equipment 10 business days prior to bid due date. The contractor shall provide supporting information to show that the proposed substitution is equal to that specified. The proposed substitution shall be identified by manufacturer and model number. The contractor shall note differences in supporting information. 2. Changes Arising From the Substitution a. The contractor is responsible for performing additional engineering required of the substitution at no additional cost to the owner. Example engineering includes structural and electrical modifications of connections necessary to properly effect the substitution. The contractor shall provide drawings for approval showing changes arising changes. b. The contractor is responsible for performing additional engineering required of the substitution at no additional cost to the owner. Example engineering includes structural and electrical modifications of connections necessary to properly effect the substitution. The contractor shall provide drawings for approval showing changes arising changes. C. Equal Performance - Where substitutions are made, and the substitution prove non equal, deficient or defective., the contractor agrees to provide remedy to make the installation equal to that specified at no additional cost to the owner. Said remedy may include removal of the substitution and replacement with equipment as specified. 2.2 Operating and Maintenance Manuals A. Furnish and deliver to the Architect for approval, three manuals in hardback binders covering details of operation and maintenance for all apparatus requiring service. Items shall include but shall not be limited to the following: HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR- CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 4 3.2 Coordination 1. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals, including parts lists, for each piece of equipment and accessory requiring service or maintenance, and the name, address and phone number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item. 2. Step -by -step procedure for starting and stopping each system. 3. Temperature control diagrams. B. A copy of the Automatic Temperature Control Diagrams and Start-Stop Procedure shall be framed under glass and mounted adjacent to the control panels. 2.3 Manufacturer's Certificates A. The following equipment and systems shall require certificates stating that each is installed and operating properly. Certificates shall be issued by and typed on manufacturer's letterhead: 1. All heating and air conditioning equipment 2. Automatic temperature control system PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The contractor shall visit the job site prior to submitting bid and examine conditions to satisfy himself as to existing conditions. B. The contractor shall obtain manufacturer's installation instructions for all items provided under this contract. Unless otherwise specified, all items shall be be installed in strict accordance with the codes, manufacturer's installation instructions, and applicable Underwriter's Laboratory listing. A. The mechanical work shall be coordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflict. B. The Contractor shall study all plans and specifications for this project and shall notify the Architect of any conflict between work under this Division and work under other Divisions of the specifications. Particular attention shall be noted to interferences, clearances between piping, electrical, structural work, building openings, and ductwork. 3.3 Protection of Work During Construction A. Provide protective covers, skids, plugs, caps and coating to protect equipment and materials from damage or deterioration during construction. Covers will not be required for coated cast iron pipe and fittings. B. Store equipment and material under cover and off the ground. C. For outdoor storage, protective covers of sheet plastic shall be fitted and ventilated. Covers shall be reinforced to withstand wind and precipitation. Set equipment and material on skids or platforms to avoid deterioration from splattering and ground water. D. Plug end of pipes where work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes. E. Close open ends of ductwork with temporary closures using sheet plastic taped in placed on horizontal ducts and 26 gauge sheet metal on vertical ducts. F. No air handling system shall be operated during construction period without filters in place to filter air entering the fan. G. Protect rotating parts of rotating equipment by sheet plastic taped in place. After installation is completed, dust and debris shall be brushed, swept, or vacuumed clean, then the protective covers shall be removed. Should the protection be broken and bearings of shaft seals be contaminated with foreign particles, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 5 such bearings and shafts shall be removed for cleaning. The apparatus shall not be started until the rotating parts are free of particles. 3.4 Excavation, Trenching and Backfill A. Excavation, trenching and backfill shall be in accordance with the specification division so entitled. 3.5 Cleaning and Painting A. General: Surfaces of metal, pipe, insulation and other materials and equipment furnished and installed under this section, where exposed, shall be cleaned of all grease, loose scale, dirt, rust, and other foreign matter in preparation for painting. Painting of such surfaces in mechanical equipment room and equipment and piping located outside the building, and all steel supports and hangers, shall be included in this section of the specifications. B. Materials and Application: All nameplates and controls shall be covered and protected during painting. Provide one (1) brushed applied primer coat and two (2) brushed applied finish coats of enamel paint as follows: 3.6 Safety Requirements 3.7 Sleeves Exterior Armaflex Insulation Exposed Steel Supports & Hangers (Interior) Equipment & Supports (exposed to weather) Steel Piping (Exterior) Armaflex Gray Machinery Gray Color selected by Architect Machinery Gray A. Provide guards shielding the perimeter and face of all belt drives, shafts, and couplings. The guards shall be furnished as part of the equipment and shall be removable. Provide openings in guards opposite drive and driven shafts to permit use of revolution counter. B. All rough and jagged edges of equipment, ductwork, and piping shall be ground smooth. All sharp or knife edges shall be rounded. Where sharp or knife edges cannot be rounded, a U- channel constructed of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel shall be secured over the edge. C. Each pressure vessel shall be provided with an ASME stamped relief valve rated for the working pressure of the vessel except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the drawings. Each relief valve shall be located in openings provided on the vessel, or, where openings are not provided, in the pipe line immediately adjacent to the vessel and between the vessel and any shut off valve. D. Other safety devices shall be as specified with equipment. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking all safety controls on each water heater before placing the equipment in operation. All relief valves and relief lines shall be installed, checked for specified operation, and determined to be free and clear of any obstructions. F. During performance tests, all safety devices for each system (including alarms and devices which are for the safety protection of equipment) shall be checked for specified performance. The set point and operating point for each device shall be recorded and approved by the Architect. G. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect five (5) copies of performance data on all safety devices. The data shall include the final setting of each device and the setting at which the device operates. The safety devices shall be identified as to system, equipment and function. A. Pipes and ducts passing through masonry and concrete construction (except concrete floor slabs on grade) shall be fitted with sleeves. Sleeves shall extend through the construction and shall be cut flush with each surface of the construction. Insulation, unless noted, shall be continuous through sleeves. Sleeves shall be concentric with the pipes or ducts and shall be large enough to provide clearance (1/4 inch minimum, 3/4 inch maximum) between the insulation (or bare metal if not insulated) and the inside of the sleeve, except as otherwise noted on drawings. Sleeves through fire or smoke walls or partitions shall be sealed fire and smoke tight by a UL approved sealing system. HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 6 B. Sleeves shall be installed no later than the time of installation of the pipe or duct. C. Sleeves for masonry construction other than poured concrete shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel with longitudinal seam overlapped' h" (min.) and secured with pop rivets or spot welded. D. Duct sleeves shall be 16 gauge (min) galvanized steel welded with clips for securing to form. The inside of the sleeves for poured concrete shall be filled with compacted sand to retain the shape of the sleeve. E. Sleeves shall be installed with 3" (min) clearance between adjacent sleeves. F. The space between the inside of each sleeve and the pipe or duct shall be sealed as detailed on the drawings. G. Refer to drawings for other details of sleeves. 3.8 Installation A. Contractor shall install ducts, piping, fixtures, and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner as approved by the Architect. Equipment shall be so arranged and fitted into available spaces that working parts are accessible for service without damage to building structure or finishes Where building openings are provided, equipment shall be arranged for coil and/or tube removal through the openings. Provide service clearance around equipment as recommended by the manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Before construction starts check locations of proposed equipment, pipe and ducts. Review drawings, verify grades, elevations, locations of structural elements, locations and sizes of chases and walls, methods and type of construction of floors, walls and partitions. Before start of construction report any unsatisfactory condition, error in drawings or specifications or conflict between mechanical and other trades. C. Establish location and elevation of foundations, walls and chases affecting location and layout of mechanical work. Locate sleeves, inserts and supports for mechanical installations. Plan and coordinate work in advance of installation by other trades to avoid cutting and patching of walls, floors and ceilings. D. Check space limitations and verify electric current before ordering any equipment; set large pieces of equipment inside building before walls are erected where equipment is too large to enter finished building. E. Equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's templates and printed instructions, except in cases of conflict with these specifications or contract drawings, confer with the Architect for decision. 3.9 Final Cleaning A. Remove all unused equipment tools, and materials. Clean all surfaces. END OF SECTION HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 7 DIVISION 23 - HEATING. VENTILATING. AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC') SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1- FABRICATION 1.1 Ducts shall conform to dimensions shown: shape of duct may be changed but cross - sectional area of altered duct shall not be less than that of duct indicated. The width to height ratio of altered ducts shall not exceed 4 to 1. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on inside. Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of ductwork. Internal ends of slip joints shall be installed in direction of flow. Elbow slip joints shall be installed in direction of flow. Elbows shall be minimum centerline radius of not less than 1 -1/2 times the width of duct unless otherwise indicated; where specified above, turning vanes shall be provided in elbow. Transitions in duct sizes shall be made with angles not exceeding 150 degrees unless otherwise indicated. Square elbows shall be fitted with double thickness turning vanes. Square throat -round heel elbows are not acceptable. 1.2 All sides of rectangular ducts over 12" shall be provided with roll seams 12" o.c. (min.) Cross breaking is acceptable. 1.3 All other details of fabrication shall be as specified in SMACNA Manuals listed hereinbefore. PART 2- SUPPORTS 2.1 Ducts 48" or more in width shall be supported on 4' -0" maximum centers. 2.2 Ducts less than 48" in width shall be supported on 8' -0" maximum centers. 2.3 Duct support details shall be as listed or shown in SMACNA Manuals specified hereinbefore. Provide beam clamps for attachment of supports to structural steel. END OF SECTION METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Work Included DIVISION 26 - EL.ECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL A. "The provisions of the Instructions to Bidders and of the Special Conditions, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications shall govern the work under this Division or Section the same as if incorporated herein." B. The work covered by Division 26 Electrical specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, conduits, wiring, raceways, appliances, and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the complete installation of the electrical systems, complete subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. Work to be performed under this division shall include the systems as further described elsewhere in this division. C. Include in the electrical work all the necessary supervision and the issuing of all coordinating information to any other trades who are supplying work to accommodate the electrical installations. 1.2 Definitions A. "Contractor" shall mean the contractor, his subcontractors, his suppliers visiting the job site, and all assigns engaged by the contractor, either directly or indirectly, to engage the work described herein. B. "Provide" shall mean "famish, install, connect, adjust and test. C. "Engineer" shall mean Facilities Engineering, LLC. 1.3 References A. Laws: The following are known laws pertaining directly to the work: 1. Federal Law: a. OSHA Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926 b. OSHA General Industry Standards, 29 CFR 1910 2. State Law: a. State of Georgia Laws and Regulations 3. Contractor shall pay all charges required by Permits and Inspection Fees. Deliver to the Engineer all Certificates of Inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Codes 1. The codes as shown in Section 01090 with dates as shown, shall form a part of this section of the specifications. The latest amendments in effect on day of bid shall apply. 2. The above code requirements are minimum Where the contract drawings and specifications exceed the above codes and ordinance requirements then the contract drawings and specifications shall govem. C. Drawings 1. The following engineering drawings are hereby made a part of this specification: E1.1 Electrical Notes, Details and Schedules E2.1 Electrical Plan E3.1 Electrical Site Plan 2. Arrangement of electrical work shall be as shown on the above drawings. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 1 3. Engineering drawings show the engineer's intent as to attributes of the systems to be provided. These attributes include: a. Protection of life, safety & health of the public b. Desired performance of the system and compliance with appropriate codes c. Provisions for maintenance of the system d. Establish minimum levels of quality e. Arrangement as to client's wishes and functionality 4. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide complete, finished electrical systems. Accordingly: a. Drawings are not intended to indicate all offsets and fittings. Examine drawings, investigate conditions to be encountered, and arrange work accordingly; furnish all fittings and offsets. b. Drawings are not intended to show in detail exact locations and connections for fixtures, equipment and accessories. Final connections shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. c. Measurement of drawings by scale shall not be used as dimensions for fabrication. Measurements for locating fixtures, equipment, ductwork, piping and accessories shall be made on the site and shall be based on actual job conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements. d. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and any work or material shown in one and omitted in the other, or described in the one and not shown in the other, or which may be implied by both or either, shall be furnished as though shown on both, in order to give a complete and first class installation. e. The drawings for electrical work utilize symbols and schematic diagrams which have no dimensional significance. The work shall therefore, be installed to fulfill the diagrammatic intent expressed on the electrical drawings. f. Review architectural drawings for door swings, cabinets, counters and other built -in equipment, condition indicated on architectural drawings shall govern. g. Coordinate electrical work with the architectural details, floor plans, elevations, structural and mechanical drawings. Provide fittings, junction boxes and accessories to meet conditions. h. Discrepancies shown on different drawings, between drawings and specifications or between drawings and field conditions shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer. i The drawings and specifications are complimentary and any work or material shown in one and omitted in the other, or described in the one and not shown in the other, or which may be implied by both or either, shall be furnished as though shown on both, in order to give a complete and first class installation. 5. One complete set of electrical drawings shall be reserved for as-built drawings. Any approved deviation from the contract drawings shall be recorded on these drawings. Drawings shall be checked monthly for completeness. Completed as-built drawings shall be presented to the Engineer prior to final inspection . 1.4 Remedy A. Where the installation fails applicable law, regulation, code, manufacturer's warranty, manufacturer's installation instructions, these specifications, referenced engineering drawings, or architectural drawings, the contractor agrees to provide remedy. 1.5 Quality Control A. The contractor shall provide formal and documented measures to provide quality control on the work in accordance with applicable codes and standards, manufacturer's installation instructions, UL listings. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 2 1.6 Quality Assurance A. The contractor shall provide formal and documented measures to provide quality control on the work in accordance with applicable codes and standards, manufacturer's installation instructions and UL listings. B. The contractor shall keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities and the engineer. C. The contractor shall self inspect the work prior to the invitation of any code official or external agency. A listing of deficiencies found shall be provided to the engineer. Any deficiencies noted in the self inspection shall be corrected prior to invitation of the code official. 1.7 Warranty A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Unless otherwise specified the work shall be warranted against defect in material or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance. All systems and component parts shall be guaranteed for one year from the date of final acceptance of the complete project. Defects found during this guarantee period shall be promptly corrected at no additional cost to the owner. C. The contractor shall make installations in a way that does not violate codes & manufacturer's warranties. Should the installation fail these, the contractor shall provide remedy. 1.8 Electrical Connections A. All equipment requiring electrical power connections shall be connected under this Division of these specifications. B. Where electrical connections to equipment requires specific locations, such locations shall be obtained from shop drawings. C. Drawings for location of conduit stub -up boxes mounted in wall or floor to serve specific equipment, shall not be scaled. D. Electrical circuits to equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications are bases on design loads. If actual equipment furnished has loads other than design loads electrical circuits and protective devices shall be revised to be compatible with equipment furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. Any revisions must have prior approval by the Engineer. E. Where equipment is indicated to be served thru conduit stub -up, conduit shall be stubbed up not less than four inches above floor where transition shall be made to seal tight flexible conduit for connection to equipment. F. The Contractor's attention is invited to other Divisions of these specifications, where equipment requiring electrical service or electrically related work is specified to become fully aware of the scope of work required for electrical service or related work. G. Where equipment utilizing electricity power is supplied separate from the electrical work, and is energized, controlled or otherwise made operative by electrical work, the testing to provide the proper functional performance of such wiring systems shall be conducted by the trade responsible for the equipment. The electrical work shall, however, include cooperation in such testing and the making available of any necessary testing or adjustments to the electrical equipment. H. Heating, air conditioning, and ventilating equipment is specified to be furnished and installed under other sections of these specifications. The controls, likewise are specified to be furnished. All necessary wiring, wiring troughs and circuit breakers for power for this equipment under other sections shall be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications, in accordance with the plans and/or diagrams furnished with the equipment, or shown on these plans. Starters furnished by the Mechanical Contractor shall be installed under this Division of the specifications. Power wiring to auxiliary equipment on a piece of equipment remote from its main terminal box and interlocking of apparatus shall be accomplished under Heating Ventilating Equipment section of the specifications. Conduit and outlets for control wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 of these specifications. Control conductors for mechanical equipment shall not be installed in same conduit with power conductors. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 3 1.9 Deviations A. No deviations from the plans and specifications shall be made without the full knowledge and consent of the Engineer or his authorized representative. B. Should the Contractor find at any time during progress of the work that, in his judgment, existing conditions make desirable a modification in requirements covering any particular item or items, he shall report such items promptly to the Engineer for his decision and instruction. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 All materials shall be new and in accordance with applicable standards, I.E., American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Underwriters' Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA), Edison Electric Institute (EE1), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), UL approved equipment shall bear UL labels. 2.2 Materials specified by manufacturer's name shall be used unless approval of other manufacturers are listed in addenda to these specifications. 2.3 Drawings indicating proposed layout of space, all equipment to be installed therein and clearance between equipment shall be submitted, where substitution of materials alter space requirements on the drawings. 2.4 Material of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2.5 Materials not readily available from local sources shall be ordered immediately upon approval. 2.6 The Architect or Engineer shall have authority to reject any materials, or equipment, not complying with these specifications and have the Contractor replace materials so rejected immediately upon notification of rejection. 2.7 Any material or equipment so rejected shall be removed from the job within 24 hours of such rejection, otherwise the Engineer may have same removed at the Contractor's expense. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The contractor shall visit the job site prior to submitting bid and examine conditions to satisfy himself as to existing conditions. B. The contractor shall obtain manufacturer's installation instructions for all items provided under this contract. Unless otherwise specified, all items shall be be installed in strict accordance with the codes, manufacturer's installation instructions, and applicable Underwriter's Laboratory listing. 3.2 Protection of Work During Construction A. Provide protective covers, skids, plugs, caps and coating to protect equipment and materials from damage or deterioration during construction. B. Store equipment and material under cover and off the ground. Store the equipment and materials where they will have adequate dryness prior to installation. C. For outdoor storage, protective covers of sheet plastic shall be fitted and ventilated. Covers shall be reinforced to withstand wind and precipitation. Set equipment and material on skids or platforms to avoid deterioration from splattering and ground water. D. Plug end of pipe and conduits where work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes. E. Protect rotating parts of rotating equipment by sheet plastic taped in place. After installation is completed, dust and debris shall be brushed, swept, or vacuumed clean, then the protective covers shall be removed. Should the protection be broken and bearings of shaft seals be contaminated with foreign particles, such bearings and shafts shall be removed for cleaning. The apparatus shall not be started until the rotating parts are free of particles. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 4 F. Remove all protective coverings prior to the final inspections. 3.3 Excavation, Trenching and Back fill A. Excavation, trenching and back fill shall be in accordance with the specification division so entitled. 3.4 Installation A. Contractor shall install conduits, raceways, devices, boxes, fixtures, and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner as approved by the Engineer. Equipment shall be so arranged and fitted into available spaces that working parts are accessible for service without damage to building structure or finishes. Where building openings are provided, equipment shall be arranged for access through the openings. Provide service clearance around equipment as recommended by the manufacturer's printed instructions, warranty or UL Listing. B. Before construction starts check locations of proposed equipment, pipe and ducts. Review drawings, verify grades, elevations, locations of structural elements, locations and sizes of chases and walls, methods and type of construction of floors, walls and partitions. Before start of construction report any unsatisfactory condition, error in drawings or specifications or conflict between mechanical and other trades. C. Establish location and elevation of foundations, walls and chases affecting location and layout of mechanical work. Locate sleeves, inserts and supports for mechanical installations. Plan and coordinate work in advance of installation by other trades to avoid cutting and patching of walls, floors and ceilings. D. Check space limitations and verify electric current before ordering any equipment; set large pieces of equipment inside building before walls are erected where equipment is too large to enter finished building. E. Equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's templates and printed instructions, except in cases of conflict with these specifications or contract drawings, confer with the Engineer for decision. F. The Engineer or his representative shall have the authority to reject any workmanship not complying with the contract documents. G. The Electrical Contractor shall personally or through an authorized licensed and competent electrician, constantly supervise the work from beginning to complete and final inspection. H. Locations of proposed raceway, riser, location of structural elements, location and size of chases method and type of construction of floors, walls, partition, etc., shall be verified before construction starts. I. Consult owner and utility companies for underground lines before any underground work is started. Electrical subcontractors shall be responsible for any damage. 3.5 Operating and Maintenance Manuals A. Furnish and deliver to the Engineer for approval, three manuals in hardback binders covering details of operation and maintenance for all apparatus requiring service. Items shall include but shall not be limited to the following: 3.6 Field Testing 1. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals, including parts lists, for each piece of equipment and accessory requiring service or maintenance, and the name, address and phone number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item. Provide electrical characteristics for all wiring devices. 2. Step -by -step procedure for starting and stopping each system. 3. Lighting fixtures, including voltage, lamps and where applicable the ballast used in each fixture and associated Dimmers (House and Stage). A. Submit Test Reports in accordance with referenced standards in this section. After completion of the installation and splicing, and prior to energizing the conductors, perform wire and cable continuity and insulation tests as herein specified before the conductors are energized. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 5 B. Contractor must provide all necessary test equipment, labor, and personnel to perform the tests, as herein specified. C. Isolate completely all wire and cable from all extraneous electrical connections at cable terminations and joints. Substation and switchboard feeder breakers, disconnects in combination motor starters, circuit breakers in panel boards, and other disconnecting devices must be used to isolate the circuits under test. D. Perform Insulation- Resistance Test on each field - installed conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential must be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Take readings after 1 minute and until the reading is constant for 15 seconds Minimum insulation- resistance values must not be less than 25 Megohms for 300 volt rated cable and 100 Megohms for 600 volt rated cable. For circuits with conductor sizes 8 AWG and smaller insulation resistance testing is not required. E. Perform Continuity Test to insure correct cable connection (i.e. correct phase conductor, grounded conductor, and grounding conductor wiring) end -to end. Any damages to existing or new electrical equipment resulting from contractor miswiring will be repaired and re- verified at contractor's expense. All repairs must be approved by the CO prior to acceptance of the repair. F. Conduct Phase- Rotation Tests on all three -phase circuits using a phase - rotation indicating instrument. Perform phase rotation of electrical connections to connected equipment clockwise, facing the source. Final acceptance will depend upon the successful performance of wire and cable under test. Do not energize any conductor until the final test reports are reviewed and approved by the CO. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 6 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL I . 11 H- 1■uIk A1:, t 1 1: 1.1 The complete finished Electrical system shall meet the following performance criteria. The Contractor shall provide remedy should the installation fail to meet the criteria listed below: A. Grounded and Bonded- All exposed metal shall be at ground potential. Neutrals shall be bonded to ground in accordance with code. B. Contained- All current carrying conductors are contained within approved enclosures panels, boxes and raceways. All lids and covers securely in place. C. Acceptable Operation - System provides voltage at without flickering. Switches shall operate in a logical fashion. D. Tested in accordance with the referenced laws, codes, specifications & drawings E. Free of objectionable noise either electrical or acoustical. F. Safe: Free of electrical potential, Free of heat or short- circuits. All exposed surfaces safe for human touch. G. Low maintenance H. Pleasing and Professional Appearance I. Ease of maintenance J. Well supported and braced K. Meets Building and Fire Codes, Regulatory requirement. L. Labeled: All circuit panel directories completed. Equipment and panels labeled END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAI, ,SECTION 26 0519 - LOW- VOLTA('EIR_FFLECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANT) CABLES PART 1 - SECONDARY ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION CONDUCTORS 1.1 Acceptable manufacturers are: General, Okonite, Senator, Triangle, Anaconda, Cyprus Room, Phelps Dodge, Carol and Southwire. 1.2 Ratings and sizes A. Shall be not less than indicated on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC. B. Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG copper provided the maximum voltage drops in the control circuits will not adversely affect the operation of the controls. C. Conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are for copper conductors. 1.3 Conductors and ground wires A. Shall be copper B. Size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded C. Size No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid 1.4 Above ground conductor insulation shall be the NEC type THEN. Under no circumstances shall asbestos insulation be used. Below grade conductor insulation shall be NEC Type THWN. NOTE: Power wiring for raceway above stage lighting shall be NEC Type "Z ". 1.5 Wire shall be factory color coded in size No. 10 and smaller. Color shall be by integral pigmentation with a separate color for each phase, neutral and grounding conductor. Color code per phase shall be continuous throughout the project. 1.6 Manufacturer's name and other pertinent information shall be marked or molded clearly on the overall jacket's outside surface or incorporated on marker tapes within the cables and wires at reasonable intervals along the cables and wires. 1.7 Cables and wires indicated on the drawings for communication and signaling systems are for typical systems. Install cables and wires for the system being installed. 1.8 All wiring shall be in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.9 Every coil of wire shall be in the original wrapping and shall bear the Underwriters' Label of approval. 1.10 Where wires are left for connection to any fixture or an apparatus, spare wire or cables shall be provided at the ends for connections. Fixture connections at the outlet box shall be made with insulated wire connectors. 1.11 Outer jackets shall be color coded three phase or single phase circuits, 120/208 volts: Phase A - Black, Phase B - Red, Phase C - Blue, Neutral - White, Insulated ground wire - Green. 1.12 For large power cables and wires which do not have color coded jackets: No. 8 or larger, install bands of adhesive non - fading colored tape or slip -on bands of colored plastic tubing over the cables and wires at their originating and terminations points and at all outlets of junction boxes. Color shall be permanent and shall withstand cleaning. 1.13 No circuit wiring shall be smaller than No. 12. Where the homerun exceeds 80' -0" in length, number 10 (minimum) wire shall be used even though all such circuits are not indicated on the plans. END OF SECTION LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL, ,SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- SECONDARY POWER GROUNDING 1.1 Grounding shall strictly conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code and the National Electrical Safety Code. 1.2 Building service ground shall be connected to the cold water service main, gas main and to (3) 3/4" diameter x 10' -0" driven ground rod or rods and shall be sized as shown on the drawings. A. Connection to cold water pipe shall be made to the main water line entering the building. Connections shall be made ahead of any valves of fittings whose removal may interrupt ground continuity. A bonding jumper of the same size as the grounding conductor shall be installed around the water meter. 1.3 Not Used B. Ground rods shall be 3/4" diameter x 10' -0' copper clad. Top of rod shall be installed 6" below finished grade. Connections to ground rods shall be made by chemical weld process. Resistance to ground shall not exceed twenty -five ohms. Not more than two ground rods shall be required and these shall be spaced not less than three feet apart. C. Upon completion of the ground rod installation, the Contractor shall record the grounding reading. Grounding resistance reading shall be taken before connection is made to the building code water piping system. Ground resistance readings shall not be taken within forty-eight hours of rainfall. Results of ground resistance readings shall be forwarded, in writing, immediately to the Architect. 1.4 All non - current carrying parts of electrical equipment shall be grounded. Continuity of ground shall be maintained through metallic raceway systems, and when called for through a properly sized green insulated grounding conductor in all non - metallic raceway systems. 1.5 All screwed conduit connections shall be securely and firmly tightened with pipe wrenches. 1.6 If compression fittings are used with electrical metallic tubing, each connection shall be securely and firmly tightened with channel lock pliers. 1.7 All flexible conduit connections shall be supplemented with a bonding jumper installed "inside" the flexible conduit. Bonding jumper on the outside of the flexible conduit is not acceptable. 1.8 Bonding and grounding bushing with nylon insulated throat and screw lugs shall be installed on all feeder conduits and conduit 1" or larger for positive bonding to the enclosure. 1.9 Nylon insulated steel bushing shall be installed on all 3/4" or smaller rigid conduits at all enclosures. When bushing has been firmly and securely tightened, a minimum of 3 threads shall be engaged. 1.10 All plastic conduit or other non - conductive raceways shall carry a grounding conductor sized in accordance with the National Electric Code. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.1 Install conduit or EMT clamps: A. At intervals as required by the NEC. B. Above suspended ceilings, metal supports may be installed as permitted by the NEC. C. Trapeze, split ring, band or clevis hanger may be installed as permitted by the NEC. Trapeze hangers shall be structural metal channels, angle irons or preformed metal channel shapes with the conduit and EMT runs held on specific center by U bolts, clips or clamps. D. Chain, wire or perforated strap supports will not be acceptable. E. Fasten the clamps and other supports as follows: 1. For new masonry or concrete structures, install threaded metal inserts prior to pouring the concrete. 2. For existing solid masonry or reinforced concrete structures a. Install expansion anchors and bolts or approved power - set fasteners. b. Expansion anchors and bolts shall be not less than 1/4 inch diameter and shall extend not less than 3 inches into the concrete or masonry. c. Power -set fasteners shall be not less than 1/4 inch diameter and shall extend not less than 1 -1/4 inch into the concrete. 3. For hollow masonry install toggle bolts. Bolts supported only by plaster will not be accepted. 4. For metal structures install machine screws. 5. Attachments to wood plug, raw plug, soft metal inserts or wood blocking will not be permitted. 1.2 For vertical runs of conduit of EMT: A. Install supports for conduit, EMT, cables and wires at intervals as required by the NEC and as indicated on the drawings. B. Conduit and EMT supports shall be supported by framing for the floors. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: Raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections 1.2 Definitions 1.5 Coordination 1. Fire stopping for fire stopping materials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire -rated elements 2. Basic Electrical Material and Method for Raceway and box supports 3. Wiring Devices C. Unless otherwise specified, all power and lighting wiring shall be conduit raceways as herein described. A grounding conductor sized per NEC shall be provided. The conductor shall either be solid green, or if XIiHN cable, identified with green tape per NEC. D. Where the building construction permits conduits shall be concealed in building construction. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.3 Submittals: Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.4 Quality Assurance: Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Must comply with NFPA 70. A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including Light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. B. It is the responsibility of the contractor to plan and sequence the work as to the conceal conduits as specified. Conduit to be concealed shall not be covered up until it has been inspected by the Engineer and appropriate code authorities. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 Metal Conduit and Tubing A. Acceptable Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems, Inc., Allied Tube and Conduit Div., Alflex Inc., Anaconda Metal Hose, Grinnell Co. /Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div., Triangle PLC, Inc., Wheatland Tube Co. B. RMC- Rigid metal conduit shall be made of steel, shall be of standard pipe dimensions, shall be smooth inside and out, ends reamed after cutting, shall comply with UL 6 and ANSI C80.1 and shall be galvanized by the hot -dip process. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in all exposed areas above slab where a) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 raceway could be exposed to physical damage or abuse or b) in wet areas above slab. Fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be threaded. C. Fittings & Boxes: Gaskets must be solid. Conduit fittings with blank covers must have gaskets, except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run where drainage is required. Covers must have captive screws and be accessible after the work has been completed. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit shall comply with UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6.. IMC shall be made of steel, of standard pipe dimensions, smooth inside and out, ends reamed after cutting and shall be galvanized. Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings. E. EMT : Electrical metallic tubing shall be used in dry concealed areas above slab and in areas where raceway is shielded against physical damage (in truss space, in roof purlin space ) EMT shall be steel, of standard pipe dimensions, smooth inside and out, ends reamed after cutting and shall be galvanized. EMT shall be in accordance with UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. and must be zinc coated steel. F. Couplings and connectors must be zinc - coated, rain tight, gland compression with nylon insulated throat. Crimp, spring, or set screw type fittings are not acceptable. All fittings shall be "UL" approved. EMT must be grounded in accordance with NFPA 70, using pressure grounding connectors especially designed for EMT. G. FMC: Flexible metallic conduit must comply with UL 1 and be galvanized steel. Fittings for flexible metallic conduit must be specifically designed for such conduit and shall have nylon insulated throat. H. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be provided with a protective jacket of PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes. Fittings for liquid tight flexible conduit shall be specifically designed for such conduit have nylon insulated throat. Liquid tight flexible conduit and fittings shall meet NEC 356, CEC 12 -1300, UL 1660, and ANSI/NFPA 79 -1985 Section 15 -6, UL 514B I. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. J. Surface Raceways and Assemblies: Surface metal raceways and multi- outlet assemblies must conform to NFPA 70. Receptacles must conform to NEMA WD 1, Type 5 -20R. K. Wireway and Auxiliary Gutter Straight sections and fittings must be bolted together to provide a rigid, mechanical connection and electrical continuity. Dead ends of wireways and auxiliary gutters must be closed. Plug all unused conduit openings. 2.2 Nonmetallic Conduit A. Acceptable Manufacturers: American International, Anaconda Metal Hose, Carton Electrical Products. B. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit shall be Schedule 80 PVC as indicated. Rigid nonmetallic conduit must comply with NEMA TC 2, UL 651, NEC 352 and shall be ETL Listed PVC with wall thickness not less than Schedule 80. , Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit shall be used underground and beneath slab -on- grade. In no case shall plastic conduit be exposed; switch to rigid steel conduit when turning up exposed. Plastic conduit shall be made from virgin polyvinyl chloride C -300 compound. Schedule 40 plastic conduit shall be minimum size 3/4 ". C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. Fittings shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the conduit to assure system integrity and meet NEMA TC -3, UL 514B & NEC 352. Conduit and fittings shall carry a UL label. 2.3 Metal Wireways A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hoffman, Robroy Industries, Square D, Manufacturer providing equal product in accordance with Section 01600. B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1. C. Minimum Size: Wireway and auxiliary gutters must be a minimum 4- by 4 inch trade size conforming to UL 870. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold -down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. E. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. F. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. G. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. H. Surface raceways must be mounted plumb and level, with the base and cover secured. Minimum circuit run must be three -wire with one wire designated as ground. 2.4 Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Adalet -PLM, Carlon Electrical Products, Cooper Crouse - Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc., Crouse - Hinds, Daniel Woodhead Co., Killark Electric Manufacturing Co., O- Z/Gedney, RACO, Thomas & Betts Corporation, Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast -Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. F. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush Latch. G. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panel boards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.5 Factory Finishes: Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory- assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Raceway Application A. Outdoors 1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. 3. Underground, Single or Grouped Run: RNC. 4. Connection to Vibrating or Oily Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4. Boxes located on the exterior of the building shall be watertight. Covers shall be secured with tamperproof screws. B. Indoors RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 1. Exposed: RMC or IMC below roof trusses or purlins, EMT above. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: RMC 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel. 6. Lightning Protection Down Conductors: RNC. 7. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch trade size. 8. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 3.3 Installation A. Do not combine conduit home runs. Each home run shall be separately routed directly to panel unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Make bends and offsets so internal diameter is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends parallel to or by right angles to structural members considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. 1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1 inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. J. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. L. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with lock nuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install lock nuts with dished part against box. Use two lock nuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use jolypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 2001b. tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. O. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver- operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Flexible conduit must not be considered a ground conductor. Install 2nd ground conductor across flexible connections where redundant grounding required (patient care). Use flexible metallic conduit to connect recessed fixtures from outlet boxes in ceilings, transformers, and other approved assemblies. Q Rigid steel conduit and EMT shall be not less than 1/2 inch trade size and not less than required by the NEC or indicated. However, where permitted by the NEC, smaller size flexible metal conduit may be used only for individual lighting fixtures. R. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. S. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. T. Install hinged -cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. U. Outlet boxes installed in rated walls shall be installed in accordance with the U.L. requirements of the respective wall assembly in order to maintain the U.L. fire rating of the wall. V. Outlet boxes installed in lead -lined walls shall have lead installed behind the box in order to maintain the shielding of the wall. W. Site lighting raceways shall be installed minimum 24 inches below grade. 3.4 Protection and Cleaning A. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized fmishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 manufacturer. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory- finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. C. Cleaning: On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. D. Outlet boxes attached to conduit above the ceiling or in accessible areas shall have the cover painted by the color code per the identification section. END OF SECTION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 PART 1- LABELS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR EL,ECTRICAI, SYMEMS 1.1 Label all equipment, switches, and controls (except wall mounted space thermostats) furnished under this section with engraved bakelite labels indicating the name or function of each. Labels shall be secured with a minimum of 2 brass screws. Where screws cannot be secured to equipment, contact cement shall be used to secure labels to equipment. Surfaces shall be cleaned of oil and grease before cement is applied. Letters for equipment labels shall be 1/4" minimum height. Where two or more pieces are furnished, each piece shall be identified as No. 1 or No. 2 in addition to the name of the equipment. Bakelite labels for equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4" high. PART 2 - EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.1 Materials A. Laminated plastic plates with 3/16" high white letter etched on black background. B. Plates shall be permanently mounted utilizing pop rivets or super glue. C. Painted, stenciled or indented tape identification is not acceptable. 2.2 Item Identification A. All electrical apparatus such as wiring troughs, panel boards, individual circuit breakers, transformers and disconnect switches shall have laminated plastic identification plates. Identification shall match labeling shown on drawings. B. A "steel" circuit directory frame, and a directory card with a plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of each panel door. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit and the areas served. Spaces or room numbers shown on the drawings are not the final numbers to be assigned to these areas. The Contractor shall before completion of the project obtain from the Engineer final space or room numbers so that it can be typed onto the directory. C. Circuit breakers and disconnects shall identify the equipment served and circuit and panel from which it is served. D. On all panel boards the exterior identification plate shall match that on the drawings and the panel and circuit number serving the panel shall be designated within the panel. E. Furnish and install identification plates for lighting panel boards, motor control centers, all line voltage heating ventilating control panels, fire detector and sprinkler pilot lights, disconnect switches, manual starting switches, starters. Process control devices and pilot lights must identification plates. Identification plates must be furnished for all line voltage circuit breakers, identifying the equipment served, voltage, power source. Circuits 480 volts and above must have conspicuously warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements. F. Outlet boxes attached to conduit above the ceiling or in accessible areas shall have the cover painted by the following color code: Normal Power - -Not Painted Emergency -- Yellow Fire Alarm -- Red Telecommunications -- White END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1 �r SIN w r — — — — ■r 1118 — war — it — — — — M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1